.* ^*V •. 
 
 ♦ aV ^ . 
 
 <*-^>* %"-W/>— « 'J 
 
 ?.."•♦ *c <*' 
 
 °v .''saw **o* 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 V ** % '.' 
 
 
 • -**S ••SW?-' V*\ 
 
 ^HA* «^ < ;/» 
 
 "ov* 
 
 • !••* *> 
 
 
 >\.i^% 
 
 .C° V ^^%°o ,/\'^\ *4*k°» 
 
 
 o *© 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 r o? 
 
 a^ ;^i^^o' ip* 
 
 
 
 *o • » * ^ 
 
 r o«"S_^> 
 
 <> **TV«* .,0 
 
 ^ 
 
 o. *o • » * J\ 
 
 
 •• V 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' .stf^>« 
 
 >•*. 
 
 ;** . ♦* "^ \« »»* ^?- ^ •: 
 
 
 / "v^^V^ "\;^^>^ V'^Pv*' ^ 
 
THE 
 
 MODERN GREEK GRAMMAR 
 
 OF 
 
 < 
 
 FORMERLY ONE OF THE PROFESSORS IN THE GREEK COLLEGE OF 
 
 S CIO; 
 
 TRANSLATED FROM THE ORIGINAL FRENCH, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE REV. GPORGE WINNOCK, A.B. 
 
 OF MAGDALEN HALL, OXFORD, 
 CHAPLAIN TO THE FORCES IN THE IONIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Such parts as required, it will be found to have been so modified, as to adapt it pe- 
 culiarly to the English Student, particularly with respect to Pronunciation, in the 
 Arrangement of the Declensions, and in treating of the equivalent expression of 
 Time in the conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 The local situation of the Translator has afforded him manifest advantages ; and 
 he trusts that the kindness of his Greek Friends, from various parts of the Continent 
 of Greece, has enabled him to give a considerable increase of value to a Work already 
 highly estimable. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 PUBLISHED FOR THE TRANSLATOR, BY J. SOUTER, 73, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH 
 YARD; AND SOLD BY RIVINGTON AND CO. WATERLOO PLACE; PARKER AND 
 CO. OXFORD ; AND DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 1825. 
 
 [Entered at Stationer's Halt.'] • 
 

 ^ 
 
 j 
 
TO 
 
 HIS EXCELLENCY 
 
 SIR FREDERICK ADAM 
 
 KNIGHT GRAND CROSS OF THE MOST DISTINGUISHED ORDER OF 
 S. 1 MICHAEL AND S. 1 GEORGE, 
 
 KNIGHT COMMANDER OF THE MOST HONOURABLE MILITARY ORDER 
 
 OF THE BATH, 
 KNIGHT OF THE AUSTRIAN IMPERIAL MILITARY ORDER OF 
 
 MARIA TERESA, 
 
 KNIGHT OF THE RUSSIAN IMPERIAL ORDER OF 
 S.« ANN OF THE FIRST CLASS , 
 
 THE PROTECTING SOVEREIGN'S 
 LORD HIGH COMMISSIONER 
 
 TO THE UNITED STATES OF THE JONIAN ISLANDS 
 
 AND 
 
 LIEUTENANT GENERAL COMMANDING THE FORCES 
 SERVING IN THE SAME , 
 
 8$c. , §•<?. , 85c. 
 
 This humble attempt to facilitate to his Countrymen the acquisition 
 of the present Language of Greece is respectfully 
 Dedicated 
 
 My the 
 
 EDITOR. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT, 
 
 J. he proposal of a New Grammar lias in it certainly 
 nothing very extraordinary to Englishmen , particularly 
 since Foreign Languages have been so much more studied 
 than formerly. Commerce and Travelling, and the conse- 
 quent interest and curiosity aiioiit flip. "Literature , Anti- 
 quities, Customs, Manners and Resources of almost every 
 People , have of late greatly quickened the zeal of cur 
 .Countrymen in Philological Pursuits. New Grammars of 
 the French and Italian Languages, though they have long 
 since attained a high classical character , are continually 
 issuing from the British press. 
 
 In a language till lately little cultivated, even amongst 
 those who speak it, it is not to he wondered at , that a 
 good Grammar should long be a desideratum ; and that 
 many attempts should be made , before any thing like 
 an approximation to excellence should be attained : but 
 this is least of all to be wondered at in a Language flow- 
 ins; directly from a source of the very highest celebrity 
 in Literary Annals , from the Language of Homer. The 
 Greeks themselves who write on the subject , wish very 
 naturally to overleap , if it were possible , the Great Gulf, 
 the corruptions of ages , lying between them and their 
 far famed Ancestors , and to bring their Disciples into 
 immediate contact with the perfection of speech. This is 
 Utterly impracticable. 
 
VI 
 
 It has been almost invariably the misfortune of those 
 who have written before this Author to perplex rather 
 than illustrate their subject. Nothing previously written 
 by a Foreigner could lay any just claims to the Title of 
 a Grammar. All attempts of the kind by natives have been 
 so very meagre as to afford little assistance to Foreigners: 
 many have been more perplexing than useful even among 
 themselves, from being shackled by some unbending Theory, 
 or from a very natural propensity to lean more, than at 
 the present epoch is justifiable, to their Ancient Classics. 
 
 Of these latter Athanasius Chris topulo is considered to 
 have higher pretensions than most of his contemporaries ; 
 but even he has spent more than one third of his small 
 Volume on matter quite irrelevant , wherever his Student 
 is not already a deeply read Hellenist , His sixty two first 
 pages are devoted to proving that the proper Name of the 
 existing Language would beiEolo-Doric; it being manifestly, 
 according iu inm , little more than a substitution , Gr ge- 
 neral prevalence of the /Eolic and Doric Dialects over all 
 the others of Ancient Greece. Little of general utility could 
 be expected from such a work as this. The Grammar of 
 Darvaris , as far as foreigners are concerned , has even 
 lower pretensions. Are we then to stop till the language 
 be perfect , be as classical as its Parent, before Merchants 
 and Travellers , unacquainted with Ancient Greek , are to 
 have a guide for the exigencies of the Day, 
 
 Chris topulo , aware of the warping partialities, and very 
 general failure of his countrymen, gives them this excellent 
 counsel: though his Devotion to his own Creation , the 
 ./Eolo- Doric Theory , has made him almost as regardless of 
 General Usefulness as others. 
 
 » An Author who writes a Grammar ( he says ) ought 
 » to compose it with a reference , not to what he wishes 
 » a Language should be , but to what the Language ? he 
 » undertakes to teach , actually is. Otherwise it is not a 
 » Grammar , but like the Monster in Homer » 
 
VII 
 
 » rif -or 0e Atciy, gwiQiv ll Afzxav , (j.iucnll X'y.cLifz.D 
 
 The Translator must trespass on his Reader's patienca 
 for one moment more; and he will then leave him with 
 his Author. That a Work of this nature , tolerahly well 
 ■executed , has long been desired by that part of the 
 British Public interested in the subject, will be , he is 
 sure , universally allowed. Whether his Readers will think 
 as highly as himself of the Original ; Whether , by translat- 
 ing, modifying and adapting the Work to the use of the 
 English Student , he have in any degree supplied the chasm 
 in the series of Philological Auxiliaries ; or whether he 
 have but added one to the almost daily disappointments 
 of the Literary World, he must submit ? with hopes of 
 indulgence, to the Public. 
 
 If, however , the Work be of any Value to an English- 
 man , it is most certainly worthy of appearing in an 
 English Costume , for as, in sound Logic, it is a manifest 
 error to explain one Term by another , more, or equally 
 obscure or difficult , and it is the perfection of illustration 
 to use the easiest and most explicit ; so in a Science , 
 materially connected , as Grammar is, with sound reason- 
 ing, it is at length , fortunately, deemed an absurdity to 
 teach one foreign Language through the medium of ano- 
 ther , whenever the Master can avail himself of the lan- 
 guage of his pupil. 
 
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 Another Grammar! and after that Grammar probably 
 very shortly a double Dictionary. What a multitude of 
 Books to learn Nothing ! When will men speak one lan- 
 guage only ? When will one Grammar and one Vocabulary 
 alone be sufficient to enable Men from pole to pole to 
 understand each other? I join the Friends of Science in 
 their philosophic Wish , and am no more inclined than 
 they , to burthen my memory with words and phrases , 
 without the acquisition of a single additional idea. But 
 since this aspiration will not , it is probable , be very 
 soon attended to ; and the imperfection inherent. in human 
 nature will long, and perhaps for ever, maintain a differ- 
 ence of idioms , I think that to increase their means of 
 understanding , and of communicating with each other , 
 is to render a real service to Men , as well as to Science. 
 And if what has been often repeated be true, that there 
 is no book so bad as to contain nothing good , how much 
 more certain it is , that there is no people ; whatever may 
 be its state of civilization and mental advancement, with 
 which it is not interesting to be made acquainted , and 
 which may not furnish some curious observation , some 
 useful lesson to the sage. But this proposition , true in 
 general , is much more so with respect to the Greeks , 
 who are the descendants of the Ancient Preceptors of the 
 Human Race , of that Sublime Nation which is the settled 
 object of our grateful admiration. It is more particularly at 
 such a juncture as the present , when , by generous efforts 
 and Heroic Sacrifices , they are struggling to regain their 
 liberty 9 and raise themselves to #ie distinguished eminence 
 
X 
 
 of their ancestors, that it becomes peculiarly interesting to 
 form relations , and be made acquainted with them. To 
 this end the study of their language is indispensable : and 
 this consideration, of having a real and general object of 
 utility in view, has enabled me to overcome the repugnance 
 I felt to retouch a subject I had treated in a former work, 
 and to frame an elementary Grammar of the Modern Greek 
 Language. 
 
 Many persons , whose Judgment and Learning I esteem, 
 have advised me to give a French translation of my lately 
 published comparative view or parallel of the Ancient and 
 Modern Greek languages. But I have not deemed it expe- 
 dient to adopt their advice. That was a book written for 
 Hellenists , and they have no need of a translation to 
 enable them to understand it. Those who are unacquainted 
 with the the Ancient language would . not understand it 
 better in French than in Greek; and it would be very far 
 from being sufficient for removing the difficulties in the 
 study of the existing language. 
 
 A book therefore was wanting, which should treat ex- 
 clusively of the Modern Greek Language , and enable 
 those , who have no knowledge of the Hellenic or Ancient 
 Greek , to study it. Such is the Work I have undertaken, 
 and which I now present to the public. It was a deside- 
 ratum in our language, and, I believe, in every language of 
 Europe , the German excepted , which has a Grammar of 
 the Modern Greek framed by Erdmann Schmidt, a sworn 
 public Interpreter of that Language. 
 
 This work did not fall into my hands till after I had 
 closed my labours, and I do not regret it. It is a confused 
 medley of principles and forms of the ancient and modern 
 Greek , an undigested chaos , combining the simplest 
 principles of general Grammar with a few rules peculiar 
 to the Greek , always ill conceived , awkwardly developed, 
 and frequently faulty. The Author for example gives the 
 conjugation of the ancient verbs in yu. To what purpose ? 
 What remains of it is so trifling, that it may without 
 
XI 
 
 disadvantage be classed amongst those of irregular Verbs. 
 Its display of Hellenic and obsolete forms is calculated only 
 to disgust youth with the study of a language, which is in 
 itself already sufficiently difficult, and needs not that those 
 who teach it , instead of smoothing the course , should 
 render it more rugged. Such a work was not of a character 
 to induce me to change my plan. I have confined myself 
 to the language now m use , without establishing any 
 comparison with the Hellenic , whence it is derived. I often 
 notice different forms; but all I notice are in present use, 
 and I am careful to inform my Reader which is the most 
 correct. 
 
 The Modern Greek preserves some few trifling phrases,, 
 some forms and turns of speech, as vestiges of the Hellenic. 
 This trifling number of exceptions to general usage has not 
 induced me to increase the bulk of this elementary work 
 with nominal or verbal forms , which have no analogy with 
 the existing language, and in which they are quite isolated. 
 Is it necessary that I should admit the dative, for example, 
 into the declension , because persons sometimes say h koli^ 
 apropos, by the bye , b J, while. Certainly not. I think 
 that , in the present state of the language all these 
 formulae should be considered as belonging to the Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 I cannot say the same of certain tenses of the ancient 
 conjugation, which Authors sometimes employ , such as the 
 Aorist of the Participle fyc. It would certainly be right to 
 make the student of Modern Greek acquainted with them 
 But this is no sufficient reason for admitting them into the 
 Grammar of that language. They do not as yet form any 
 integral part of it ; and if Authors sometimes employ them, 
 it is always temperately , and with a view to enrich the 
 language , and raise it above itself by well timed experi- 
 ments. As for us we ought to incorporate with it that only 
 which actually belongs to it. We refer therefore our Readers, 
 to Grammars of the Ancient language, for all Hellenic forms,/ 
 which are not given here , and seize the opportunity of as- 
 
XII 
 
 suring them most unreservedly, that the sole means of at- 
 taining any eminent success in the study of the Modern 
 Greek is to know the ancient, as well with respect to the 
 Grammar as the Dictionary. 
 
 In the present state of infancy of the Modern language 
 Authors are daily borrowing from the ancient turns of 
 phraseology Words and Idioms ; so that it is impossible to 
 determine where , in elementary Books , a stand should be 
 made , or to draw a precise line of demarcation between 
 the two languages. 
 
 We have given but few principles or elementary Pvules , 
 but we have endeavoured that all given should be just and 
 explicit. Our Syntax, though short, is a brief collection of 
 the most generally used idiomatic forms or peculiarities. 
 All the phrases therein adduced are exact , and properly 
 constructed. We have avoided the error, with which we 
 have reproached Schmidt who has frequently given , as 
 examples of his pretended rules, phrases incompatible with 
 the genius and construction of the Greek language , more 
 calculated to mislead than to inform the Reader. Thus 
 page 198 after having proposed as an example of the con- 
 struction of the article the following elevated style of phrase, 
 lid rx now/uLJLTcLTV d^a va.ro; 6'fAvifo(, Homer immortal through, 
 or on account of his poems , cites this as more in use, 
 h tiifivifOQ a&mtiTot lix V Hoivhioltoltv ; that is he substi- 
 tutes a solecism for a correct phrase. I have shewn 
 Chapter 29 , § 3 how it ought to be corrected. Page 197 , 
 lie gives us this macaroni construction as elegant , 
 iTTotivu rhv t« juoSyitv iTTiuikti-iv , I commend the Scholars dili- 
 gence « es ist zierlicher und edler, » says he, it is more 
 elegant and sustained. He might have said that it was Hel- 
 lenic of the lower ages ; for in this language one should 
 rather express nimself thus, lir&up toy f^xhrnv tyiq kirtptxtia.e % 
 so that what he recommends as elegant and sustained, is 
 neither good ancient nor Modern Greek. We could prove 
 from a variety of other examples that Schmidt has not seized 
 lie genius of the Greek language , but we shall content 
 
XIII 
 
 ourselves with these two , and no longer trifle with the 
 patience of our reader. 
 
 We shall close with observing that the Book we now 
 present to the public is an Essay , which may receive 
 ulterior developement ; but such as it is , it will prove 
 sufficient to enable the Reader to prosecute alone his 
 study of the Modern Greek. Should this essay be well 
 received by the public, we propose , in a second edition, to 
 enrich it with exercises and a more copious collection of 
 examples, as customary in Grammars of Modern Languages, 
 without making any change in the Rules, which we consider 
 sufficiently developed. We have endeavoured to hold a 
 mean course between conciseness and prolixity. 
 
XV 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. i. Of Pronunciation Pag. I 
 
 2. — Accent - Enclitics 4 
 
 3. — Signs used in Writing - Aspirates - Iota under- 
 
 written - Apostrophe - Stops ir 
 
 4- — Words — Numbers, Genders, Cases i3 
 
 5- — Declensions, and of the Article . — 
 
 6- — First Declension Isosyllabic . i5 
 
 7. — Second Declension Isosyllabic 17 
 
 8- — Third Declension Isosyllabic- ..... ....... 20 
 
 / 9- — First Declension Imparisyilabic 22 
 
 IO - — Second Declension Imparisyilabic. ......... 24 
 
 11. — Heteroclites 26 
 
 l2 - — Augmentatives and Diminutives. . . 29 
 
 *3. — Comparatives and Superlatives . . 3o 
 
 T 4. — Nouns of Number. . 3i 
 
 *5. — Pronouns Personal. ................. 34 
 
 16. Possessive. . 35 
 
 T 7. Demonstrative ................ 36 
 
 18. — Relative. ................... $7 
 
 x 9- Reflective. .............. ; ... 38 
 
 2 °- Interrogative ................. 39 
 
 21 • — — — Indefinite. .................. 4o 
 
 22. — Verbs 4i 
 
 2 3. — Conjugation 4i 
 
 2 'i. — Formation of the Tenses - Augment - Character- 
 istic - Termination 4^ 
 
 2 5- — Compound Tenses. 43 
 
 2 '°- — Fpao-oj Barytoned Active Voice. 45 
 
 — Ffsboua'. Passive Voice ....... ........ 5l 
 
 — IIocT-co circumflex ed from s« Active. ........ 57 
 
 1 — nar-ojaa'. from zcu.xi Passive 60 
 
 Tta-o from tta Active 64 
 
 — KQifjt.-wp.ai from asu.su Passive . 67, 
 
 1 — Ei^.ai ......................... 7C 
 
 2 7- — Remarks on Verbs - their Accent .......... 74 
 
 The Characteristic and its Changes 75 
 
 Certain instances of syncope ........ i ..• 80 
 
 28. — List of Irregular Verbs ....... .. .... i . . 8a 
 
XVI 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Chap. 29. Of the Article ....... 8$ 
 
 30. — Numbers. ........... 5 * • 90 
 
 3 1 . — Nouns of Number . . * * . . — ■ 
 
 3a. — Pronouns Personal, 91 
 
 33. — — — Possessive-relative 94 
 
 34. — — — Demonstrative 95 
 
 35. — Relative . — 
 
 36. Reflective , . • 96 
 
 37. — Interrogative 97 
 
 38. Indefinite 98 
 
 39. — Oblique Cases - Genitive 99 
 
 — Accusative. . 100 
 
 40. — Comparatives and Superlatives 102 
 
 4 1. — The Verb - its Voices io3 
 
 42. — Tenses io5 
 
 43. — Moods - Indicative and Subjunctive 109 
 
 — Infinitive 112 
 
 — Participle. ..*.. u3 
 
 44- — Prepositions n4 
 
 45. — Adverbs 118 
 
 46. — Conjunctions 122 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 SECTION I, 
 
 Of the Alphabet and its Sounds -'..;. 129 
 
 — Syllabication 
 
 — Accent - when alone the Sign of the grave should 
 
 be used 
 
 — General Rules for accenting Nouns and Verbs. . . . i3o 
 ■ — Vulgar Mode of declining Nouns i3i 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Principles on which the Greek Tenses are translated. i36 
 
 Dialogues. 
 
 Onomasticon or Vocabulary^ 
 

 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 \\ hat is said in the original on this subject , having 
 reference to the French language only ? I shall substitute 
 an attempt to illustrate the Modern pronunciation of the 
 Creek Vowels , Consonants and Diphthongs , with reference 
 to the English Alphabet; and, where that is impossible , 
 I shall give as correct an analysis, as J am able. x b£ 
 the Greek articulation. 
 
 CO 
 
 (?) 
 
 
 NAMES 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 Act 
 
 Alpha as 
 
 A in Father, 
 
 B p g 
 
 Veta 
 
 V. 
 
 r T r 
 
 Gamma 
 
 G. 
 
 A S 
 
 Thelta 
 
 Th in Them. 
 
 E 6 
 
 Epsilon 
 
 A and EinJle 7 Me)\^~*'<'z? s$w» 
 
 t I 
 
 Zeta 
 
 Z. 
 
 H 4 
 
 Eta 
 
 E in Me. 
 
 © 
 
 Theta 
 
 Th in ^Ae/n^. 
 
 I i 
 
 Eota 
 
 E in ?ne. 
 
 R K 
 
 Kappa 
 
 K, 
 
 A X 
 
 Lamtha 
 
 L. 
 
 M (x 
 
 Me 
 
 M, 
 
 N v 
 
 Ne 
 
 N. 
 
 2 5 
 
 Xe 
 
 X in Axiom and never as in 
 
 
 r 
 
 Alexander^ as fo 7 not s>s gx 
 
 o 
 
 Omicron 
 
 in hone. 
 
 n r, 
 
 Pee 
 
 P. 
 
 p p 
 
 line 
 
 tli 
 
(4) 
 
 2 at 
 
 Sisrma 
 
 S in Us, never as in Is y except 
 before [3, & and ^ 
 
 T T 
 
 Taf 
 
 T. 
 
 I ». 
 
 Ypsilon 
 
 E in me. 
 
 <l> 9 
 
 Phee 
 
 Ph. 
 
 X X 
 
 Khee 
 
 Rh. 
 
 ¥ <j/ 
 
 Psee 
 
 Ps. 
 
 £1 (a 
 
 Ome<ia 
 
 The two Os 'are pronounced 
 iii the same manner by all 
 modern Greeks. 
 
 1'i as. A in Ale.. 
 
 Ei- E in /^e. 
 
 Oi E in me. 
 
 Oy U in Druid. 
 
 Xi us E in //?e. 
 
 p, J <^ before p.y S^'[xv p and the Vowels as i „* English, 
 
 dC < before the other letters as > ,/. English, 
 
 (i) r This letter has two very different sounds, one hard 
 or guttural before a o to, and before a v p : it exactly answers 
 to the German G in the words. Lage, Tage, gutturally pro-* 
 nounced , as in the south : it is very nearly , if not exactly, 
 met by the sound in the beginning of the Gaelic Words 
 « dhomb » in « thoir dhomb » give me , and a dhruadhach » 
 the brides maid. To the South Briton it may be well to 
 observe, that it very nearly, if not exactly, corresponds with 
 the sound produced, by attempting to sound a g before an 
 h aspirated, in the words g-heart g-hom g-home The soft 
 or liquid sound , used before the slender vowels , and the 
 diphthongs of equivalent force, is exceedingly easy: it is, as 
 
3 
 hearly as fossinte, that of y in yes. , year. Before y x ; % 
 it has the nasal sound of ng English. 
 
 ( y before yx^» 
 fi) N Is changed into ( (/, before B [j. t: <p <f*. 
 ( X p o- before X p cr. 
 
 (3) II. This letter, when subjoined to M, is sounded as B 
 English: Tobacco is, by the Greeks, spelt ?a[/,Traxxo. Whatever 
 might have been the sound attached by the Ancients to [3 , 
 the Moderns have no single sign for the English articula- 
 tion of B. 
 
 (4) T. The Modern Greeks have no sign for the English 
 sound of D; but t after v has this sound, even when the v is 
 in one word, and the t in the following ; as tov Tponrov 
 is sounded ton dropon. 
 
 (5) X; The sound of this letter is unknown to the Natives 
 of the South of Britain; but is very familiar to the Scotch > 
 Irish, Welsh, Spanish, and German ear; though, as a neces- 
 sary caution, it should be observed, that the Greek y , as 
 pronounced by females , or persons at all attentive to 
 euphony, is perhaps the softest modification of a guttural 
 aspirate in any language , and adds great beauty to the 
 Romaic. Indeed, when it is very softly pronounced , as it 
 often is by females, it has so very slight a guttural sound , 
 that, to the unpractised ear, it would appear purely palatial. 
 It is produced by making the breath sensibly strike the 
 palate in its utterance, with a very slight sound of R before 
 it as k-here. The following are very nearly the same sound?. 
 
 Scotch Irish Welsh Spanish 
 
 . Ch in . Ch in Ch in J in 
 
 Loch Lochy Auchnacloy Sach Gijou 
 
 Italian 
 
 German 
 
 by Florentines 
 
 ch in 
 
 in 
 
 
 Casa Cosa, 
 
 Welchen 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF ACCENT. 
 
 I shall in this chapter omit all said by the Author thai 
 exclusively bears on the French Language , except such 
 observations as appear better calculated to illustrate the 
 subject to an English Reader, than any illustration drawn- 
 from his own language. 
 
 i . The Accent of the Greeks is an elevation of voice , 
 communicated to one of the syllables of a word , so that 
 that syllable , striking the ear in a more sensible and 
 emphatic manner , appears to predominate over the rest. 
 Thus , the peculiar office of Accent is to regulate the mo* 
 dulation and cadence of pronunciation. It affects only th^ 
 Ultimate, Penultimate, and Antepenultimate syllables. 
 
 2. The Modern Greeks write with the Accent: All Books 
 are printed with it: It is not, however, as far as the Greek 
 is concerned,, necessary-. He , when he first learns a word, 
 learns with it, its accent; and there is no Native, who would 
 not read his language with an equally exact pronunciation ? 
 whether the book were accented or not. The custom of 
 marking, with. a peculiar sign, the point of elevation of tha 
 voice was introduced by ancient Grammarians, to enable 
 them to teach the Language to Foreigners, (i) 
 
 3. Three signs are in use to indicate the accent or eleva* 
 tion of the voice on a syllable , the acute ('), the grave (*)^ 
 and the circumflex ("). The acute and the grave have always 
 been equivalents , though they have affected different parts 
 of a word: but it is highly probable , that the circumflex 
 originally served to indicate a different elevation of voice 
 
 (i) Just as we see in the Italian Translation of the Peruvian Ici> 
 ters, for the use of persons learning that language, though by Ita* 
 lians themselves marks of accent are £mt rarely use& 
 
5 
 
 from that signified by the other two, since it was pecuharly 
 applied to the long vowels. This alone sufficiently shews , 
 that it was the sign of a different inflection of Voice from 
 that indicated bv the acute or crave accent , which wer@ 
 indifferently applied to the long or short Vowels. This dis- 
 tinction in cadence , or inflexion of Voice, whatever it might 
 have been, has been lost, together, with the precise charac- 
 ter of quantity. The modern Greeks pronounce all the ac- 
 cents in the same manner , and pay no attention to what 
 we call quantity. 
 
 4- The acute accent may be applied indifferently to the 
 three last syllables , the circumflex to the two last, but the 
 grave to the last only. 
 
 6. When the Acute Accent is on the last syllable , th©- 
 word is called O^utovov , when on the penult iuapo£tfrovov y 
 when on the Antepenult T^oo-apoJuTovov , A Word, with the* 
 circumflex on the last syllable, is called ireptctrw^svov, on the- 
 penult, TCpo-TCspi<7rcw(/.£vov. Lastly a Word with the grave ac- 
 cent on the only syllable to which it is applicable, the last, is 
 called papuTovov. Every Word, not having the acute or cir- 
 cumflex on the last syllable , is considered to have the grave, 
 arid is gapuTovov. (1) 
 
 7. All Words , with the exception of some few monosyl- 
 lables , have an accent , because ail have one syllable parti- 
 cularly marked by emphasis , or an elevation of voice. 
 
 8. This accent undergoes a change of character and posi- 
 tion (2). In its movements, it sometimes passes from the ante- 
 penult to the penult , as 6 avOpcorro; the Man , too avOpwTrou , 
 of the Man ; from the antepenult and the penult to the 
 
 (1) As these definitions will frequently occur, and could not be 
 expressed without continual periphrases , I shall adopt them in the 
 neuter , as epithets of the -word Mjud , and give them their regular 
 plurals, as established in our Language, in the instance of Pheno- 
 menon, Phenomena. 
 
 (a To avoid confusion I shall confine the word change to change 
 '. ;hara«tei" ; and adopt the word movement far change of position. 
 
6 
 
 final ; as otl jxcMr^nai , the pupils , ray fjLGthTftQv , of the 
 pupils ; olj ywoum, the Women, iw ywxixw. It changes its 
 form, when the acute is substituted for the circumflex; as 
 Kr/Aolfpt fate, t;k (toilets of fate, or the circumflex for the 
 acute; as h {afrit. % the simpleton, rol {ocfiou, of the simpleton ; 
 and the grave for the acute, in the course of a phrase ; as 
 h.{a£oQ avfy(a<aroQ , the silly man. 
 
 The whole Theory of accent in the ancient Language was 
 grounded on quantity. This determined its nature , and 
 regulated its changes and movements. Quantity having no 
 existence in the modern Language , accent is now almost 
 independent ; and thence is subject to much less move- 
 ment, but it is very far from being, as the Author states, 
 « nearly as fixed as in the Italian. » If so, there would have 
 been no need of his numerous special Rules, subjoined to his 
 several forms of Declension. 
 
 The rules for its movement, because it affects the pro- 
 nunciation , must , indispensably , be known ; but not those 
 for the change of form , from acute to circumflex ; as 
 o ^uaGnTwc, the pupil, rov (jLo&viTcv , of the pupil ; or from the 
 circumflex to the acute; as rb vw^a , the body, tgu a-J^xro^ of 
 the body. As this change of form in no way affects the pro- 
 nunciation , and is merely a mark or sign in orthography , 
 it is almost useless that a person should know it, if his sole 
 object be the modern Language. We refer those , who wish 
 to be thoroughly informed ^on this subject , to the numerous 
 Grammars of the ancient Greek. 
 
 If a person's main object be to make himself understood 
 by Greeks , and to unjderstand them , I would advise him , 
 at first, to attempt only what is indispensable , with respect 
 to accent; that is, to acquaint himself with what is called 
 the primitive accent of Words , and the more prevalent 
 changes of its position , without regarding its change of 
 character, from acute to circumflex , or the reverse. The 
 Greek understands what is written, as well without accent 
 as with : . all the accents affect pronunciation equally ; and 
 therefore in a Man's effort to acquire a copia verboram for 
 
oral intercourse , it is onlv necessary, as to all inflexions 4 - 
 by habit, and an attention to the more common principles ? 
 to learn where a word is to be accented , without caring how. 
 When the copia Verhorwn is once acquired , the .mystery 
 will, almost without an effort , gradually unfold itself. Exam- 
 ples and Exceptions will then readily present themselves ; 
 and a difficulty which , unseasonably encountered , has 
 excited disgust , and deterred numbers from prosecuting the 
 study of the Language , will be insensibly stript of all its 
 forbidding character. 
 
 Mons. r David's Detail of the variations of accent accom- 
 panies the several forms of Declension, given in the regular 
 course of the grammar , which are the forms used in most 
 Modern Greek Books of any reputation. Reference is made 
 to the appendix , in every instance where the Vulgar de- 
 cline such Words , or class of Words , in any way differ- 
 ently: that difference is there pointed out; and at the same 
 time the liberties taken by the Vulgar , with respect to ac- 
 cent , are noticed. I trust this Mode will enable a person 
 utterly unacquainted with the Language to commence his 
 study with ease , and to avail himself of the different for- 
 mulae, according to his progress. TSo one can have a tole- 
 rably correct idea of the Modern forms of declension , 
 without an opportunity of comparing them with their proto- 
 types. It indeed would be altogether impossible y without a 
 reference , to class them at all ; but the variations being , 
 in some instances , considerable , they ought to be kept 
 distinct, that a person may, at pleasure, apply his attention 
 undividedly to his more immediate object. Instead of the 
 Author's Special Rules for almost every form of each de- 
 clension, which are exceedingly perplexing, and difficult to 
 bear in mind, I have attempted to reduce the Rules to 
 a small number, applicable generally, and resting on the 
 leading principles of the Theory of Quantity ; though for 
 common purposes they do not require a knowledge of it. 
 I will not venture to say that they will admit of no exceptions: 
 but I think they will admit but of few. 
 
8 
 
 These I have annexed to the Forms in the Appendix ; 
 hut I have not that degree of confidence in them , that will 
 allow me to substitute them for those of the Author ; of 
 which I have in the first part of the Treatise given the? 
 substance , though with an attempt at greater perspicuity. 
 Any set of Rules not embracing the whole Theory of 
 quantity, as it affects accent, and not noticing its many 
 exceptions, can he but an approximation towards precision ; 
 hut where the difficulties in the way of infallibility are so 
 great , I am persuaded approximations will , by all but 
 pedants, be indulgently received. To them neither the lan- 
 guage of which we treat can, in its present slate, be a wor- 
 thy object of criticism ; nor can any work, making an 
 humble attempt to assist those in acquiring it, who aim not 
 at scholastic fame. 
 
 For the due placing of the accent in pronunciation, two 
 points must be ascertained , the primitive accent , and its 
 movements, or change of position. That is termed the primi- 
 tive accent, which belongs to a word in its primitive state, or 
 before it undergoes any grammatical change from de- 
 clension , conjugation , juxtaposition etc. ft is on the 
 nominative singular of nouns , and in verbs, on the 
 first person singular of the present tense indicative. The 
 primitive accent being once ascertained, its movements , 
 and even its changes of form are easily determined. We will 
 endeavour to indicate both , particularly its movements , in 
 the course of our observations on the Declensions and 
 'Conjugations : hut , as to the primitive accent , use alone 
 can teach it. That of Verbs is easy : it is sufficient to know, 
 whether they be Barytona, or Perispomena; but that of 
 Kouns and indeclinable words is more varied and difficulty 
 Ear, and a quickness of observation can alone secure precis 
 sion in this particular (x)» 
 
 (i) At least unless a man ehoose to burthen his Memory with all 
 the Rules of Prosody , and the very numerous exceptions to theui. 
 
9 
 
 Another important acquisition, on this head, is a know- 
 
 ledge of the v'uvi'Cwk , or fusion of Vowels. This species o£ 
 
 contraction , whereby two or more vowels form but one 
 articulation , is much in use in Modern Greek. We have it 
 in English , and may thence form an accurate idea of it. It 
 corresponds with the union of io in tion, ia in tian, and the 
 fusion of the y with its following vowel in yellow, young, etc. 
 Thus, in Modern Greek, the Word sra/W children, consists 
 hut of two syllables in sound , though it has really three , 
 id. being blended , as indicated by the acute accent on tha 
 final vowel. If it be wished that the two vowels should be 
 separately sounded , the acute accent must be placed on 
 the / , and the word be written as in ancient Greek, craiS/a. 
 This termination must otherwise be pronounced, as an 
 Englishman would pronounce ia in Justinian, as though 
 it were written Jus-tin-yan, where there are evidently only 
 three syllables in sound. 
 
 This fusion of Vowels sometimes occurs in the middle 
 of Words ; and then the accent appears to be placed a 
 syllable farther back than it really is; thus, in eV/«to<ra, / 
 have perceived, it may seem that the fourth syllable from the 
 end of the Word is accented; but that fourth in appearance 
 is but the third, or antepenult in sound ; since the syllables 
 01 and u are blended in the pronunciation: vvmfiewt, azoriuxat, 
 it is cloudy , it is gloomy , are pronounced in the same 
 manner. 
 
 A v before the wyi'Qvis is sounded as gn in french and Ita- 
 lian, in ognon, degno, pronounced in English, otvn-yong, 
 den-yo-, thus jwctaca should be pronounced, as though it were 
 written, en-yo-sa, ^'^J.,en-yd , just as mignojiette , though 
 the combination of letters is quite foreign , is pronounced 
 by every working gardener, as if written min-yo-net. 
 
 of enclitics. 
 
 All Words have an accent, but some few monosyllables 
 and dissyllables , which , in pronunciation , unite with the 
 
10 
 
 preceding word , and seem to form but one with it , lost? 
 their accent , or rather transfer it to the word with 
 which they are united. They are called enclitics from iyKhho^xi 
 to incline ; because they incline towards , or , as it' were , 
 rest upon the preceding word. Thus you , of me, bears the 
 circumflex accent ; but in the phrase b <piko( /uov , my friend, 
 it becomes enclitic , and is closely blended in pronunciation 
 with the word p'wc ; and for that reason loses its circumflex 
 accent. 
 
 It may be well to observe, as it regards orthography, that 
 when the enclitic follows a proparoxytonon, or a properispo- 
 menon , it passes its accent to the final syllable of its antece- 
 dent, which then has two accents , its own, and that of the 
 enclitic; as b clv^uvrbsycv, my Man; rb luwbv you, my supper, (i) 
 
 When it follows a paroxytonon , or perispomenon , the 
 enclitic loses its accent, without affecting its antecedent, as 
 h$ixoQ yov, my friend, rev ixcahov pov % of my Child. 
 
 If it follow an oxytonon , the acute accent is retained , 
 even in those situations in a phrase, where the general rule 
 would demand the grave. 
 
 The circumflex of the enclitic, wherever an additional 
 accent is given to the antecedent^ is changed for the acute, 
 as in the example, b etyfywerbe pou. 
 
 The principal Enclitics are the monosyllabic oblique cases 
 of personal pronouns you y.l (jlol; <jou crs udg tgu tvq tgv tjJc to 
 
 TQV TOV? TOLiq T r i„ 
 
 (i) Our Language abounds with these enclitics in pronunciation ; 
 and they are among the most perplexing difficulties with which Fo- 
 reigners , in conversing, have to contend; because they have no in- 
 dication of them in prose Writings. Thus the verbs to be , and to 
 have, often lose their accent ; and are so blended with the preceding 
 pronoun, as to form with it a monosyllable; I've, you've, they've 
 been, he's, she's, they're gone: the auxiliary will undergoes still 
 greater mutilation , and merges into its subject ; I'll , you'll , they'll 
 attend. The pronoun sometimes resigns its distinction ; as in 'tis , 
 ; twas. 
 
T I 
 
 The pronoun rk, as in on whatever; the adverbs uov y >&qtI 
 js-at, where, never, how, etc. as, m wort) xa «r«{yxa gtov. 
 
 These are not however always enclitics : Thus the pronoun 
 *?s\j and the adverbs 'nroZ wort are not so when used interroga- 
 tively: hxTi, why ? OT07e When ? crcrt, ©-ore, never , never , 
 negatively. 
 
 The oblique cases of personal pronouns are not enclitics, 
 when they precede the verb on which they depend , as 
 fj.l Ae'yt/, he tells me ijjxq j%k* he deceives us , see the Syntax. 
 
 Besides these ordinary enclitics , some verbs beginning 
 with a vowel, or diphthong, which lose it by elision , become 
 enclitics , and are completely blended with the preceding 
 Word; as poU to 'Swxe , he gave it me, instead of y.ov to 'Hem, 
 7ov to Va, instead of tou to e;Va, I told it him. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Or THE DIFFERENT SIGNS USED IN WRITING. 
 OF THE ASPIRATE. 
 
 The aspirate is placed over vowels, whenever they com- 
 mence a word, and is of two sorts termed the soft and the 
 rough aspirate. It formerly marked the degree of aspiration, 
 or breathing communicated to those vowels. The soft a 
 slighter, and the rough a stronger breathing. Among the 
 consonants the % alone is aspirated , or rather is marked 
 with the sign. It has always the rough aspirate at the 
 beginning of a word ; and when two ^ follow in the middle 
 of a word , the first has the soft , and the second the 
 rough aspirate , as in tj>j>o>co hail , in the sense of salutation. 
 
 It is probable that there was a sensible difference in the 
 pronunciation of these two aspirates by the Ancients, 
 The rough being a strong breathing, the consonants termed 
 slender , whenever followed by it , were changed into their 
 aspirated cognates , whether in separate words, or in com- 
 pound terms , as *a8' yi ( ucU , instead of kit ;f««c , or k'olQokov], 
 generally, from wt% and hoy. This Aspirate has been com- 
 
IS 
 
 pared to tliat produced by the German h , in hok, hauen ; 
 but this idea is rather ingenious than exact ; for we do not 
 see that the German h affects the Words^ with which \Z 
 comes in contact, as the rough aspirate ; or that it produces 
 the same changes. Whatever may be conjectured , it is 
 certain that its peculiar properties no longer exist in the 
 modern language. All vowels are pronounced in the same 
 manner, and without any breathing or aspirate, whether 
 marked by the one or the other sign : It's only use in the 
 Modern Greek is to indicate when the above elision may 
 take place. 
 
 Of THE IOTA. UBTDERWRITTEIV. 
 
 It indicates the elision of an / after the vowels, under 
 which it is written. It is commonly the last of the second 
 and third persons singular of the Tenses of the subjunctive 
 .Mood in a , yf#f>ffi 7f a 'p?t 7f*p6«$, 7? ai P^' 
 
 OF THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 The apostrophe in Greek, as in French , denotes the 
 elision of a vowel, or diphthong , whether at the end of 
 words, as to <tto k u duwac thwt 9 he forthwith opened his mouth, 
 instead of to ar'apa. ; fJv*oKo x$ VT ' 0C > it * 5 entirely of gold, in- 
 stead of that, or at the beginning; as , rev ro 'v?a^ instead of 
 iTvrxj V rnv i&bhiv 9 instead of uc rw vroKn> To Constantinople. 
 
 OF PrJWCTUxVTIOIS r . 
 
 A point (. ) placed as in English, indicates the completion: 
 of the sense. 
 
 When placed parallel with the upper, instead of the 
 lower part of the letters, it is equivalent to a colon. 
 
 The comma ( , ) is of the same value as in English. 
 
 The combination forming our semicolon ( ; ) is used as a 
 sign of Interrogation. 
 
 Some Editors make use of the Note of Exclamation I 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 . OF WORDS* 
 
 Tiie Modern follows the Ancient Greek, in acknowledging 
 iiine sorts of Words , called parts of Speech , Viz. The 
 Substantive , Adjective, Article, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, 
 Preposition, Adverb, Conjunction. 
 
 The Interjection is classed with adverbs. 
 
 OF NUMBERS. 
 
 There are two Numbers..: The Singular and Plural. 
 
 OF GENDERS. 
 
 There are three Genders : The Masculine 9 Feminine f 
 and Neuter. 
 
 OF CASES. 
 
 There are four Cases : The Nominative , Genitive , Ac- 
 cusative , and Vocative. Of these four , the Nominative, 
 Accusative, and Vocative are always alike in Neuters, as in 
 Latin. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 There are in Modern Greek, according to Mons. r David's 
 classification, three Declensions: the i.» { Comprising Nouns 
 in Btci«f ,«,«: the 2. d Nouns in h\ and cv , and also those 
 m i , and o 1 mostly from ancient Diminutives in toy : and the 
 9, All the varieties that do not fall under the forms given 
 in the first two, in the following succession : it can hardly be 
 called order. 
 
 NS. GS. N.PL 
 
 1 
 
 TifWT 
 
 ac 
 
 U 
 
 %Q 
 
 2 
 
 Ayovptd 
 
 oc 
 
 CL$ 
 
 % 
 
 3 
 
 Tifdyju 
 
 OL 
 
 olto; 
 
 <XT<X. 
 
 4 
 
 ■Vol? 
 
 %C 
 
 a 
 
 eilic 
 
 5 
 
 Xar? 
 
 VS 
 
 V 
 
 tli^ 
 
 6 
 
 M«ycv\ 
 
 Q* 
 
 fl»f 
 
 wit? 
 
ftS. GS. Nil 
 
 7 &f(n ( u ov cljcq ara 
 
 8 TIa. cc tyc n 
 
 9 Fj-wcr i$ vc tg 
 10 A^ikh ia; ice €z 
 
 J 2 Evvifi is ovi; lis 
 
 15 tWc ( vol? vov J yets 
 
 The classification of Greek Nouns has ever been, and 
 still remains, among Grammarians, disputed ground. Whe- 
 ther ay hat is here attempted will be thought to furnish 
 more precise lines of distinction, than the distribution of 
 the Author, must be left to the Public to determine. 
 
 I shall venture to divide all regular Nouns between 3 
 Declensions Iso-syllabic,and i Declensions Imparisyllabic; 
 and shall , after the regular forms , give as Heteroclites i 
 the few that will not conform to this arrangement. 
 
 Before we proceed to examples of these, we will decline 
 the Article. As it very commonly accompanies Nouns , it- 
 is necessary to know the Declension of the one , before 
 we attempt that of the other: It has three Genders. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Masculine b as b yikiqq the Sun 
 
 Feminine n n Qdhzvara. the Sea 
 
 Neuter. to to (phvozrocoy the Autumn. 
 
 SINGULAR. " 
 
 Masculine. Feminine Neuter, 
 
 Nominative b jj rb 
 
 Genitive tqv t"y\z tov 
 
 Accusative rh T«fV r» 
 
I J 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 Nominative 
 
 d 
 
 cd or 
 
 < CO 
 
 TX 
 
 Genitive 
 
 loiv 
 
 t2v 
 
 
 TUV 
 
 Accusative 
 
 rove 
 
 rdc 
 
 
 rot 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC. 
 
 This Declension comprises nouns Masculine in at gen a> 
 and m 7 gen n , and Feminities in a , gen «c and *c and in 57, 
 
 gen W (2). . 
 
 V N. 
 
 
 Acaf 
 
 1 flCf 
 
 Avav 
 
 1 
 
 at or ou? 
 
 G. 
 
 (3) 
 
 — . 
 
 a <9r ou 
 
 — . 
 
 ZZ 
 
 av 
 
 A. 
 
 
 — . 
 
 • — ■ car 
 
 — . 
 
 . — ' 
 
 a; or aic 
 
 V. 
 
 
 - — . 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 p 
 
 Oil 01' 0H£ 
 
 K* 
 
 
 M«9 
 
 JJT tfC 
 
 Ma9 
 
 V,T 
 
 vl'i or Ait 
 
 G. 
 
 
 , — 
 
 — ■ n or cv 
 
 — 
 
 , 
 
 0V 
 
 A. 
 
 
 —_ 
 
 ■ V\ V 
 
 — 
 
 . 
 
 cic or out 
 
 V. 
 
 
 , 
 
 — n 
 
 1 
 
 0— _ 
 
 ai or out 
 
 (1) For tlie peculiarities of the Language , as it is spoken vulgarly, 
 and written in books designed for the Vulgar , see the Appendix , 
 where all the forms here given , with the terminations used by the. 
 greater part of Writers of reputation, are repeated , with all the ir- 
 regularities of accent and termination , in use among the vulgar. 
 
 (2) I am aware that some would form 1 Declensions of the forms 
 that are here given as one, but, except with respect to the Genitive 
 Singular the Analogies in Orthography and accent are so great, 
 that the subdivision would answer no good purpose. 
 
 (3) Instead of repeating the whole Word , I have preferred giving, 
 in the oblique cases, the Termination ? or variable part only, substi- 
 tuting, for the rest, lines. Of two lines, when the first is accented, it 
 answers to the Antepenult, when the second to the Penult. The double 
 lines 5 without accent, shew where the accent is sometimes thrown hy 
 the Vulgar. The French circumflex is more conspicuous over lines 
 
r6 
 
 V 
 
 N. 
 
 Mo us 
 
 « 
 
 
 ' 
 
 Mws" 
 
 #* 
 
 or a/c (s) 
 
 G. 
 
 — ' 
 
 Hff 
 
 or 
 
 as 
 
 — 
 
 KW 
 
 
 A. 
 
 A 
 
 a»' 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 «c 
 
 or ait 
 
 y. 
 
 A 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 r~— ;* 
 
 a/ 
 
 OT' CLIQ 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 G. 
 
 T; y a 
 
 
 
 
 1 *« 
 
 i *-* 
 
 a/ 
 
 Or oug 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 ac 
 
 or ''cut. 
 
 V, 
 
 — , 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 I - 
 
 «/ 
 
 OT ai£ 
 
 DECLINE LIKE, 
 
 
 tivQoiybfdie 
 
 KWTtlG 
 
 Xn{<*. 
 
 hti.Wft 
 
 
 AfcftwW 
 
 tevt'/rwc 
 
 <piktx 
 
 rv'^n 
 
 
 JIOLVUOLVIOLQ 
 
 ILKiZSTYlQ 
 
 yuyta 
 
 tK'Jrn 
 
 
 Aiviiocc 
 
 KThrnc 
 
 KQKCLKlia, 
 
 tO^il 
 
 than the Greek, and , therefore, in such situations, has been pre* 
 ferred. This Mode as it appears to me , presents the Termination , 
 and the situation of the Accent most prominently to the eye ; and ? 
 if it do, must greatly assist Memory. The supply of the deficient part 
 of the Word, though immediately above , requires a certain degree 
 of attention , which , in young Scholars , it is , however important, 
 extremely difficult to fix, 
 
 (i) Some Authors write e * instead of &$, that they may not seem to 
 ■violate the principles of accentuation , for whenever the Nominative 
 and Vocative plural are written 4t$ , instead of ai, the accent ought to 
 be the same as in the Accusative plural. 
 
 Nouns ending in $&, Qa, pa, and in a pure (that is where a of itself 
 forms a distinct Syllable ) terminate the genitive singular in ag ; as 
 $ ittApot., the day, ttj; %sp«s, of the day, i cpiXia, friendship, rifc ^tXt'a?- A-U 
 others form the genitive in y,s , as >j pouax , rr,; jjeouav^j vi£o£a, rfc £a£v)?- 
 The termination kj ijs , however x very general 7 among the Vulgar. 
 
... t . 17 
 
 All Genitives plural in this Declension are eircum flexed, 
 except of adjectives, whose Masculine and Neuter, of the 
 2.4 Declension , are proparoxytona , ( see ay^c a'yf/« ay?' " J 
 and of feminine substantives , derived from Masculine 
 paroxytona in oc; as lev hoc , hvhn , hvhuv, 
 
 Paroxvtona as Ak^/sc, and properispomena , as uova-x , m- 
 ver move the accent , except in the genitive plural , ac- 
 cording to the above rule. 
 
 Oxytona, as ny.v, never move their accent; but , in the 
 genitive singular and plural , substitute the circumflex for 
 the acute. 
 
 Properispomena as //ovcra, acute the genitive singular, and 
 accusative plural. 
 
 Proparoxytona, in the same cases, advance the accent, to 
 
 the penult J as 8aAae-<7«. , QxKcLvGYis , 9aAaV(T2?. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 TI119 Declension comprises all Nouns isosyllabic, whether 
 substantives or adjectives , whose geniiive singular termi- 
 nates in cv , from a nominative in »g , or ov , , or /. 
 
 G. 
 
 av 
 
 Qou-& q; I «f 
 
 - 
 
 6)K 
 
 
 7ra^> 
 
 61? oc 
 t 
 
 O'J 
 
 -crap viy ot 
 
 A. 
 
 V 
 
 Qt | 
 
 ' 
 
 ©w 
 
 — 
 
 . y 
 
 
 V, 
 
 >t 
 
 g i 'J 
 
 i= 
 
 0; 
 
 — 
 
 t 
 
 fc 
 
 ' 01 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ITfoar««r 
 
 OK 
 
 
 n f 
 
 $<rousf • 
 
 a 
 
 
 G. 
 
 < 
 
 ow 
 
 
 
 — ' 
 
 CdV 
 
 
 A. 
 
 — ' — 
 
 OK 
 
 
 ' 
 
 — 
 
 a 
 
 
 V, 
 
 — ' ~_ 
 
 OK 
 
 
 »— ' 
 
 — ; 
 
 9t 
 
 - 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Ao)/\0'Era/o 
 
 
 
 
 Aawo'STtf/d 
 
 a 
 
 
 G. 
 A. 
 
 — — .***. 
 
 tou 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 *■*■ 
 
 tiav 
 a. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 — ' — 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 ■ — 
 
 m 
 
*ff 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 K. 
 
 fcoS * 
 
 
 | 
 
 <W& tit 
 
 a 
 
 A, 
 
 
 •* * 
 
 / 
 
 — ' ■ ■ I 
 
 5 '' 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 » 
 
 tx 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 N. 
 
 K 
 
 hill i 
 
 
 
 
 Km/S id 
 
 G. 
 
 
 icy 
 
 
 
 
 - — - twv 
 
 A. 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 *- — \% 
 
 . v. 
 
 
 — ; 
 
 
 
 
 •■ ix- 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR* 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 F 
 
 N' 
 
 N. 
 
 5o? 
 
 c£ 
 
 2 
 
 e;p 
 
 
 i * 2af 
 
 G. 
 
 — - 
 
 cv 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 — 
 
 A. 
 
 — 
 
 if 
 
 
 
 
 ^ '"• 
 
 — 
 
 ^ 
 
 — 
 
 i i 
 
 
 
 *S 
 
 ■ — 
 
 
 
 
 Plural, 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 F 
 
 
 N- 
 
 5o<p 
 
 0/ 
 
 
 2o.p 
 
 at 
 
 or cut- 
 
 Sap 
 
 G. 
 
 — 
 
 w> 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 toy 
 
 
 — . 
 
 A. 
 
 — 
 
 owe 
 
 
 — 
 
 ct$ 
 
 or WZ 
 
 — 
 
 V. 
 
 — 
 
 0/ 
 
 
 — 
 
 < 
 
 XI 
 
 or ah 
 
 
 — • 
 
 or 
 'op 
 
 N 
 
 DECLINE LIKE. 
 
 kvtifW&'QQ 
 
 ^OOr^TTQY 
 
 <pao/ 
 
 
 (JO^r 
 
 
 
 __ . 
 
 * 
 
 -r~~. .._. 
 
 . — 
 
 any at 
 
 uluhoi 
 
 
 pzQli. ■ - 
 
 v^riKOf 
 
 ayythoe 
 
 h'J-^avov' 
 
 9/6* 
 
 TVft 
 
 TQKIA.YIPGQ 
 
 e'ecbihfet 
 
 a\?ci$i!}T3V- 
 
 •Xi/vasra/^/ 
 
 Xifl 
 
 QzV{ua<r7o$ 
 
 iwiKoyoc 
 
 tpQivi'oruPQy - 
 
 CKIZ61 
 
 Xotfrf 
 
 7WA.Q$ 
 
 Gi'oy.a^cg 
 
 ffvuzrwtQr - ■■ 
 
 v.yAh 
 
 ci^yi- - 
 
 ■oma^C 
 
h 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 iyft oc 
 
 t= yjr * 
 
 ayf^ w 
 
 G. 
 
 i 
 
 jr: — ' ae 
 
 ES ■ — ' ou 
 
 A. 
 
 ^J! — — ci 
 
 52 — ' ay 
 
 M 
 
 V. 
 
 _■--. 
 
 £2 — « 
 PLURAL. 
 
 *» 
 
 N. 
 
 cty^ c/ 
 
 t= yfi cu or cut; 
 
 ' fyfi ^ a 
 
 G. 
 
 E2 — ~ wr 
 
 zz ■ — ' uv 
 
 cr — ' «r 
 
 A. 
 
 pr — ' qjc 
 
 ^ — ' ac Ora/f 
 
 // 
 
 V. 
 
 u 
 
 jrs — ' oli or cliq 
 
 N 
 
 Adjectives of three terminations are, for obvious reasons, 
 here declined throughout ; though the feminine form be- 
 longs to the first declension , and, m writings of Reputation, 
 regulates its accent accordingly ; but they are very com- 
 monly accented throughout, m all Genders, on the antepe- 
 nult , as indicated by the double lines. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. s»-$c£ oc 
 
 UOOZ, OV 
 
 G, — ■ — ov 
 
 — — ' ' OV 
 
 A. — " — cv 
 
 )l 
 
 V. ^ - i 
 
 )1 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 iv\o£ 01 
 — - — ur 
 
 — • mq 
 
 V 
 
 N. 
 
 <M 
 
 a 
 
 DECLINE LIKE. 
 
 G KGtt U 
 
 J \v%ot 
 
 e$ec 
 
 e rta; »f x«tc/hoc 
 
 o xa/ n GTfbyows 
 
 KCX.I Yl KfynfMQfAQC 
 
 9 KXl V 
 
 vvhyot 
 
3WS 
 
 Proparoxytona move the accent from the antepenult i& ■ 
 the penult ? in ihe genitive singular and plural , and in 
 the accusative plural of Masculines and Feminities : see 
 atdfOTree.. For the Vulgar exceptions to this Rule , see ihe 
 appendix. * 
 
 Paroxyton'a neither move nor change their accent : sec 
 
 Qxytpna never move their accent; hut substitute the 
 circumflex for the acute in the genitive of bolh numbers; 
 
 See (refocj KUslf. 
 
 Properispomena never move their accent ; but substi* 
 tute the- acute for the circumflex ", in the genitive of 
 both Numbers; .and in the accusative plural of Masculines 
 and Feminines. 
 
 As the first of the above rules, with respect to Proparox- 
 ytona , is the only one that affects the pronunciation cf 
 Nouns , beginners need attend to that only, 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 The Third Declension Isosyllabie comprises Nouns 
 
 Masculine and Feminine in u , gen: ovt ; as b xou i ivhaSii, 
 gen: <suc ; and Nouns Neuter in n and os ; as, to $'S\szf£c , 
 t« tu%-oc ? gen: owe 
 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ■>h 
 
 t 
 
 IVKC(;3 
 
 t"f 
 
 TO 
 
 VJh 
 
 
 ££ 
 
 iVKCtC 
 
 «> 
 tf 
 
 cv; 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 cvC 
 
 
 OK 
 
 n 
 
 
 us 
 
 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 w 
 
 ff 
 
 
 Uf 
 
 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 w 
 
 N. 
 
 ■rv?x oq 
 
 T£/ '/C 
 
 V. 
 
 G. 
 
 > 
 
 f 
 
 QY 
 
 -A. 
 
 — Cf 
 
 
 V 
 
 V. 
 
 Cf 
 
 . ' 
 
 H 
 
 SL 
 
 9 ay cJ 
 
 OVf x 
 CD 
 
s. I 
 
 
 m 
 
 StXfifE LIKE. 
 
 
 tvKctfrnt 
 
 
 •t&Xft 
 
 paydd 
 
 waiGii 
 
 
 &rx§o; 
 
 yayovAb-J 
 
 ivy trite 
 
 
 Tikes 
 
 7T#oapoy 
 
 apKU&ni 
 
 
 X iTh0 * 
 
 yii^ea 
 
 tvzrpvntc 
 
 
 'pyoj 
 
 k fJjK<ovB§ 
 
 tVTthVS 
 
 
 (/iao$ 
 
 KKilbcLPOV 
 
 The singular of <pxy- cu, a female glutton , is given under 
 this declension; but its plural is found irregularly declin- 
 ed, like that of the masculine y*y*< 4 by adding Se and 
 Ivy to the Vocative singular : see the Declensioir-df Hete* 
 roclitcs. 
 
 %VKot€u{ 
 
 Oxytona , as iy«jSife , declined after this form , never 
 move the accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the 
 acute in the genitive and accusative singular , and in all 
 the cases plural. 
 
 Paroxytona, as.9?moW, never move nor change the accent, 
 except in the genitive plural , which is circu indexed. 
 
 Proparcxytona Neuter , declined after euVa£eV , as 
 koxU%c , from the Masculine paroxytonon Kamfof , never 
 change the accent, except in the genitive plural , whose 
 final is circumflexed ; but they advance the accent to the 
 penult m the genitive singular, and in the N, A , and V 
 plural. 
 
 Properispomena , declined as the above , never move the 
 accent, but in the genitive plural , whose final is circum- 
 flexed : they substitute the acute for the circumflex , in 
 the Gen: Singular, and in the N , A, and V. Plural. 
 
 Paroxytona, as %iko<; , never move nor change the accent, 
 but id the G. Plural , which has the final circumflexed. 
 
sa 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 I. st DECLENSION, IMPARISYLLABIC. 
 
 This Declension comprises all nouas increasing , and 
 forming their genitive case in 01 , except those in toe , which 
 fall under the 2. d Declension Imparisyllabic , and some few 
 in \jh , classed among the Heteroclites. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 SING= 
 
 N. y«f> or 
 
 Gr. •— ' OVT Cf 
 
 V. yif o» 
 
 SING. 
 
 G. •— • of o? 
 A. — — * 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 -— ' QV 
 
 — — ' at 
 
 r *— -' i C 
 
 SING.. 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 »; 
 
 ere ay, a a 
 
 GTfCLy/A 
 
 ar 
 
 « 
 
 G. 
 
 ■ ' CLT G{ 
 
 ' 
 
 t 
 
 6)/ 
 
 A. 
 
 - — a 
 
 .» 
 
 — » 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 a 
 
 t 
 
 — 
 
 & 
 
 N. 
 
 <po 
 
 fW 
 
 a 
 
 G. 
 
 . — 
 
 ' — ' 
 
 ar ot 
 
 A. 
 
 ' — ' 
 
 — - 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 1 
 
 •— . 
 
 a 
 
 <p0 fifl 
 
 V.T 6f, 
 
 — • af 
 — a 
 
©rxLiNE jl 1 i;r~ 
 
 ytfOY Tfyyav 'zs-fdyuoi (p-c(-i.uz 
 
 ihifClC 
 
 jtpyiTsxr«jf 
 
 X?o>ux 
 
 et'srayiVjAGt 
 
 ytyotc 
 
 
 ytv ( u% 
 
 jwaBu^a 
 
 a^.KZJiy% 
 
 
 fit** 
 
 ffTiftotfiSL 
 
 XciyvyZ 
 
 
 isriTeuot 
 
 f&ifi'tpfxyux- 
 
 $v\x% 
 
 
 XV jM* 
 
 ~<5ra.whv/.i% 
 
 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 
 The interrogative t/V is acuted throughout on the sanid 
 syllable ; t/c r/w* r*we §*c The indefinite ri§ advances the 
 accent to the increment, in all the increasing cases; and, in 
 the genitive plural , substitutes the circumflex for the acut&. 
 Monosyllabic substantives advance the accent to the incre- 
 ment , in the genitive case singular and plural : as %&$ * 
 
 X u fa ■* X i7 ? : * » X iT f l c > X u ?® y ' X"?** * X i7 ^^ except Tf«V, 
 f»ac , ©-a?c and las , which advance it only in the genitive 
 singular. 
 
 Oxytona , except in the above instances , neper move flie 
 accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the acute , when 
 the increment is short , preceded by a long Vowel ; as 
 
 The exceptions as to the Vocative singular , considering 
 its rare occurrence , would lead to useless prolixity ; see 
 page 8 line 6. 
 
 Paroxytona never change the accent ; nor ever move it , 
 except in the genitive plural , where it is advanced a sylla- 
 ble : see y^w. 
 
 Proparoxytona never change the accent; but , in all the 
 increasing cases, advance it; because the language does not 
 admit of the retraction of the accent beyond the antepenult. 
 In the genitive plural , tlie accent advances two syllables : 
 see o'opiy.z. 
 
 Properispomena never move the accent , except in the 
 
2 4 
 
 genitive plural, Vhere thgjr advance it a syllable .* they sti>- 
 stitute the acute for the circumflex in all the increasing 
 cases j see w^y^a., 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 DECLENSION IMPARISYLLABIC, 
 
 This Declension comprises all nouns increasing , and 
 forming their gemtrve singular ia.eo;, or *&>c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL 
 
 N. QcL VIK IUS £x CtK $£ 
 
 G. — — 
 
 A. — — 
 
 lUC 
 
 v. — — 
 
 VJ 
 
 € CSV 
 
 t GL$ Or^CKTlUlQ 
 tit 
 
 N. 
 
 £a9 
 
 vt 
 
 G. 
 
 «^. 
 
 i 
 
 A. 
 
 _ 
 
 vy 
 
 V. 
 
 
 « 
 
 N. 
 
 $4 
 
 V 
 
 Cr. 
 
 - — 
 
 £ 
 
 A\ 
 
 -*, 
 
 V 
 
 V. 
 
 , — 
 
 
 
 0t 
 
 OQ 
 
 Caff 
 
 (!>!& 
 
 € 
 
 tic 
 
 ill 
 
 av 
 
 a 
 a. 
 
 G. 
 
 'Gf 
 
 i 
 !Y 
 
 i or 
 
 &c 
 
 it 
 
 US 
 
 i. 
 UK 
 
 a; 
 
p 
 
 NU 
 
 yt&ir 
 
 fC 
 
 
 
 yvw 
 
 Of 
 
 
 G. 
 
 ~J 
 
 t 
 
 &t 
 
 to 
 
 I 
 
 ay 
 
 A. 
 
 ~- 7 
 
 >p 
 
 
 i 
 
 ui 
 
 
 V. 
 
 ^ 
 
 t or k ' 
 
 ttc 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 <rvy 
 
 Xj3/<r 
 
 *; 
 
 r-HI 
 
 xph 
 
 us 
 
 G. 
 
 — 
 
 — ' 
 
 £ Ci( 
 
 .-, 
 
 t 
 
 € tff 
 
 A. 
 
 » 
 
 — 
 
 IV 
 
 
 L,' 
 
 cic 
 
 V. 
 
 Y 
 
 — * 
 
 t or i; 
 
 
 r 
 
 i/f 
 
 
 
 
 DECLINE LIKE, 
 
 
 
 j&3uriKti>c 
 
 
 /S«0vc 
 
 £a 0J yy&c/C Sf 
 
 vfifK 
 
 vvyn^uTK 
 
 &vyyfct$tvt 
 
 £afi/C 
 
 C«fl} XOLVifif 
 
 
 Vificrrctffts 
 
 $ah.y$tvc 
 
 
 -srxaruc 
 
 Wkairv x^ac/f 
 
 
 Xip. wvic 
 
 WfCJttifav 
 
 f 
 
 fy*xve 
 
 Cpa^J «&C 
 
 
 VU$cL%MK 
 
 tefafiuc 
 
 
 yhVKV( 
 
 yhvxv QcrK 
 
 
 til wk 
 
 \t37ll\JZ 
 
 
 tftpvt 
 
 epijUb "ZS-iortg 
 
 
 *$K 
 
 
 
 
 ACCENTUA 
 
 TION. 
 
 
 
 Oxytona of this declension never move the accent , 
 that is , it is always on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
 native. In the plural isosyllabic cases , the circumflex is 
 substitued for the acute; see £a?u'c; as also in the Vocative 
 singular , when the nominative ends in tu'c : see jSswimuV. 
 
 Paroxytona neither move, nor change , the accent : sec 
 
 Proparoxytona never change the accent ; but in the ge- 
 nitive singular , and in all the cases plural , advance it a 
 syllable : see fdyKfuriz, 
 
 Properispomena never move the accent , but substitute 
 
*6 
 
 the acute for the circumflex, in the genitive singular, and 
 in all the cases plural: see ymne. 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 OF HETEROCLITES. 
 
 i. st We will notice those that are declined like nouns 
 of the i. st declension Isosyllabic in the singular , and in- 
 crease, in the plural; as %trijif a Pilgrim, <$xyZ<; , a glut* 
 ton o us Mem. 
 
 S P 
 
 G. 
 A* 
 
 fay 
 
 *e 
 
 a 
 
 civ 
 
 a 
 
 <pxy 
 
 out 
 
 W or t 
 
 he or txtc 
 lie or %clo; 
 
 Nouns in rie of the first declension , accented on the 
 final, are very generally declined like <pcty&& ; as m^me 
 
 S P 
 
 N. 
 G, 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 x *ri 
 
 ne 
 
 a 
 
 x«*l 
 
 Jtf Or lot is 
 
 tar/ 
 
 he or Ixtc 
 
 he or hue 
 
 a. dly Those in ou , aye , declined , in the singular, like 
 Neuters of the 3. d Declension Isoyllabic. They are the fe- 
 'murines of nouns of the same nature as qayoie i expressive 
 of some kind of excess , or indicating some trade or cal- 
 ling ; as <pxyov , a gluttonous Woman ; wtiapv , a Woman 
 having a large foot. 
 
N, 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 m 
 
 cv 
 ev 
 
 9*7 
 
 
 a 7 
 
 fe 
 
 or lx% 
 
 o&)V 
 
 
 u 
 
 or W 
 
 hi 
 
 or lev; 
 
 Some few Proper Names of Women are declined as follows: 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 n 
 
 6) 
 
 Al«r*r« 
 
 A-Vcrac 
 
 At'csra 
 
 3. dly Nouns borrowed from Foreign Languages , which 
 very slightly differ from the foregoing , such as y.xtpyk -, 
 coffee , or a cup of coffee , *z$$pk , a coffee-house. 
 
 N. 
 G- 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 e Jfotfip 
 
 See or Sotic 
 
 $s< or las; 
 
 DECLINE LIKE, 
 
 fay 'I? 
 
 MVKUVXC 
 
 fxyov 
 
 XKlllxfOV 
 jUVKWOV 
 
 y.zyovKcj 
 
 folk 
 
 Nouns declined like the above 72€^r 7/20^ their accent, 
 and are generally acuted throughout the plural , contrary 
 to general principles as; fdftne: pi p^»W , /**«$«& 
 
o3 
 
 S P 
 
 «reX 
 
 ou? 
 
 a-TTA 
 
 tit 
 
 ou 
 
 ~-^ 
 
 <3V 
 
 oDv 
 
 - — 
 
 o&g 
 
 oG 
 
 =—* 
 
 ot 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 The Vulgar use avm •> It^h , fyc. , and decline them 
 jeguiarly, like ^96? : vou c , the plural of which is very little 
 in use among the Vulgar, is declined as the above. Writers 
 decline the plural as the ancients , to ■ u - uv - ac, - u , and 
 sometimes use the resolved form of the genitive .singular , 
 
 w 
 
 Of 
 
 5. tUy Nouns of the 1 . st Declension Imparisyllabic in w 
 gen: utoq will bs sometimes found declined in the singular 
 as Nouns of the i. st Declension Isosyllabic, with the excep- 
 tion of the genitive, which always ends in oq : thus $%fiifi- 
 rnroi from faiGoLfbiw. The plural is always regular. 
 
 G. 
 
 •f #p(3apo ryjT 
 
 0: 
 
 A. 
 
 -p — 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 , — / ~— 
 
 a 
 
 Nouns of the above class are also sometimes thus declined 
 in the singular £ap£afor «•, wf . «« ..,'« 
 
 Some Nouns Imparisyllabic in « , mostly proper Names, 
 are declined in the genitive singular , and throughout the 
 plural after Nouns of the 1 * st Declension Imparisyllabic ; 
 While , in the Accusative and Vocative singular , they ana- 
 logize wibh Nouns of the a. d Declension Imparisyllabic- 
 S P 
 
 N. 
 
 n*>. 
 
 1$ 
 
 O. 
 
 — ' 
 
 t 
 
 A, 
 
 > 
 
 tv 
 
 y, 
 
 ~J 
 
 K 
 
 So; 
 
 or 1 
 
 Ilap 
 
 etc 
 
Hcuns in ys , ucc have the same Irregularities* 
 
 N. 
 
 ty? 
 
 u$ 
 
 
 6. 
 
 . — 
 
 u 
 
 o; 
 
 A. 
 
 — 
 
 uv 
 
 
 V. 
 
 — 
 
 u or 
 
 u$ 
 
 ly) \> 
 
 e$ or i/jiCf* 
 
 fc% 
 
 The following are irregular in the singular , hut have 
 the plural regularly formed , after the i. st Declension 
 
 Imparisyllabic. 
 
 4 ttcctt'p or t.olxI^ genitive watpoc or itarepx. 
 
 6 avnp or av§pa$ dcv£po< or avop<% 
 
 & 7:olu; ttoXXou accusative iroXuv 
 
 t, yuvfl or yuvawta yuvaowfe or yuvawca? 
 
 t, 6.uychnop or Ouyaripa Ooyarpo? or GuyaTspsu; 
 
 ?i yaar/ip or yacnrepa 
 
 yacrpo? or 
 
 ya<jrspx^ 
 
 CHAPTER XIL 
 
 OF AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 Nouns form Feminine Augmentatives in af* : as from tq 
 «roSotf/, the foot , >? croSa'pa ? f/je large f oo t , masculine Di- 
 minutives in &W which are for the most part proper 
 Karnes, or receive the addition from the speaker , to express 
 endearment or affection; as, from EuWa0^c> An/^r^c, are 
 formed b SraDgW * 5 Ajj^mrpaVqc ; ??y //£/& Eiistathius > my 
 little Demetrius. Many Neuter appellatives also have this 
 termination ; as t^ ^-ol^'Iki, the little infant ; to Tfoczri^lxi f 
 the little table ; to •wola^oLKi , the small foot , formed from 
 «■«&', rpajarfjf, igobdfi. Feminine diminutives end in <v£s£ &• 
 c-J\a ; as \J/yv/r^a fjioiifjny little soul, \\iviT{a pov , my little 
 Helen} from v'^X^ ^ rw i anc ^ SrawvAa pv, and ^tcw/t^cj /4*y , 
 
3b 
 my beloved or little Aitastasia , from 'hwrtmis. These di« 
 minutives are often applied to grown persons , as more 
 polite and affectionate than the proper Name , without 
 the addition. 
 
 There are also adjectives in ovr{tMt - w - cr , which come 
 under this denomination , and answer to the words in Ita- 
 lian ending in ino , etto ; as piKfovrfaoc , ti , ov , very small; 
 and in uccio as kolkovt{ikg; - * - ov , very pretty. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 i. We have, in the course of the declensions, referred 
 adjectives to three different forms: in oc , « , ov ; the second 
 vc , ux , v ; and the third in v\t , k All these form their 
 comparatives 8$ superlatives from the nominative singular 
 of the neuter in o , v , tc : thus , from the neuter of the 
 vulgar, ro <ro<pe, is formed the comparative <ro$QTt$oc. ff«?«r«f.tf# 
 ffo^Tepw, wiser, or more wise, and the superlative s-oparaToc , (i) 
 ffo<p«TarM, GoftiTSLTor wisest, or most wise. From £a8J, deep , 
 the comparative /SaQuV^oc , jSaGure^jj , GMrtfov deeper , and 
 the superlative jSaS-Jrarof , Col^otjlth , fia.QvTa.Tov deepest; and 
 from euVt&V pious, the comparative iuaifr'-o-Ttpoc , wcifar^r, , 
 iwi&ffTtfov , more pious , and the superlative iJartCwraiw , 
 
 euo-e^s/rrar^ , iva&k<naTov , most pious. 
 
 2 . Some few Nouns in oc change this termination into knfoc, 
 t7Tifn , z<T7i?ov , for the comparative , and, iarotroc , ivTetrn ? 
 fFTUTov, for the superlative; as, a^j»eS"oc has ot^tthrifof &c , 
 in the comparative, and ayjuwraros §'C. , in the superlative, 
 
 Comparatives and superlatives are , in the masculine and 
 neuter, declined after nouns of the first 8$ second declension 
 of the same terminations. 
 
 (i) Writers generally terminate and accentuate the feminine tlius. 
 
3r 
 
 ^~ 3. The accent is uniformly on the antepenult, as in eyfioc. 
 ( See Cliapter 7, Page 19 ) Good Writers, however, ad- 
 vance the accent to the penult, in the feminine; and, in the 
 ''masculine and neuter , follow the Rules for accentuating 
 proparoxytona in oc , ev , of the second declension. 
 
 4. Though the intonation, is precisely the same, it is, for 
 the sake of orthography , necessary to remark a difference 
 in the formation of comparatives and superlatives from po- 
 sitives in oc — When ^ is preceded hy a short syllable , the 
 comparative §• superlative are formed hy changing oc into 
 sm^oc 8$c, , as from Sytof , the / being short , are formed 
 •tyiursfoc, iyiaraTOf $;c. ; when preceded by a long syllable, 
 or by a a mute followed by a liquid , they are formed by 
 changing oc into ortffo , otxtoq 8$c. \ as from st/jtoc , w§irK*c are 
 
 formed XPiaTOTtfOC j ^lUTOTOLTOQ , &* iVOtSThOTifOt; 1 VJOZTkOTXTOey O^C. 
 
 .5. Ka>toc, bad, makes in the comparative x* l f 07l 1°s* X ll t' Q7i 1 n * 
 X il .f 07i ? cv t worse ; in the superlative xgxiar^, Ka'x/rrq, y.clx.vttqv $ 
 worst', Kxxk , good , in the comparative nsjulrsfar, kclmti^ 
 xxhnTifov , and JtaAA/oy. better ; in the superlative ulclkkijtgq 
 
 6= The superlative is generally used absolutely; as, £ <ro- 
 <pwraroc, generally means very (W, and not, the 7/?,a?£ ewe; 
 when the quality is expressed relatively, it is more common 
 to use the comparative, particularly among the Vulgar; as, 
 9&ttpaT*fos »wo rej; drijuzrovc ,■ the wisest of men. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 NOUKS OF NUMBER". 
 
 The five following Cardinal Numbers are 'declined, 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 N. . v.; or Iv«5 it;« or p.i* ev or sva 
 
 G, Ivo; uia; svo$ 
 
 A. evs . [jttaw or .*«** ev or hx 
 

 MASCULINE § 
 
 tfMlfttSrt, 
 
 N. 
 G, 
 A. 
 
 Tpi&v 
 
 ?pet<; 
 
 three 
 
 0. 
 
 A. 
 
 'feo'capwv 
 
 four 
 
 TpUtSy 
 
 Tecaapav 
 
 With ' the compounds ^cjc«t f€k , Jexsjr(>'<* thirteen , ami 
 c{^«w^<{ , SsHargVffofja , declined like their simples. 
 
 The remaining Cardinal numbers* up to a hundred, are 
 indeclinable : they are. 
 
 twenty one 
 twenty two 
 twenty three 
 twenty four 
 twenty five 
 twenty six 
 twenty seven 
 twenty eight 
 twenty nine 
 thirty 
 forty 
 fifty 
 
 di>0 
 
 swta or i<pTa 
 &&r£ or 6*/t&> 
 evvea or svvei 
 
 £voYx« 
 
 SeJcarsvre 
 
 S£XOSTCt3s 
 
 Ssxasvvsa 
 etxoci 
 
 two 
 five 
 
 six 
 
 seven 
 
 eight 
 
 nine 
 
 ten 
 
 eleven 
 
 twelve 
 
 fifteen 
 
 sixteen 
 
 seventeen 
 
 eighteen 
 
 nineteen 
 twenty 
 
 eucociouo 
 
 eixoat Tpe~; Tpux 
 
 EiXOCt TS<7<70£pe<; T£Stf£p& 
 £l$COGfc 1w6VT£ 
 
 fitttoati^ 
 
 SWMNJtOXTcS 
 
 ewcoGievveoe 
 
 TpLavTa 
 cocpavra 
 
 spS , o[/.iivTa 
 dyoV/jvTa oydwvTtf 
 evvevvivTtt 
 exaroM 
 
 sixty 
 
 seventy 
 
 eighty 
 
 ninety 
 
 one hundred 
 
 (i) ^u is used before words begfrmmg with a-consonan.t ^ xai*&<. 
 
The hundreds beyond the first are declined. 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE NEUTER. 
 
 •33 
 
 oiaxociQi 
 
 ^ia%ociai$ 
 
 diaxoGia 
 
 20(3 
 
 TplOTOCOCTiOt 
 
 TQtaxoataii 
 
 TptOBCOGia 
 
 3oo 
 
 *P£TpaXQGUDl 
 
 TeTpaxocriais 
 
 T£Tpa/.OGWC 
 
 4oo 
 
 xavraxociot 
 
 wsvTay-ociat? 
 
 ftevTaxoaux 
 
 5oo 
 
 §£«XOGtOt 
 
 ^oocoGifcis 
 
 i^oacoaia 
 
 600 
 
 STvTaZOCTiOt 
 
 IttTajtoGiais 
 
 £j7Ta/COGl« 
 
 J/OO 
 
 oV.Tcr/.oGiot 
 
 6]CTaxQaiai( 
 
 oxiraxoGia 
 
 800 
 
 ivvsa*/.QCi©6 
 
 ivvsaxoGiaic 
 
 £vVEfl&Q$ltt 
 
 900 
 
 ypaoi 
 
 X^* l « 
 
 3£iAia 
 
 1000 
 
 The following are the Ordinal Numbers, in the nomi- 
 
 native of each gender. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE* 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 
 77 p COCO £ 
 
 TTpWTT) 
 
 Tup WTO V 
 
 first 
 
 fejTepos 
 
 SsUTEpOC 
 
 ^euTepov 
 
 second* 
 
 TplTO$ 
 
 ¥pM 
 
 tpiTQV 
 
 third 
 
 T£TSCpTO; 
 
 T£TapT7i 
 
 TSTapTOV 
 
 fourth 
 
 77 £ [A7C TO? 
 
 ipejMETI] 
 
 7T£[/-t:tov 
 
 fifth 
 
 sztos 
 
 IZTV] 
 
 exTov 
 
 sixth 
 
 &|3oOfJLO£ 
 
 ^Q^O'7.71 
 
 tj^OOJAQV 
 
 seventh 
 
 oyooo; 
 
 OV^pT] 
 
 oySoov 
 
 eighth 
 
 Ivvarog 
 
 SWdCTT) 
 
 svvaTov 
 
 ninth 
 
 b(y.c/.Toq 
 
 o^ar/) 
 
 oe/.aTOv 
 
 tenth 
 
 svfeaTo; 
 
 evo*sxaT7fr 
 
 evdrz-aTov 
 
 eleventl 
 
 S(t)^£X,y.TO? 
 
 SfciSejcaTY) 
 
 J(i)^£X.aTOV 
 
 twelfth 
 
 £e-/.aTo; TpiTo; i&atin Tpir/i ^arov Tpfcov thirteenth 
 ctacaTo; TeTapT05&xat7iT6Tdcp'ni Sexa-rov TSTaprov fourteenth 
 Bixcntx; tcejatcto? 8fC. up to 
 
 bucoffTo$ l^tocrr^ eutocTov twentieth 
 
 eixogtos TTctoTO? sijcogtyj TrptoT^ etxocTovTcpwTov one ^ twentieth 
 TpiaaooTo; Tota^oGT^ Tpiax.ooTov thirtieth 
 
 f cGGKC.aXGGTOC TEGGapajCGGTfl 
 
 ■£GGfi£pa34QGTQV 
 
 fortieth 
 
% 
 
 
 
 
 l£2VTYlJtOGTO£' 
 
 ti 
 
 6v 
 
 5V h 
 
 Icy]>'»og?o; 
 
 V) 
 
 ov 
 
 6o. th 
 
 spoop/ixocTos 
 
 V) 
 
 ov 
 
 th 
 
 70. 
 
 Oy^OViJCOGTO? 
 
 \ 
 
 ov 
 
 8g* 
 
 £VV£V7iX.0GT05' 
 
 VI 
 
 ov 
 
 ih 
 
 9°- 
 
 sx,c;tocto$ 
 
 i 
 
 GV 
 
 th 
 100. 
 
 StaxociocTo? 
 
 4 
 
 ov 
 
 200/* 
 
 TptaXOClOCTO^ 
 T£TpaXO<7lOCT05 
 
 
 ov 
 ov 
 
 3oe.°* 
 4oo. th 
 
 -ftSVTay.0GL0GfO$ 
 
 7) 
 
 ov 
 
 5oo: h 
 
 s$axoGio<JTO<; 
 
 V] 
 
 ov- 
 
 600.* 
 
 etc. 
 
 &tt\ 
 
 ete. 
 
 CHAPTER XV, 
 
 OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 
 SLNGULAE 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Ik 
 
 G. 
 
 eyoj 
 p-oij 
 
 I 
 
 of m6 
 
 T0p-£OV 
 
 of us 
 
 A. 
 
 as §" spva 
 
 me 
 
 SECOND 
 
 PERSON. 
 
 us- 
 
 3V. 
 G. 
 
 CD Of £GU 
 
 coy 
 
 tllOll 
 
 of thee 
 
 C£l? <B>' £C£% 
 
 y@ 
 
 a; 
 
 tfg cf £G£Vflt- 
 
 thee 
 
 Ga? §' cGa^ 
 
 of you 
 
 V. 
 
 CO GU dj £CL> 
 
 thou? 
 
 <«F Gfet<5 §" £G£^ ■ 
 
 ye 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 N. koto? auTYj ai»To he, she, it 
 G. tou T7i? tou of him, her, it 
 A. tov ttjv to him, her, it 
 
 auTol au«pqc?s auto: they 
 twv of them 
 
 t-ous. TaTj t-« them 
 
 The oblique cises of the pronouns of the third person 
 are formed by aphaeresis , or elision of the first syllable of 
 the pronoun, demonstrative ccuVec, , aM 7 avVt. Good Writers, 
 
35 
 
 however , and those who speak most correctly , disapprove, 
 this elision , and write, 8$ pronounce it, just as it is given 
 in the chapter on demonstrative pronouns. 
 
 2. There is also a compound pronoun , which , as mora 
 polite §• respectful , is used instead of the simple , in all 
 persons , numbers , fy cases , the accusative excepted ; a* 
 follows. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. THIRD PERSON* 
 
 o fy JTOU^OyOU (JLOU TOU XoyOU GO'J TOU^OyOU TQU Or 77]£ 
 
 ^ jj, or of me. thou, orof thee, he, she, or of him, her 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 c ) too ^o'yoo |i.a? tou loyoo ca; tou ^o'yoo tou$ 
 ^ .,' j we, or of us ye, or of you they, or of them 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 
 
 1. The Modern Greek Language has, strictly speaking, 
 no pronoun possessive , answering to our pronouns my , 
 thy , his, her , our , your , their. 
 
 2. As a substitute, it has a form , compounded of the 
 adjective tliKo; , expressive of property, or peculiarity, and 
 the* genitive singular, or the accusative plural of the per- 
 sonal pronoun. The adjective is thus declined , as other 
 adjectives in cc , n \ or. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER 
 
 G. TOO iduCOU (JLQU TT? SOlJt^? fJLOU 
 
 to e^tzov [/.ov my, or miim 
 too g&XiOu [xou of my,or mine 
 A, tov s<W.q'v uou JTTjv e&wtvfv ulqu to eosxov p.ou my, or mine 
 
w 
 
 M 
 
 G. TOV EOUC&V [XOU 
 
 PLl/RAt. 
 
 F 
 
 » 
 
 -WVcoY/.toVLWU 
 
 A , to'j; £o\xou; [J.ou -ra; i^ivAc, p,ou 
 
 Ta £oW. (xou my , or inin^ 
 
 Twvsaiy.wv^ou of my, of mine? 
 
 a dSr/toc p.ou my , or mine 
 
 The above form answers for all the possessive pronouns, 
 by substituting for y.ov, the genitives uo v thy , rev his, rvi^ 
 her, rwc , or the accusatives row , tlieir , and ^c , our ,.■ 
 sac , your. 
 
 The lower classes usually inditlge in the elision of the 
 incipient- Vowel', and say b 'Imoq fxou ? T ov <xc'. 
 
 The personal proncuns ucv 7 wsv 8§c , are enclitics in these 
 examples, as in that of the compound personal pronoun ?&» 
 hkyov py, and therefore lose their accent: see Chap* 12. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The Modern Greek has three demonstrative Pronouns: 
 
 crJroc, clvtyi, xvro ; tovtoc, rovry;, rovio, this * and kvMvoc, , iXihn , 
 
 fail* o , that: the former two indicating proximity, and th# 
 latter remoteness : 
 
 2v They are thus declined". 
 
 SINGULAR.- 
 
 N. 
 
 OCUTO? , 
 
 auTT) , 
 
 auTo 
 
 04 
 
 this 
 
 G. 
 
 auToD', 
 
 auTvis, 
 
 auToO' 
 
 
 of this 
 
 A. 
 
 auTov, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 auiro 
 
 
 this 
 
 N. 
 
 auToi , 
 
 auTatg , 
 
 auTot 
 
 
 these - 
 
 G. 
 
 auTtov , 
 
 (XUTTOV, 
 
 au~c5v 
 
 
 of these 
 
 A, 
 
 auToJg, 
 
 auTai5- r 
 
 aura 
 
 
 these 
 
 (1) Some Authors write i<SWs , i » °' v an d m tk e P^ral feminine 
 
 (2) The above is the more usual Form 5 but many Writers prefer 
 She Hclknie wto; , cwr/i . t&uto, 
 

 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 » 
 
 
 % 
 
 TO 'J TO $, 
 
 TOUT7, 
 
 ■roSfea 
 
 this 
 
 G. 
 
 TOUTOU , 
 
 TO'JT-/;^ , 
 
 TOUTOll 
 
 of this 
 
 A, 
 
 tgOtgv, 
 
 TOOV/VV , 
 PLURAL. 
 
 TOUT© 
 
 ■this 
 
 N. 
 
 TO 5 TO i, 
 
 to^tsi;, 
 
 tout a 
 
 these 
 
 G. 
 
 TO'JTWV.3 
 
 TOUTCO.V i 
 
 TG'JTCjJV 
 
 of these 
 
 A. 
 
 to'jtqu; , 
 
 tout^i; , 
 singular. 
 
 Touja 
 
 these 
 
 ft. 
 
 gjtetvo£, 
 
 SX£tV7] , 
 
 IxsTvp 
 
 that 
 
 O. 
 
 ix.clVGU, 
 
 EX8lV7]f , 
 
 sxetvoy 
 
 of that 
 
 A. 
 
 SfcEWOV , 
 
 JxStVYlV, 
 PLURAL. 
 
 exeiyo 
 
 that 
 
 8f, 
 
 ejceivoi, 
 
 £X£LVat£ , 
 
 gxsty.a 
 
 those 
 
 ('. 
 
 E/.SlVtoV, 
 
 ixstvwv , 
 
 exsivcov 
 
 of those 
 
 A. 
 
 ixe&voug , 
 
 Ixetvas? , 
 
 sV.sTva 
 
 those 
 
 . The vulgar add a syllable to these pronouns, which 
 hi general rhiaies with the vowel of the final syllable, and 
 receives the accent. Thus, they say , auTouvoO , aoTr.r?,; 
 
 «UTovav , auT7ivav , auTcovcov , aurouvou? , auTYivai^ 
 
 instead of 
 
 «uto6 , out7& , kuton , kuttp , aurSv , ccIto'j; , auTaT; , and 
 
 TOUTOUVOUj TOUTYIV^? , TO'JTOVa , TOUT7)V.a, , TGUTOIVG'.. , TO'JTT.va^ 
 
 to-jtuvuv , touto'jvou; , instead of to'Jto'j , touttj? , toutov , 
 to'jtt.v, TojTQ^TO'JTaic, TOujcov, tq'jtguc. In like manner ixtivovo, 
 exeiyTiva , exgtrvqu, jbtetvSv, instead of l&eiyoy , |xe£vt(iv , Exetyau , 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 
 
 The Pronoun relative is g ottoToc , v». gttolV. ? to gtcolov , 
 who, or iv/uch: it is always preceded by the article, and is 
 declined like aypio;, toe, toy of the second declension; tbus; 
 
33 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 K. 6d7rofo< 'h oxota to oroibv who, or which 
 
 (r. touqxoiou T^?6xota§ touotcolou of whom, or which 
 
 A. TOV 67TOIOV T/jV OTTOiaV TO OTCOWV whom, OF Which 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A> 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 al ditotais toc oirota 
 
 ot owotot at diroiais toc oTrota who, or which 
 t&v o7roLwv tSv otcouov t&v 67rot(i)v of whom, or which 
 
 tou$ otcoiou; Ta? 07:01a? Ta orcoZa whom, or which 
 
 2. The Moderns use o'c-r/c as a relative la the nominative 
 case only of each number ; thus : N. S. forts , vine , o , n i 
 N. PL el Tim , at Tin; : the neuter has no plural. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 OE REFLECTED PRONOUNS. 
 
 The reflected Pronoun is a Compound ; and is employed 
 to express the reflection of an action on the subject of a 
 Verb. It has only two cases, and agrees with all genders ; 
 as follows : 
 
 Lingular. 
 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 SFCOND PERSON, THIRD PERSON. 
 
 c. 
 
 tou sauToO p,ou 
 of myself 
 
 tou eaurou sou tou Iccutou tou, or r/fc 
 of thy self of him or herself 
 
 A. 
 
 Tov lauTo'v p.ou 
 myself 
 
 tov eauTo'v cou tov eauTov tou, or ttis 
 thyself him, or herself 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 G. tou lauTou (xa^ tou laurou cǤ TOulauTou tous o/'tow 
 of ourselves of yourselves of themselves 
 
 A» Tov eauTo'v j/.a$ tov £«uto'v cccq tov eauTov tou; 
 ourselves yourselves themselves 
 
CHAPTER XX. 
 
 ^n 
 
 *}F INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, 
 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 N 
 
 N. 
 
 roTo; , 
 
 sco&e, 
 
 1T0IQV 
 
 G. 
 
 TtoioUf 
 
 •scofe, 
 
 ico toy 
 
 A. 
 
 tcoiov ? 
 
 rotav, 
 
 woibv 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 T0101-, 
 
 ffoiai? , 
 
 woii* 
 
 G. 
 
 TCQiCOV , 
 
 TCOtWV , 
 
 7C0tu>V 
 
 A, 
 
 1C010UC, 
 
 1C0MCS , 
 
 7CQWC 
 
 who or which ? 
 
 of whom or which? 
 
 whom or which? 
 
 who or which? 
 
 of whom or which? 
 
 whom or which? 
 
 V This Pronoun is, by Synezesis, contracted into a Monosyl- 
 lable , with a strong accent on the final vowel 
 
 /^OtO^, TCOtflC., 7COIO. 
 
 && 
 
 From TTotou, icoia$, the vulgar form icoiavoy, ^otav%, $$e c 
 FromjoAwv , oXou; , they form qaovcov , 6>ovou$ of all, all §*c. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 MASCULINE §' FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 which or what? 
 
 of which or what? 
 
 which or what? 
 
 which or what? 
 
 of which or what? 
 
 which or what? 
 
 The English Word " What " is more indefinite in its 
 signification , " which " more strictly relative ; as wJiat 
 arguments did he adduce ; that is , indefinitely , of all the 
 arguments that might be adduced : which arguments did 
 he adduce; that is , of those expected ? or agreed upon ? or 
 known. 
 
 N. 
 
 Tig 
 
 
 G. 
 
 TlVO£ 
 
 TlVQ£ 
 
 A. 
 
 TlVflf 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N, 
 
 Tive? 
 
 tiya 
 
 G. 
 
 TlVCOV 
 
 TtVtoV 
 
 A. 
 
 Tiva? 
 
 TLVa 
 
4* 
 
 CHAPTER XXL 
 
 Or INDEFINITE PRONOUNS; 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 T/ti or, t/c some one, or some, or a certain oil*. Tins 
 pronoun is used where we use the indefinite article , or 
 speak in the plural indefinitely , without an article. 
 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE, 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 N, 
 
 Tiva;, Tt$ 
 
 tI? 
 
 \ 
 
 Tt, 
 
 0. 
 
 two? 
 
 T'.V0£ 
 
 ftvoi 
 
 A. 
 
 tivgc 
 
 tiv* 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 V 
 
 K. 
 
 TIVS5 
 
 nvl? 
 
 TIV3C. 
 
 G. 
 
 TlVfcSV 
 
 TtVWV 
 
 TIVCOV 
 
 A. 
 
 Tiva? 
 
 twkg 
 
 TLVOC 
 
 It is declined like the interrogative r/V, with the except 
 tion of having the accent on the final syllable , and being 
 sometimes an enclitic* 
 
 The Ynlgar use y^n&ot , ui^mxi x ftifi%£- % 
 
 2, Kxuvioc-or, jf ? ev some , in the sense of quantity , is 
 declined like ^f ^ , >J , or , Kcx.7roi-oc , a , of , some, a certain, 
 like c rVo?oc , h ore/a , to otcToc ; except that the accent is 
 throughout on the antepenult. The same exception , as to 
 the position of the accent, holds throughout cWo'c , woix , 
 orciov, whosoever. 
 
 3. Kxvi7> or Kxvhae , nappta. , Kaw, any one, some one, is, 
 declined like %1q , ^/a, '^. It is compounded with negatives 
 and affirmatives , answering to our somebody , anybody , 
 nobody. 
 
 4- In o, i\ rh Iuvol or rdh such an one, the article alone is 
 declinable, as tit a. tm t&Ii yviajka, I have seen such a Woman 
 sfj* toy Tclh, I have seen such a one* 
 
CHAPTER XXIL 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 1. The modern Greek Verb lias two Voices ; the active 
 and passive. 
 
 2. Three Modes ; the Indicative, the Imperative, and the 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 It has also an active participle , undeclined , in ovtuq and 
 evvfac, uvrac , agreeing with all numbers and persons, an<* 
 'swering to our participle in ing \ and it has two passive 
 participles, declinable, the one present, y^apo^-syuc , hn, tvov , 
 being written , the other past , y^a^eVo? , ivn % hov written. 
 
 Verbs that are both active and neuter , which are very 
 numerous, have this latter participle; raw'Ja I rot, both 
 transitively and intransitively, participle past, o-a^o-^c. 
 
 3. The Modern Greek like other Modern languages has 
 
 both simple and compound Tenses. 
 
 Present 
 ( Continuative 
 Simple Tenses. \ Imperfect 
 Aorist 
 
 Indefinite 
 
 ( Pluperfect 
 Compound. I Future 
 
 ( Conditional 
 
 4- The Indicative is the only Mood that has them all. 
 
 The two others have only the present , or rather the 
 continuative, and the Aorist, or indefinite. The imperative 
 has only the second person of each Number, taking the other 
 persons from the Subjunctive. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII, 
 
 OF CONJUGATION. 
 
 '. There is, in Modern Greek, but one Conjugation; but 
 this contains barvtona , in a , and perisppmena in a. 
 2. The first have the acute accent on the penult ; and 
 
4* . 
 
 are therefore called barytona ( see chapter i , §. 6 ) 
 Perispomena are formed, by contraction , from verbs in 
 to coi). They follow the form of circumflexed Verbs , or 
 Pcrispomena in the present , and the continuative Tenses 
 ♦nly." 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 •OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 i. The simple Tenses are all formed from the present. 
 The derivatives differ from the present in the four follow- • 
 ing particulars. i. st by the addition of -an augment. 
 2, ly By a change of the characteristic. _3. ly By a change 
 of termination. 4- ly and lastly , in a great number of 
 Verbs , by ciianging , in the aorist , and m tlie tenses 
 formed from it, the Vowel or Diphthong preceding the 
 characteristic of the present, ( see Chap. 24 , 2. a Part 
 §• 4 , 7 > 9- ) 
 
 OF THE AUGMENT, 
 
 There are two kinds of augments ; the syllabic, and the 
 temporal. 
 
 The syllabic augment is ane, prefixed to certain tenses 
 of Verbs beginning with a consonant; as from yppw , I write, 
 'iyfa^ct, I wrote,- f/Vrw I throw, ep/4a , I threw. 
 
 The temporal augment is a change of the /datable' Vow- 
 els and Diphthongs a , e* , m , 01 , av , w , into the im- 
 mutable Vowels n , w, and Diphthong v\v, as from aWa , / 
 hear, yik.qic-%, 1 heard; iktyxu , / reproach 'ihty^j, I reproached. 
 
 Verbs beginning with e , sometimes , instead of the tem- 
 poral augment, assume an 1 in the augmented tenses , as 
 from t^w , I have , efya I had. The augments are in use 
 only in the indicative Mood : thus , from the aorist indi- 
 cative tyfOL^a, I wrote, are formed the aorists imperative 
 y^a^e , write , and subjunctive w yftyo , that I write , or 
 may write , without augment. 
 
 The uneducated are fond of substituting the temporal 
 
43 
 
 for the syllabic augment ; as ny^a for iy$x$ct The lower 
 classes often omit the augment altogether , as will appear 
 in the conjugation of the verb. 
 
 OF THE CHARACTERISTIC, 
 
 The Characteristic is the consonant, or combination 
 
 of consonants , preceding the vowel , or vowels in the last 
 syllable : thus , a is the characteristic of Gexa , and ^ of 
 
 The change of the characteristic is the great difficulty 
 in the Theory for forming the Tenses. Its consideration 
 shall follow the conjugation of the Verb , the knowledge of 
 which will render the subject much more intelligible. 
 
 OF THE TERMINATION. 
 
 The termination is , as appears above , that part of the 
 word which immediately follows the characteristic ; in 0sa<h 
 it is u ; in ey^avf/-*, a; in £y^a<p3--»Jit€re, wxerg. These termina- 
 tions should be particularly attended to , in learning ta 
 conjugate the Yerb. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 T. These Tenses are, as in all languages, in which they 
 exist , formed by means of a verb auxiliary united with 
 the verb conjugated. 
 
 They are formed in three different ways ; but without 
 the slightest change of signification , on account of that 
 difference. In the first , the auxiliary alone is conjugated, 
 and the principle Verb remains invariable. In the other 
 two , on the contrary , the auxiliary remains invariable 
 while the principle Ferb alone is conjugated. The future 
 is compounded in three ways : the conditional in two : the 
 pluperfect only in the first. 
 
44 
 
 II. The auxiliaries are lya I have , for the pluperfect , 
 sx\u\ 0£to) , I mil, for the future and conditional. 
 
 The continuative of the former 6%a , I A^/, is the only 
 Tense which is used as an auxiliary, and it is employed to 
 form the pluperfect. 
 
 The present , and the continuative of the second , 8*xa 
 and qfohoi. are both employed , with and without variation. 
 When without variation , the third person is used through- 
 out , Gs\e/ and \$&a. 
 
 The former, $sku is contracted into, 0* ; and 8& v* into 8a\ 
 
 III. The Tenses of the conjugated Verb, which enter into 
 ^composition , are the present, and the aorist of the subjunc- 
 tive Mkod. In the first form of composition , in Verbs 
 called Barytona , these Tenses change their final a into u. In 
 verbs called perispomena, those of the first class like, -rclja 
 change the a into circnmflexed u, those of the second; like 
 t///«, the a into circumflexed a. The passive Voice admits 
 into this form of composition the aorist only, which changes 
 the w into «, without the i underwritten , 0g\o> , QUuc yfxffi 
 ( see first composition in the conjugations ). 
 
 In the two other forms of composition , the subjunctive 
 js regularly conjugated ; but when with the third person 
 of the auxiliary, in Us uncontracted form, >a is not admis? 
 .fiible ( see 2. d composition. ) 
 
 IV. The future is compounded, i. st , of the auxiliary 8*' a « 
 conjugated, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive 
 unaltered , fcku' yfd^u or 8f\« yfd<pu I shall write ; passive 
 &'*« 7pa<p(iif I shall be written ; the passive does not admit 
 the present , in this form of composition. 
 
 2, Jy Of QeAfe/ , the third person singular of the present 
 &ko unconjugated, and of the aorist or present of the 
 subjunctive conjugated; U hu yftyxa ,,-w, h GVyfilf - «, ^c , w. 
 I shall , thou cw/£, he a;/// write; Oexei ypapfl « , wc,w or 
 y^(p-of/ai, is at, it xi, I shall, thou wilt, he <*>/// be written. 
 
 3. ly Of 8e for 0e*e/ , and of the subjunctive, preceded by 
 the particles : Gt vd y$<*.*\>-e>,n, g, or yf dp <vc, , I shall write 
 Is pa y^etipO-S, >??, jr, or yfaf-^a/, £c-«/,*7a/, I shall he written; au(J 
 
^ 
 
 ncfn 
 
 hy synalcepha, 9a yp^-c, ;;c, «,ory^-a, hc ? k, 6a y?«pQ- 
 
 0/* y^a'p e/*a/j £crc j ; 7 era;, winch latter is the more usual form. 
 
 V. The conditional is composed i. st of the imperfect 
 rftikov or Yifohz, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive, 
 as above in the i. st form of the future; 8<Je\-k, &c, i , %y*v 9 %r$ 
 ay y^x^tij or yfsctpu I should S\C. , write; passive *!0e\-a , is i 
 t , &;c. , yjcupfto I should <Scc. , he written. 
 
 2. ly Of >J8e\fc, third person singular of the imperfect 
 jrfoxc'i and of the aorist, or present of the subjunctive, as in 
 the second form of the future, S Qthi yj a. ^r^ w, *, dry^<p-&,m 9 
 v. I should, thou wouldst #fc., "vvrite, or have written ; y%\i 
 yrfjL^ w,jic,«, or y^d.^-ofjLOLifi(FOLi 9 iTOLi I should be, or havebeen^ 
 thou wouldst be , or have been written &;c. , see the Syntax* 
 
 VI. The pluperfect is compounded only in the first man- 
 ner , that is of the imperfect fj%9y or dya, conjugated , ar>d 
 of the aorist of the principal verb unconjugated u^cc , tlxis* 
 y[J.-fii , I had* thou hadst written J^a, &X*t> yf a 9®* ^ hod j 
 thou hadst been written. 
 
 It may be well here to observe to the reader, that in the 
 following conjugation of the Verb, when a Tense has several 
 forms , the first is the most approved ; the last the most 
 
 vulgar. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 V O I G E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD-. 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 TEKSE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 yfa<p-Oi 
 
 y^j-iK 
 
 
 I write 
 thou w 
 
 ritest 
 
 I am 
 thou 
 
 writing (i) 
 art writing- 
 
 
 yfxf-tt 
 
 
 he writes (o.) 
 
 he is 
 
 writing 
 
 
 (i) For the principles on which the distinctions in the English 
 Translation of the Tenses are grounded , see Appendix §. 2. 
 (?.] He, she, or it in the 3. d person singular, in all the Te»ses* 
 
J* . 
 
 P. y[x<p-6/uiv-c/,ut we write we are writing 
 
 y$<i$-iTi ye write ye are writing* 
 
 ye*<p-ovri,6vi-owi they write they are writing 
 
 Imperfect , more properly called by th© Greeks , 
 Continuative. (i) 
 
 VULG. 
 
 S. ey^a?-* Syfa<p a t wrote, or was writing 
 
 eyf&f-tc »7faf-ec thou wrotest, or wast writing 
 
 «yfa<p-t wy^«9-€ lie wrote, or was writing 
 
 P. iyj)a'<p»a^t^ iyfaf-apif we wrote or were writing 
 
 gy^'p-m iyfoL<p'iT6 ye wrote or were writing 
 
 ey^«f-a? nyfcL<p~guf they wrote or were writing, 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2) 
 
 S* iyf-x^.x. HyfQL^-at, I wrote, or have written 
 
 £y^NJ/.£f 8ypocsJ«-ec thou wrotest , or hast written 
 
 typoLy-t yiy^oi^-i he wrote , or has written 
 
 P. iyffy-ctfitf n'yf a^-xptv (3) we wrote, or have written. 
 
 ty^y-iTi myfo.^ erfe ye wrote or have written 
 
 'iyfCL^-M nyfoL^-ar they wrote or have written 
 
 (1) This Tense has always reference to continued action , or a re- 
 petition of action. 
 
 It is formed from the present , by adding the augment, and chang-» 
 ing &> into a in Barytona , and & into pQ<x* in perispomena. The 
 Vulgar say -ypa^ *ps> sre, avs in the plural and thus confound the se- 
 cond persons plural of this and of the present tense. The Value of the 
 Term continuative % as a definition of this Tense, will more clearly ap- 
 pear when we come to the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods. 
 
 (2) This Tense in correct writing has always reference to action 
 completed at once , and never tD continued or repeated action : by 
 using the same form I wrote for this and the preceding Tense, the 
 English Language confounds these two very distinct senses. 
 
 The English has the advantage over iheModer Greek in not confound- 
 ing I wrote with I have written; but this distinction of Time is by no 
 means of equal importance with the other , as every Englishman 
 learning a foreign language must have felt. 
 
 The Aorist is , like the Imperfect , formed from the Present , by 
 assuming an augment , and changing the characteristic : In perispomena 
 £> is changed into n ij y.; as ■jrar-o), sTrar-naa I Tip.a>, eritAYiaflc^ 
 
 (3) The vulgar use -ft>a<j/-a<j.s- sTe-ave in the plural. 
 
i? 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 uyoL ypxiu I had written 
 
 thou hadst written 
 he had written 
 
 tt'yoL.utf y?cl'lu (i) we had written 
 
 ye had written 
 they had written 
 
 Future tejcse first form. 
 
 £ 'X* 
 
 yfi^u 
 
 ux*c 
 
 y^a^ti 
 
 tl X t 
 
 yptx-^u- 
 
 it^Oi.UiV 
 
 yjptyii (i) 
 
 i/^STt 
 
 ypx-ftt 
 
 i{ X ay 
 
 yfdi^u 
 
 
 
 i. st Eng. form:. 
 
 2/ Eng. fo 
 
 Qt\~c* 
 
 
 I shall write 
 
 I will 
 
 Qih-tix; 
 
 
 thou wilt write 
 
 thou shalt 
 
 f&K-tl { 
 
 | ypd-^u 
 
 he will write 
 
 he shall 
 
 Qih-ejuiv | 
 
 [ orygx-fu 
 
 we shall write 
 
 we will 
 
 hik-iii 
 
 
 ye will write 
 
 ye shall 
 
 ft'iK-QM 
 
 
 they will write 
 
 they shall 
 
 p. 
 
 The first form of the English Translation is the true- 
 English Future , indicating simply futurity of action ; the 
 second form includes the idea of an exercise of volition on 
 the part of the speaker, and of compulsion towards the person 
 spoken to or of. This distinction renders the English singu- 
 larly correct in its expression of a simply future sense. « Je le 
 ferai, je te le promets,» means «I will, or I am determined 
 to do it , I promise you;» J'espere que je le ferai demam, 
 means « I hope I shall do it to morrow. » The same confusion 
 I helieve holds in all the languages in Europe, ours ( as spoken 
 by all classes in south Britain ) excepted; and therefore I arn 
 obliged to give both forms here ; though not as our Gram- 
 marians have 1 think, always, hitherto, done, to the great 
 
 (i) The more correct or approved form alone is given in tlic coir- 
 pound tenses. Th§ Vulgar use s?/aus , s^avs , instead of e'^ajfcsv '? eTx,«v. 
 
4 
 
 confusion of foreigners, and, indeed, of the Natives of Ireland 
 and Scotland : as if it. were indifferent which were used to 
 express simple futurity , siuill or will, For the grounds of 
 the distinctive characters of shall and will^see appendix §. &* 
 
 p. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE SECOND FORM. 
 
 
 I. st 
 
 a^ 
 
 Of At* yf>a y<u or <p« 
 
 I shall $* 
 
 I will %c. 
 
 Oe'Ag/ - N^ttf - <ptf£ 
 
 thou wilt 8§c. 
 
 Thou shalt ^o 
 
 &'*.« - >|>« - <p^ 
 
 he will c^-c. 
 
 he shall <%-c. 
 
 OsAg/ - *\>VfJ.iV - (pUp IV 
 
 We shall §•£. 
 
 we will 8$c. 
 
 Qiku - \Ltre " <p£3"fc 
 
 ye will <^c. 
 
 ye shall 8cd, 
 
 OeAc/ i -^ovv - cpov 1 ? 
 
 they will &c. 
 
 they shall &•&. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE THIRD FORM, 
 
 as ahore 
 
 5s r« 
 
 or 
 
 u 
 
 7f* 
 
 ^61 
 
 Of fco 
 
 Ge r« 
 
 - 
 
 u 
 
 - 
 
 r^^C 
 
 (pr,C 
 
 06 F(X 
 
 £ 
 
 8a 
 
 - 
 
 \pW 
 
 X (p?7 
 
 Qe vd 
 
 - 
 
 0a 
 
 • - 
 
 \f/W^£K 
 
 - <pupw 
 
 hi VOL 
 
 - 
 
 0« 
 
 - 
 
 \^£T6 
 
 <piT£ 
 
 ^1 VOL 
 
 - 
 
 9«' 
 
 - 
 
 \^<jy/ 
 
 * <pcuy 
 
 imperative mood (i) 
 present or continuative tense. (aq 
 
 & 
 
 yfape 
 
 write thou 
 
 
 ct-Q y%&$y\ 
 
 let him write 
 
 R 
 
 <x.Q yfOL^afjai 
 
 let us write 
 
 
 yfayiTi 
 
 write ye 
 
 
 a$ ypzipouv 
 
 let them write 
 
 (i) the Name and Nature of the Mood implies futurity, 
 (a.) This Tense is formed from the present of the indicative, by 
 •hanging the final o into % in Barytona. The w/ in perispomena of fch« 
 
49 
 
 AORIST OH INDEFINITE*, (i) 
 
 % Ypa-vj/g or-iov Write tbou 
 
 «; yp«^ ^et him write 
 
 Po tr% ypa^-(d{£e9 let us write 
 
 Ypa-^sTS write ye 
 
 Ǥ Ypa i |ouv let them write 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2) 
 
 So va ypao-6> that I write ; may , or should write 
 
 va ypao-r^ thou write, mayst or shouldst write 
 
 va Ycao-vi he write, may, or should write 
 
 P. va yfteo-catstt we write, may, or should write 
 
 va vQa(p-£T£ ye write, may, or should write 
 
 va ypac°6uv they write, may, or should write 
 
 Erst class becomes gT, and in those of the second «. The reasons for 
 this shall be given in their proper places. 
 
 This Tense, when used by correct speakers or writers, always im- 
 plies continued or repeated action. Indeed the Vulgar generally make 
 the distinction: fjofye means write on, or write frequently; as, ^oaepe pou 
 •saxt; fyJQt, ava^xviv tb; €&r,8sias picu, write to me, whenever you have need 
 of my assistance; ^pa^s/A^Xtxoi J4a8'e %s'pav, write English everyday. 
 It would be as great a grammatical error to use the Aorist in the 
 above cases, as this tense, whenever an action to be at once performed 
 is contemplated. 
 
 Both Tenses, as well as the corresponding tenses of the subjunctive, 
 notwithstanding their Names, have necessarily a reference to futurity: 
 the first of each always implying action to be continued , or repeated ; 
 the Aorist, in correct writing or speaking, never. 
 
 (1) This Tense is formed from the Aorist of the indicative, by the 
 suppression of the augment , and the change of the Termination « into 
 e or cv 
 
 (2) Formed from the present of the indicative, by changing si of the 
 final syllable into « with an 1 underwritten, and cp.sv? into couav ? as well in 
 barytona as in perispoinena. 
 
 This Tense implies action to be continued or repeated. 
 
 The Vulgar use ■vscfocau.e and -vcaacuve in the i.st and 3:d persons plural 
 
 ' ' "' 4 
 
5, v3c ypa'j'-w that I write, may, or should write 
 
 thou 8$ 6. ._, as above. 
 
 :>£> 
 
 4 
 
 v3c 
 
 ypa'j'-w 
 
 V3£ 
 
 yp^V^^ 
 
 VflS 
 
 Ypa^L-Ti 
 
 V(X 
 
 ypa^-ct)rx£T 
 
 voc 
 
 ypa^-£TS 
 y_pa<J»-ouv 
 
 I. st E. F. 1. A E. F. 
 
 fj.-rflsVa' fp-^t or (pat I should I should \ ^ 
 
 ffiek-zq -fad-tytii- OT Mt thou wouldsfe thou shouldstf % *' 
 
 •/(OeV-s ypa-tpet iw cpei he would he should' ^ g 
 
 P. ^6£X-a(xsv ypa-i|>et or ©a we should we should 
 
 •/IOsX-sts- ypcc-^ct, o/ ! &£t ye would ye should 
 
 rJOfiVav' ypa-^ei or (pet they would they should 
 
 The second English form is used to express the hypo* 
 thesis, the first the consequence , whenever that consequence 
 is necessary, and independent of volition or compulsion-. 
 as in form, so in sense, it is analogous with the first form 
 of the future. When the exercise of volition on the part of 
 the speaker, or of compulsion towards the person spoken 
 to or of is to be signified , a third form analogous with 
 the second form of the future is to he used : I would, thou 
 shouldst, he should , we would, ye should , they should* 
 
 (i) Formed from the Aorlst Indicative , by suppressing the augment, 
 and changing the Terminations into those of the above tense. 
 
 It is evident , at the first glance , that these Terminations are the same 
 in sound as those of the present indicative, and differ only in orthogra^. 
 phy. This has led some Grammarians to imagine that there is,proper!y 
 speaking, no subjuncf n e Mood in the Modern Greek. 
 
 This position might he tenable , if there were only the present tense 
 subjunctive. But where, in the indicative, are we to find theAorist, 
 unless in the compound Tenses , which borrow it from the subjunctive? 
 Tim tense is never to be used where action to be continued., or repeated 
 Is implied. 
 
it 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM. 
 
 I. st E. F. 
 
 §-. $$&* YP<H W or ?» I shoiild I should j £ 
 
 gQ £ ^g ypa-i^ — 971; tliouwouldst thoushouldstl j* 
 
 Y)6e>.2 ypa-^vi ~<pvi he would he should U 
 
 Pv TiQeXs Ypa-^w^^^H-^ we should we should 
 
 ^8e>.s yp«-^T£ — costs ye would ye should 
 
 yJQsXs ypa-^ouv — <pow they would they should ) & 
 
 Participle uncieclined y$d<pbvtoLt (1) writing. 
 
 What has been said of the proper rendering of the Greek 
 Tenses into English in the Active voice applies of course 
 equallv to the Passive voice. It has been thought more ad- 
 vantageous to subjoin the preceding notes to the particular 
 Tenses , than to reserve the subject altogether for an Ap- 
 pendix. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. (?) 
 
 S. ypao-oaai I am written 
 
 vpacD-ecafc thou art written 
 
 ypacp-sToa he is written 
 
 P, Y'p&<p-o£s6a (3) we are written 
 
 Yfao-scOs ye are written 
 
 Ypa<p-ovTfct they are written. 
 
 (1) From the present of the Indicative, by changing the Termination 
 to in barytona, into crra; 5 and to, in perhpbmena^ into suvra? and S>VTa?* 
 
 (2) From the present indicative active, by changing to into cuat in bury- 
 tona, and, in perispomena in & from £&, into ouw.at, or eioupatj in 3> from 
 «o> into S)f;.a'.. 
 
 (3) Vulgarly ^acp-cup.a^e, o?" ou^g^s., *ypa<p-sce, -yp!»!p-euvTa:« 
 
5-2- 
 
 IMPERFECT OR CONTINUATIVE. (l) 
 
 5. eypa^p-opiv or (2) eypacp-ou^ouv (s) I was written 
 
 sypacp-oucttv or eypa(p-oo<rouv (e) thou Wast written 
 
 sygsfljp-eT^' or eypa<p-ouvTav (e) he was written 
 
 P. eypacp-ojAeOa' or eypa<p-ou(/.acT£ o/" ^s we were written 
 
 iypafp-g^Ge or sypacp-ouaacTe or s<r£ ye were written 
 
 gypacp-ovTO o/* sypa^p-ouvTistv («■) they were written 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 (3) 
 
 S. £ypacp-9v]V - Gvjfca (4) 
 sypo^p-0vi; - Oy]Z££ 
 sypa^-071 - OyiJce 
 
 P. eypa<jp-67)|/.ev * Ovfzajxsv 
 sypa^p-8y)Te - Ovficsirs 
 eypa^-Ovjcav - 0*^>cav 
 
 I was, or have Been written 
 thou wast, or hast been written 
 he was, or has been written 
 we were, or have been written 
 ye were, or have been written 
 they were, or have been written 
 
 (1) Tlie Imperfect is formed from the present of the indicative, by 
 prefixing the augment, and changing, in barytdna,the termination ojao*' 
 
 anto 
 
 /JfcVlV y OUjAOUV, OUfAOUVS. 
 
 Perispomena from aca , change u{c»r into wjayjv. The vulgar terminations 
 
 OUJi-OUV, GUJ/.OUVS 
 
 are common to both classes. 
 
 (2) The vulgar use r) as the augment 7i-ypa»-cop>ouv etc. ; and in the first 
 and second persons plural use ouj/.e<re and ougs^s .' they sometimes omit 
 the augment: They also add an s to the i.st a.d and 3.d persons sin- 
 gular, and to the 3.cT person plural ; and then necessarily advance the 
 accent a syllable ;as vfypacpoupxuvs etc. ; s^pa^cucas-e-- is by a common syn- 
 cope contracted into I'yp&feo^r. 
 
 (3) The Aorist passive is formed from the aorist active, by changing 
 the characteristic , and the termination a into yjv OF nxfc 5. as 'e%a&a , 
 6-Ypacp8-viv-ifl>ca;.£7raT>Tffa , eTrarrjOyiv ; STtfiviaa , eTt^Oriv. 
 
 (4) The vulgar use Tfypafy-Twc* vr(?a.y-mxsq etc. , that is substitute ? 
 for'6 , in the second form , and sometimes omit the augment} as •$&$* 
 m^-a- e£-e- ^poMpim-a^s-sTe-ave^ 
 
PRETERPLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 VULGARLY 
 
 S* st/a ypa<p-Gvj or vn I had been written 
 
 el/g; ypa<p-Grj or zri thou hadst been written 
 
 dyi ypa<p-Qv) or t^ he had been written 
 
 P. £!,'/a;jLcV ypa<p-G-/i or tti we had been written 
 
 st/STa ypao-Gvi' or tv} ye had been written 
 
 gl^ov ypa<p-G-?; or Tvi they had been written 
 
 FUTURE TENSE I st FORM, OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 I, st ENG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FORM. 
 
 S. 6eXd> ypa<p07j I shall be I will be 
 
 GeXsts ypa^Ovj thou wilt be thou shall be 
 
 BeXa ypoc^pOvi he will be he shall be 
 
 P. OeXo(JE.£v ypao&vj we shall be we will be 
 
 DsXsts ypaoOyj ye will be ye shall be 
 
 or A° U<7t 1 ypa<p8$j they will be they shall be 
 
 FUTURE TENSE 2. FORM OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 r* O 
 
 « S 
 
 6a £t 
 
 ypacp-GS 
 
 or 
 
 ypflqp-co[/.ai 
 
 OeXci 
 
 ypacp-Oyj; 
 
 or 
 
 -ypa©-£<jai 
 
 (MXsk 
 
 ypa<p-6*o 
 
 or 
 
 ypa<p-£Tat 
 
 BlXst 
 
 ypa©-Gco>/.£V 
 
 or 
 
 to.uuQa 
 
 eiXei 
 
 ypa<p-Gy]T§ 
 
 or 
 
 safe 
 
 •sXei 
 
 ypa<p-Gouv 
 
 or 
 
 cov-at 
 
 H 
 
 Cfl 
 
 EUTURE TENSE 3/ FORM, OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 S, 8s vie or 6a ypacp-G£ O/' ypaocojxai _, «• 
 
 Gs va or Ga ypacp-Gvis or ypacpscai 2 — -§ 
 
 Gs va or Ga ypacp-Gvj or ypa^psxat H s ~ 
 
 P. Gs va or Ga eft?, as in the 2, d form 
 
 (i) The Vulgar employ their usual forms , and say 6i v$cl<d-vu , 
 \pccp-f oyve, 8« •ypawo-jp.^c , •ypotyoVYTfc; : see the subjunctive. 
 
 }-/.. 
 
54 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT Oil CONTINUATIVE TENSE, (l) 
 
 S. " ypaep-ou be thou written 
 
 a; yp'fi&p-eTai let him be written 
 
 P. a; ypacp-co^eOa let us be written 
 
 yp«<p-£a9e be ye written 
 
 a§ ypa<p-covTat let them be written 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2) 
 VULG. 
 
 be thou written 
 <pT?) let him be written 
 
 cpTWfjiev let us be written 
 
 <pTvjT£ be ye written 
 
 cpTouvs let them be written 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (3) 
 
 S. va yp«-ofo)'p.fici that I. be , may, or should be written 
 vgc ypa-^SG^t thou be, mayst, or shouldst be written 
 
 va yp.a^£Tat he be , may, or should be written 
 
 P. va ypa-owjxsOa we be , may, or should be written 
 
 va ypa-<p£<7.Qe ye be , may, or should be written 
 
 va Ypa-<pcovTai they be , may, or should be written 
 
 Ihe Vulgar say ypa-©o£{*-a<jT6 0/ 1 £GT£ and ypatpouvtai. 
 
 s. 
 
 ypa^ou 
 
 
 aq ypacpOvi 
 
 p. 
 
 a; ypaoOtop-cV 
 
 
 ypa(pO'?i'T£ 
 
 
 ag ypaoOofiv 
 
 cu.-/t 
 
 (ij Th-3 Tense is formed from the present indicative by changing 1 
 into ou. The 2.d person plural is, in the active as well is passive 
 Voice, in Barytona and Perispomena, the same as in the present In- 
 dicative. It takes the terminations of the subjunctive mood In the i.st. 
 and 3.d persons plural. 
 
 (2) The same as the aorist Subjunctive Passive , except in the second 
 person singular , which has the characteristic of the aorist Imperative^ 
 active , with the termination ou. 
 
 (3) In Barytona from the present of the Indicative , by changing 0/ 
 into co , as in the active: thus <yoa'f-ou.*i : va ^fa\/.%b Perispomena change 
 
AORIST Or INDEFINITE, 
 VULG. 
 
 $, vsc yp«<p-G<S o/' tw that I be, may, or should bo eh 
 va ypy-o-Or;; or t^ thou be etc, 
 
 ya ypwp-Gvi or tyi' he be etc. 
 
 P. vavpao; ft l or touixs we be etc. 
 
 I OOUW.5V 
 
 va ypa<p-t)*?rre or wrs ye 
 
 be etc. 
 
 va ypacp-0opv or touvs they be etc. 
 
 From the aorist of the Indicative, by suppressing the 
 augment , -and changing the termination w into a circumr 
 flexed. The termination is varied , as in the aorist active , 
 and is throughout circumflexed on the vowel or diphthong 
 immediately succeeding the characteristic. 
 
 L st ENG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FOHM> 
 
 S, ®£kz ypa ? -e^ or tvJ I should be I should be (i) J 
 f$£Ae£ ypa<p-9*?j or ttj thou wouldst be thou shouldstbe'| 
 this ypacp-Gvj or ttj he would be he should be £ 
 
 P. y$£Ao[/.£v yppup-Gyj or ttj we should be we should be J' 
 tiOsasts ypaip-Ovi or t/j ye would be ye should be v 
 •/j&£Aav ypa^-Oy] or tv) they would be they should be £ 
 
 £-4 
 
 o 
 
 also sT into •/• ; as.Tra-eToai , va Trarrisat , and ou into w ; as <*a-rcu[*at , wa- 
 TGuo.sOa; subj: V a irarupAi, va -7raTwu,s6« 5 but the change of ou into S> is 
 littie attended to, and is deemed affected. 
 
 (1) There is a third English form for this Tense, when determina- 
 tion, or the exercise of Volition, on the part of the speaker , ( i.st 
 Person ) or of compulsion towards those spoken to, or of ( 2.d, and 
 3. d Persons) is to be si-mfed. I would, thou shouldst , he should , we 
 would , ye should, they should. See Appendix §. 4, 
 
■ 
 
 S, fc vj9&s ypa<p-65 or ypa<p~co(4.ai $ 
 
 vjGe^S; YP a ,?"*^ ^ Ypa^p-etyat ^ 
 
 pA.£ ; ypacp-Gyi or ypa^-eTat rg^ g 
 
 I'c $6e^& ypacp-6S{x£v or ypa^-to[/.e6a ^ ~Q 
 
 vjfk^s ypa(p-6v; : Ts r r ypacp-effGe $ 
 
 •fc'OeXe ypa<p-(k>G'v o/' ypa^-wvTa& H 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. (l) 
 
 ypa^pdjx. - evo; -s &vt> - evov. being written,, 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. (2) 
 
 ypscf^ -... f/iyoc; - tyiyn - (iivov Written. 
 
 I have preferred ranging the Conditional , or Hypothetic 
 Tenses under the Subjunctive, instead of under the Indicative 
 Mood, where the Author has ranged them. 
 
 Since future and conditional, as well as past and present 
 Action, mny he repeated, or continued Action, whenever the 
 idea of Habit, continuation , or repetition is to be expressed % 
 the Modern Greek, with great advantage, employs the Tenses 
 of the different Moods in both Voices, which I have, pn that 
 account, called Continuative : as Mku yf4<pa *<*'? n/uifav 7 1 shall 
 write daily, and not Sthti yfatyfr ; tfOexe y$oiqtQ ffv%va , ccv ti'x& 
 Kotijot • I should write often, if I had time, and not S0c\« y^a^a* 
 The Modern Greeks have no difference of form for I shall 
 write, and I shall have written ; or for I should write , and 
 I should have written. 
 
 (1) From the present of the indicative passive, by changing ^ai in 
 barytona, and, in perispomena from so, into p.svcc, *ypc«fo-{/.at ,7pacp&-p.£vo?, 
 ftZTou-paA , xa-cu-p^vo?. Perispomena from ao> change the fi> into 06 ; as. 
 from Mtp&pai , ioijt-qyrxevo? ^ but those who pique themselves on their 
 correctness ( or rather Hellenism ) say jccip.-&>fA£vos. 
 
 (1) From the aorist of the Indicative , by suppressing the augment , 
 changing the characteristic, and substituting the termination e'vo;, parox- 
 ytonon, for yjv; as from e^acp6y;v, <ypap.(jL-£vc?. ; from eirarriGviv , waTYifWvcs \ 
 from ixptfLtOviv , xouwp-£vo£. These participles are both declined lik? 
 adjectives in ? ? vi , cv of the second Declension, 
 
5? 
 SECOND PART. 
 
 Yiew of the Conjugation of Verbs called Perispomena 
 Contracted from Hellenic Verbs in ia. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 
 I. St E. F. 
 
 a.* e. f. 
 
 S. rcar-co 
 
 (?) 
 
 I trample (a) 
 
 I am trampling 
 
 tig 
 
 
 thou tramplest 
 
 thou art trampling 
 
 $ 
 
 
 he tramples 
 
 he is trampling 
 
 OUpL£V (3) 
 
 we trample 
 
 we are trampling 
 
 Eire 
 
 
 ye trample 
 
 ye are trampling 
 
 o'jy 
 
 (3) 
 
 they trample 
 
 they are tramplingy 
 
 a' 
 
 IMPERFECT OR CONTINtTATIVE TENSE. 
 
 iiraT-ouc« (4) I trampled or was 
 
 s'jTaT-oijGs; thou trampledst or wast 
 £?u«t.-ougs or ipdfoeiB he trampled or was 
 
 £:waT-o'j<7a»j!.£v (5) we trampled or were 
 
 £nraT-oii(j£TS ye trampled or were 
 
 siraT-doOcay (d) they trampled or were 
 
 (i) Contracted from waT-eWsic-eet-s^pv-eVrs.-souvJ 
 
 (2) I use this -word to avoid introducing a circumlocution , such as 
 tread under foot, since it is sometimes used in an active sense, without 
 a preposition. 
 
 (31 The Vulgar use oufu-ouve. 
 
 (4) Contracted from iwaT-^isu(ra-EOUffS5-EOU(re-sou<r*(A£v-20UffST6-*e6UffavJ 
 
 (5) The Vulgar omit the augment , and use afteatpe, weave in the l.st 
 md 3.d persons plural. 
 

 58 
 
 AORIST ©R INDEFINITE. 
 
 I trampled or have 
 
 thou traihpledst or hast 
 
 he trampled or has 
 
 we trampled or have 
 
 ye trampled or have 1 & 
 
 they trampled or have J 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 ^v a sIve; ely £ ircflfpffrtt I had, thou hadst, he had trampled, etc. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE I. st FORM. 
 
 i . st I shall, thou wilt trample, etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 S. e^ar/ic-a 
 
 
 e? 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 P. eTuaTvfc-apv 
 
 (0 
 
 £T£ 
 
 
 ■^aTv-^av 
 
 (l) 
 
 !i . st I shall, thou wilt trample, 
 a.a I will, thou shalt trample, 
 
 2. FORM. 
 
 r i. st T shall etc. 
 
 Hlv. iraT-r'cfw or S, t{<j7jc or-?j;, ?{c« or vi < , " T „ 
 
 ■• ' ' J 2. I will etc. 
 
 3. d FORM. 
 
 **'-»■■■< / - / ~ / - f i- st * shall, etc, 
 
 1 ' ' • j2. 1 will ? ete. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2) 
 
 S. xairst and tc«t£is trample thou 
 
 slc, tcgctyi let him trample 
 
 P. 'kc, 77aTou(jL£v let us trample 
 
 TraT£iT£ trample ye 
 
 a; rcaTouv let them trample 
 
 (1) Tlic Vulgar omit the augment here also , and use r'saas wave. 
 
 (2) From the present imperative regular of 7raTe'w, -ndttz TrotTs'sTS, by 
 contraction of the two £ into the diphthong et , ^atst, , Wareire; as etya 
 from lex* : see chapter 21 - 5 , rea-rets is for warse by the insertion of 
 the iota, Ionice, between the two e. 
 
p. 
 
 $9 
 
 A0RIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 icrefaacs trample thou fye. as aboye 
 
 7TaT*/)G£T£ 
 «£ TTaT'/fcouV 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 S. va 
 
 P. 
 
 
 •TITS 
 
 ouv 
 
 that I trample, may, or should 
 thou trample, mayst, or shouldst 
 he trample, may, or should 
 we trample, may, or should 
 ye trample, may, or should 
 they trample, may, or should 
 
 S. VOI 7wOT"/{ff-Ct> 
 
 7) 
 
 P. 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 £7£ 
 OUV 
 
 English as above , but not 
 in a continuative sense. 
 
 CONDITIONAL TENSE I s * COMPOSITION, 
 
 P. 
 
 ENG. FORM. 
 
 I should 
 thou wouldst 
 he would 
 we should 
 ye would 
 they would 
 
 a. d ENG. FORM. 
 I should 
 thou shouldst 
 he should 
 we should 
 ye should 
 thev should 
 
 
 
3. a English Form when volition, is the i. st Person, or 
 compulsion, iC the i. and 3. d Persons, is to be signified; I 
 would, thou shouldst, he should , we would , ye should, 
 they should, For the correct use of the 3 forms , see ap« 
 pendix § 2. 
 
 & 
 
 P, 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 TENSE 2. COMPOSITION. 
 
 vjOe^s 7raT-7)G-(0i 
 
 or 
 
 & Efiglish as above 
 
 7raT-7)GYlS 
 
 or 
 
 r 
 
 Kcn-ycn 
 
 or 
 
 77 aT-yfccop.sv 
 
 or 
 
 OU[/.£V 
 
 TuaT-vfffSTe 
 
 or 
 
 7jT£ 
 
 7raT-vf<jquv 
 
 or 
 
 OUV 
 
 Participle undeclined ■srareuj'Tac trampling, 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD* 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 re act ou[/.ai 
 
 £tOU{JLat 
 
 (x) 
 
 I am 
 
 
 
 stcat 
 
 £1£<7C« 
 
 
 thou art 
 
 
 
 arm 
 
 £t£T«& 
 
 
 he is 
 
 3 
 
 p< 
 
 OU(JL£60C 
 
 aou^-a^fi ore^s 
 
 we are 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c$ 
 
 
 eia6s 
 
 eteVs 
 
 
 ye are 
 
 U 
 
 *-> 
 
 
 GoVTai 
 
 stouvTat 
 
 
 they are 
 
 
 (1) Is formed from the present of the indicative active by changing 
 the final & into ou|/.ai aoujjt.at : see page 5i , note 2. The vulgar form 
 is frequently written with 75 instead of ei ? as noup.at ? and not etoup.at. 
 
tin 
 
 IMPERFECT ( COFTmUATIVE. ) 
 
 S» (i) eiraT-oupiv o'J(/.ouv or vs I wa s 
 
 ouffov ofoouv ve thou wast 
 
 *ito ouvrav ve (2) he was 
 
 P« o%sOa oua-a(7T£ 57s we were 
 
 sfcOs ou(j-a<7fa s^e ye were 
 
 ouvto quvt«v vs (2) they were 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 S. £T:aT7]6-Y)v or vi'.a I was^ or have heen 
 
 US %m£ trampled <^c. 
 
 Sometimes written without an augment 1 ivoLTr.hxo!. S^c> 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 ily-ot. j a; , £ , ap.sv etc. , izz-rM I had been trampled etc, 
 
 FUTURE I st FORM. 
 
 6&-W, £i£, a ete. , war/iOvi I shall, thou wilt be trampled etd 
 
 2. d FORM. 
 
 0el& narrfi-Co or ?:aT-wpt.ai English as above, 
 
 (1) The Vulgar often prefix yj as the augment , and often omit 
 the augment altogether, in all the persons, but the first person plural , 
 which, unaugmented, could not be distinguished from the i.st P. pL 
 present. They often insert et or yj throughout as etou^ouv, or r,ouucu», 
 siouffcuv, or TiOucouv etc. 
 
 (2) When the e is added to the 3.d persons singular andplnral, 
 the accejU must necessarily be acute fa™** 
 
6i 
 
 3/ forM. 
 0e va or 6a 7ccmiG-<o 0/ 1 irar-Spat English as above. 
 
 Sis riffat eft;* 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Present or Continuative. 
 
 8, %«ir6S (i) 5>e thou trampled 
 
 &s waT/iTai let him be trampled 
 
 P* Sc? 7raT(«{Ae0flt let Us be trampled 
 
 TCfltTewjGe iztxriBi^i he ye trampled 
 
 &S -rcaTwvTai waToiJvTat let them be trampled* 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE* 
 
 S* ttbenfcou 
 
 a; waTviG^ I The English as above, but not 
 
 P. h 7uaT"/iGo)(X£v } in a continuative sense. 
 
 7raT'/]0yjT£ 
 
 &£ TCflCTTlGoUV 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE. (a) 
 
 S.' va iraT-w[xat - ov[x.at sioty-at that I he trampled (3) 
 TCaT-?i<7'at stecai thou be trampled 
 
 war-yiTat fcsrfc* he be trampled 
 
 P. 7uaT-w^£0a-ou(jt.£Ga^ou(x-a<r£-£(7s we be trampled 
 TrotT-faGs 6 ^f s ye be trampled 
 
 TCaT-wvTat ouvfat ewuvrat they be trampled 
 
 (i) Contracted from war sou , imperative, formed regularly froris 
 ftr&teopatj as irocTsTaGat, contracted from ^ars'saSs* 
 
 (2) See Page 54 > Note 3. 
 
 (3) Or, that I may or should, thou mayst or shouldst ,lie may of 
 should , we may or should , ye may or should , they may or should be 
 trampled. 
 
63 
 
 A0RT3T OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 s. 
 
 va warn 
 
 B w-vj^J 
 
 p. 
 
 
 co;x£v or ouja 
 
 5rce 
 
 ouv or ouvs 
 
 English as above, but not ifr 
 the sense of continuation, 
 or repetition. 
 
 CONDITIONAL I. st FORM OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 I^ENG.FORM. 2. a ENG.F0RM. 3. d ENG. FORM* 
 
 f 1 . 
 
 S, rSiO< 
 
 P. ^OIX- 
 
 £ 
 0H/.S' 
 
 1 should I should I would 
 
 thou woitldst thou shouldst thou shouldst 
 She would he should he should 
 we should 
 
 5 we should 
 * ye would 
 
 ye Siiov 
 
 ild 
 
 we would 
 
 ye should 
 
 £Ae 
 
 they woula they should they should 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2. a FORM , OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 o 
 
 S< jOsX'fij Tr«T7)0-W- 
 
 or 
 
 TC'OL" 
 
 —5 [j, at ■ 
 
 5* 
 
 cr 
 
 
 TiCM 
 
 7i 
 
 or 
 
 
 ^Tat 
 
 fi>{A& 
 
 or 
 
 
 w^eOa 
 
 7)7S 
 
 or 
 
 
 •?]cr9e 
 
 OUV 
 
 or 
 
 
 cov-rat 
 
 
 
 participles' 
 
 The 3 English forms 
 &s above , to be used 
 as the import of the 
 context may require, 
 according to the prin- 
 ciples laid down in the 
 appendix § 2 :see p. 5o* 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 |[s6T-oup.£VQS , QujAeV/] , ofysvov , Being trampled, 
 
 PAST. 
 
 pa?mevo£-$VYi-£vQV , 
 
 trampled, 
 
64 
 
 THIRD PART. 
 
 Second Class of Verbs, called Perispomena, contracted 
 from Verbs in mi 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 PRESENT TENSE; 
 
 j. st E. FORM. 2. a E. FORM. 
 
 & Ti(JL-& or aw (i) I honor * I am honoring 
 
 a? ocst; thou honorest thou art honoring 
 
 a aet he honors he is honoring 
 
 to Ttp.-oup.ev (2) we honor we are honoring 
 
 «ts ye honor ye are honoring 
 
 oOv (2) they honor they are honoring 
 
 IMPERFECT ( CONTINUATIVE. ) (3) 
 
 S; (4) £Ttpu<j-a I honored , or was honoring 
 
 eq thou honoredst, or wast honoring 
 
 I, sTtfAas (5) he honored , or was honoring 
 
 P, £Tip.ou<j-ap.£v v/e honored , or were honoring 
 
 £ts ye honored , or were honoring 
 
 sTipLouc-av they honored, or were honoring 
 
 (1) This fotm, not contracted, is in use in the Morea : some, particu- 
 larly the Inhabitants of the Ionian Islands, even Convert these Verbs 
 into Barytona, by inserting a £ between the a. and the Termination ; 
 from TYipaw for T /ipw , contracted from rnplu j I observe , or look at } 
 ( See page 67 , note 1 ) they form Tvjpafr), and, taking g for the 
 characteristic of the Aorist , they say d*%$|a-; 
 
 (2) The Vulgar say Dj« , oSvs , to avoid the v final, which they also 
 drop in the accusative singular of Nouns; 
 
 (3) This Tense is conjugated as the same Tense of irarS; 
 
 (4) The Vulgar omit the augment, aad say Ttp-oua-a? e; , e , Tiw-ou<jciue 
 6ua£T£ , ouoav or guukvs. 
 
 (5) Some insert a ^ in certain Verbs , between a and the Termination : 
 as BTpa-jfoO^s , he sung , instead of eTpoqou^ooe, 
 
6$ 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 XL , , 
 
 5. ITlfAW-Ct 
 
 I 
 J*. iTifiw-UfitV 
 
 Iff flip -*r 
 
 PLUPERFECT TEWSE. 
 
 S, eJx** ^ ^ ' iac ^ honored 
 
 k> J thou hadst honored 
 
 * \ 2 he had honored 
 
 P. il-Y-auLtv ( 3- we had honored 
 
 1 ye had honored 
 
 J they had honored 
 
 I honored 7 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 thou honoredst } 
 
 or 
 
 hast honored 
 
 he honored , 
 
 or 
 
 has honored 
 
 we honored ? 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 ye honored , 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 they honored, 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 
 FUTURE TEASES k St COMPOSITIOKV 
 
 I st ENG-. FORM. 2. a EK"G, FORM, 
 
 I shall \ I will 
 
 thou wilt J , thou shait 
 
 he will I | he shall 
 
 we shall / Q we will 
 
 ye will L ye shall 
 
 they will they shall 
 
 FUTURE TENSE: 2. d COMPOSITION. 
 
 I. St ENG-. FORM. 2* d EIS T G-. FO 
 
 Icmj ri^-mcj or £ I shall I will 
 
 wu or <x 
 
 wwy.iv or upiY Or o-J t ju.ir or Wfil 
 
 YKrtfi or are 
 
 viwovr O? rui 
 
6<$ 
 
 FtJTURE TENSE ; S.& COMPOSITION, 
 - % , r. , } ri/j, - wu» writ- view 8s C. En 
 
 m va. or ua I or ' - - ' - ' c r 
 
 ) Tip. "00 -a<; - ct c^C, 
 
 glish as above 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE (CONTINUATIYE. ) 
 
 S. rifAd (i) 
 
 at; rijua, 
 
 P. CLQ 7l ( U.to[AlV 
 
 T/ ( MfcT£ 
 a% 7!(AQV¥ 
 
 honor thou 
 let him honor 
 let us honor 
 honor ye 
 let them honor 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 s. 
 
 TlfAWi 
 
 
 a$ Tipvicni 
 
 p. 
 
 d( Tl/AMtofJLif 
 
 
 TtfAtlVlTl 
 
 The English as in th* present ,. 
 hut not in a continuative 
 
 CI? TljAWGVY 
 
 sense. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 S. vd Tip-a* (a) That I honor, may, or should honor 
 
 a? thou honor, mayst, or shouldst honor 
 
 a he honor, may, or should honor 
 
 ufAiv (3) we honor, may, or should honor 
 
 an ye honor, may, or should honor 
 
 out they honor, may, or should honor 
 
 VOL 
 
 \ 
 
 VOL 
 
 P. m 
 
 VOL 
 
 y 
 
 VCi 
 
 (l) Contracted from Ttfi.au, as xvpixi from rtpaci 
 (a) Contracted from Tip.a» r Ti[/.avi; , tijaac^ , ffte. 
 (3) Oup.ev; or ouys* 
 
CONDITIONAL I.St FORM. Of COMPOSITION. 
 
 6 7 
 
 I should 
 thou wonldst 
 he would 
 we should 
 ye would 
 they would 
 
 a. je. f. 
 
 should 
 
 shouldst 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 E. F. 
 
 3.< 
 
 would 
 
 shouldst 
 
 should 
 
 would 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2-d FORM, OR CGMPOSITION, 
 
 or 
 
 ne 
 
 COUiV 
 OfttY, 
 
 Ttfi-a , a.Q , a. , op.iy , art , ovr 
 
 Participle un declined rifiuvraz and rijueOrrag ? 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 honorin 
 
 ?< 
 
 P. 
 
 Koifj.-coy.xi , 
 ary.i 
 a rat 
 
 aa§i f 
 ovtroti 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 VULG. 
 •W,tt«i (i) 
 
 I. St FORM. 
 
 a, d FORM. 
 I sleep , or am sleeping 
 thou sleepest, or art sleeping- 
 he sleeps , or is sleeping 
 6uftotff7i 9 o'jfjLtrTi we sleep , or are sleeping 
 uwTi ye sleep, or are sleeping 
 they sleep \ or are sleeping 
 
 (i) The Author gives the form of the deponent Verb %otp.Sfjtat instead 
 of the passive of tifi.fi> ; not because tiuS has no passive; but because , in 
 the vernacular language, the active form of the second class of Perispo- 
 mena is preferred to that of the first j insomuch that almost all Perispo- 
 mena active are formed like rip.5. Thus it is usual to say aaoXou8-5>, «; , 
 d, etc. I follow etc. ; -rnpS, a? , a etc. I observe etc. instead of dxoXou6-w, 
 el;, sT; -rr.p-w, st; , el, which would be more correct. This preference holds 
 very generally ; but , as a sort of compensation , the form of the 
 first class , that of tjktb . is preferred for the conjugation of the 
 passive ; and it is much more usual to say rtp.oup.at , or 71p.s101ifx.flU 
 than xtp.wp.at , which would be more correct, or, rather, more analo- 
 gical. Thus the idiom of the Vernacular language strongly inclines 
 to the blending of the two. There are however some Verbs which 
 resist this tendency , and preserve, in part , the form of the second 
 
6& 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE ( C03TTI]N T tJATIvE. ) 
 
 VULG. 
 
 S. Ixciy.uyw zoijuovu-ovv or ovvt (f) 
 
 iKGl/A&7QY KOIIJLO'OG'OVV OT CVM 
 
 IKCiy.CLTO , iKClUOVyTClV KQlfiOVyT-&V OT aVl 
 
 Vt iK0iy.G>Utflclf ZZCt i UOV l U-a<?Ti OF i<JTi KOlfJLO'J U-0'.<TTI OT t(TTi 
 
 txoiucicrvi i-KOiyova -can Or WTfc kciugug -aeri or iCTt 
 
 ty.oiy.uYTO tKOiyouvTav y.ci'f/:cvyr-av or ayi 
 
 The English ( always in a sense of continuation , or 
 repetition ) is, I slept , or was sleeping, thou didst sleeps 
 cr wast sleeping, he slept, or was sleeping , we slept 7 
 or* were sleeping , ye slept, or were sleeping, they, slept ? 
 or were sleeping. 
 
 ACXRIST. 
 
 !?. (2) hioiyy^nv or Yi^mct I slept or have slept 
 
 lifag of vQukzg thou didst sleep of hast slept 
 
 «0y or /Ojjjft he slept or has slept 
 
 rftnuiv or v^mayiv we slept or have slept 
 
 ifon or ufejxsTfc ye slept or have slept 
 
 rfiwoLf or $ way they slept or have slept 
 
 elass,in the passive: *oiji&pai is of tlie number ', and has been therefor® 
 preferred as a type of this part of the conjugation, in its least corrupted 
 siate. 
 
 It has been observed that these Verbs preserve, in part only, fh© 
 form of the second class of Perispomena. The vulgar sacrifice the & , 
 and change it into o\> , as in those of the first , and have preserved 
 the a in the present Tense only of each Mood. 
 
 (1) The. Vulgar contract m\pt&aw;t lntc ' *oi£cu<r6; an( * sometimes 
 use the augment throughout. In the 3.d Person Singular and PFurah 
 if the s be added, the accent must be acute. 
 
 (a) The vulgar omit the augment, and say xcijjrifoteecj sj, e* 
 
fy 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 fix a > \ I had slept 
 
 tc I . thou hadst sleut 
 
 t \ *% he had slept 
 
 fiX'fiLpw I » we had slept 
 
 m I ye had slept 
 
 i?X?oir J they had slept 
 
 FUTURE TENSE I. st COMPOSITION. 
 
 &A-& ; £/J , £J , cytV 5 £7t , OVK KOl^H (i) I slltill sleep. 
 
 2,d COMPOSITION. 
 
 fl , J JL8lfJL1$-tt , 5~C , ?T , W«f7 , »?T€, CuV 
 
 I yLoiy.-uy.on ^ aaui , uraj > uutvx y acue f tivrai 
 
 3/ 
 
 COMPOSITION. 
 
 J x.oiy.-uy.oLi , aaou, oltoli, u/Atvx, aavt, uvTOLt. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 S. Koiyou (2) 
 
 
 sleep thou. 
 
 «f oltcli 
 
 
 let him sleep. 
 
 P. a'c w/xe0a 
 
 VULG. 
 
 Jet us sleep. 
 
 
 aa-Tfc 
 
 OWTCU 
 
 sleep ye 
 
 let them sleep. 
 
 (1) The two English Forms, as in the Future of tium , substituting 
 the word sleep for honor. 
 
 (?) Contracted from jtciuaou , as xotaaoSs from xoiuaeate. 
 
7o 
 
 AG R I ST. 
 
 English as above , but not 
 
 ac Kotfjwh in the sense of repetition ? 
 
 P. ag yLciun^oiuiv or ovpit or continuation. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. MOOD. 
 
 «C Kciy^kvv 
 
 P.r.ESEHT TENSE. ( COWTINUATIVE. ) 
 VULG. 
 
 S. ?* Hojp-Suxi or cv^ea that I sleep (A 
 
 «*«' thou sleep 
 
 ctrai he sleep 
 
 P. »//»0<3t or 9vju-a(rTi, 60-76 we sleep 
 
 «V0e or tts-re ye sleep 
 
 or eurT«i they sleep 
 
 mra.1 
 
 JURIST. 
 
 tfri$-& English as above , but not 
 
 v\$ in the sense of repetition % 
 
 y or continuation, 
 
 \ evv ovvt 
 
 CONDITIONAL TENSE I . sS COMPOSITION". 
 
 I.StE. FORM. 1. A E. F. 3.' 1 E. F. 
 
 S. vjhk^a \ I should I should I would 
 
 ec i thou wouldst thou shouldst thou sh. dst 
 
 e \ ^ he would he should he should 
 
 P. Yi&K-aLiJLiv ( |- we should we should we would 
 
 m 1 s ye would ye should ye should 
 
 ?0e*.*K / they would they should they should 
 
 r 
 
 (i) I may, or should sleep, thoumayst, or shouldst sleep, etc. : 
 sec the same tense of tIja&, 
 
2. COMPOSITION 
 
 $' tjtljit K0lfl-1$6i 
 
 or 
 
 OfXCLl | 
 
 v% 
 
 or 
 
 acai 
 
 rM . 
 
 or 
 
 ecTcti 
 
 P. vftuUlY 
 
 or 
 
 ujuifa 
 
 wttfTi 
 
 or 
 
 ajOe 
 
 jj8»yj' 
 
 or 
 
 &YTSU 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES 
 
 w 
 
 7 s 
 
 English as above. 
 
 Present xo/.w eu-uero? , m/uni ? nfjuvov sleeping. 
 Past KojjAYifA-me, m , ttor having slept. 
 
 VERB SUBSTANTIVE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 o. upon 
 
 
 
 tiaou 
 
 
 
 iTfCU 
 
 
 
 P. fvccOoc 
 
 UjJL-OUTTi y 
 
 err* 
 
 CfVft 
 
 UdTi 
 
 
 fe/ ra/ 
 
 I am 
 
 thou art. 
 he is 
 we are 
 ye are 
 they are 
 
 IMPERFECT. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 VULG. 
 
 S* Huyiv 
 
 
 WfJ.OVY 
 
 
 
 I was. 
 
 wo 
 
 
 wcvr or 
 
 r 
 WOV 
 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 r 
 
 
 T1T0V 
 
 V.TOLV, 
 
 VITCLVZ 
 
 he was. 
 
 P. ijulk 
 
 
 UfA-CLSTt , 
 
 tffTl 
 
 
 we were. 
 
 m l h } 
 
 W&rfl 
 
 Kflraore 
 
 
 
 ye were. 
 
 war 
 
 
 hr*v 
 
 hrsLV f 
 
 mcLn 
 
 they were. 
 
 (i) For the rulgar changes of * aai into euaat etc, see the present; 
 Tense subjunetrve. 
 
iiju.iv , 
 
 MM , 
 
 AGRISF. 
 
 P. 
 
 may. 
 
 I was , or have bee&. 
 th.ou wast , or hast been* 
 he was , or has been 
 we were , or have been 
 ye were , or have been 
 they were , or have been. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 VX-* > t, i, ccjusv , in j av gtoM , I had been, $££. 
 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 TENSE I.St COMPOSITION 
 
 
 
 I, St E. FORM. 
 
 2.dE. FORMo 
 
 SlK-O 
 
 v^ 
 
 I shall be. 
 
 I will be. 
 
 tic 
 
 
 thou wilt be. 
 
 thou shalt be. 
 
 it 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 he will be. 
 
 he shall be. 
 
 e t utv 
 
 / o 
 
 we shall be. 
 
 we will be. 
 
 ITZ 
 
 1 « 
 
 ye will be* 
 
 ye shall be, 
 
 cvy. 
 
 J *** 
 
 they will be. 
 
 they shall be* 
 
 2.4 COMPOSITION 
 
 fahu vpoa y wai y wen , fyc. , or oraO- q , tic , J , fy.C. 
 
 3. d COMPOSITION. 
 6fc m , or 6a JJ<ua/, mat, hat , 8$C. , utcS-q , w C > f > §"^ v 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTJNUATIVE. ) 
 
 S. eo-0 be thou. 
 
 Sc hat let him be 
 
 P. iijuiQ-ot. let us be 
 
 «V v>vk or M7t be ye 
 
 «V hou let them be. 
 
 (i) The vulgar say g-afaix-a, s;> s, *fc. Without augment. 
 
p 
 
 
 ytfvov 
 
 ?. 
 
 ac 
 a? 
 
 yi/yy; y 
 yu'vujutv 
 yitnrt , 
 
 
 «v 
 
 yiirow , 
 
 s.> 
 
 p. 
 
 p. 
 
 a ^.a^ 
 
 « t'OCi 
 
 
 AORlbT, OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 English as above, but not iu 
 the sense of repetition, or 
 continuation, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 that I be, may, or should be 
 thou be, mavst, or shouldst be 
 he be, may , or should be 
 we be, may , or should he 
 moLdh ye be, may , or should be 
 
 they be, may , or should be 
 
 AORIST. ( INDEFINITE. ) 
 
 English as above , but not ia 
 a continuative sense. 
 
 s. m*- 
 
 >tfik- 
 
 V 
 
 UjU.lV 
 ITi 
 
 cvy 
 
 CONDITIONAL I.St FORM OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 I. St E. F. '2. E. F. 3.d E. F 
 
 I should should would 
 thou wouldst shouldst shouldst 
 
 he would should should 
 
 we should should would 
 
 ye would should should 
 
 j - ^ they would should should 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM OR COMPOSITION, 
 
 £ 
 
 ciy.iv 
 
 ITi 
 
 I 
 
 r n 1 yjuat , 
 
 vViktior , i 
 
 { (TTOLV-U 
 
 YldCLl , 
 
 net . n/jiVx. 
 
 w^t , 
 
 
 , OOUiV , >]li , OVt 
 
 Participle indeclinable a 
 
 GfTCU 
 
 bein: 
 
J 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 REMARKS OH THE VERBS. 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 OF THEIR ACCENT. 
 
 I. The accentuation of Verbs is easy. The Accent is always 
 retracted as much as the genius of the language will per-? 
 mit. For determining what and where it should be , at- 
 tention must be paid to the terminations; since there ar« 
 some , which will not admit of the retraction of the Ac- 
 cent to the Antepenult. They are those formed with the 
 vowels co and n , and the Diphthongs u and ov , ( except 
 when this last , ev , appears in the vulgar form of the i .st 
 and a.d persons of the Imperfect Indicative Passive , 
 iyfdfou/uLovr , iyfa<pov<rovy. ) These same terminations require 
 a substitution of the acute for the circumflex, Thus the 
 Penult of rfiyz is circumflexed ; of r^yo acuted. 
 
 i. The Aorist of the Subjunctive Passive is always cir- 
 cumflexed on the same syllable : vd y^a<p9a> , vd yfoifHuyiv , 
 yd y<f%f -3->jt£ ; vol GroL7*}§-.cd uytv , or ovy.iv, rjrt ; vol y.oiyn§-(2 , 
 oytv , or ovy.iv , yiti. 
 
 3. In Perispomena, or circumflexed Verbs , ( that is , 
 in their present and imperfect Tenses , which are the only 
 Tenses that undergo contraction , or have any thing dis- 
 tinctive from the Verbs called Barytona ) the accent is 
 always on the syllable resulting from the contraction , 
 
 t'&x.Tovyw , iwoLTOvcrcy , tzrarov yiQct ; tKOiyoynv , iKoiyart , 
 
 sKOiyaytSz, circumflex, or acute, according to the gene- 
 ral principles of accentuation. The second person singular 
 of the Present Tense Imperative Active, is an exception ; 
 because the accent does not fall upon the contracted syllable: 
 
 izrmtt , Grant; riyai , riyct. 
 
 The Aonsts *vtqltwol , tTi'ywa ; itarctr^uv , triynSviv , not 
 being circumflexed, though parts of circumflexed Verbs, are 
 acuted, and follow the Rules for Barytona , which throw 
 the accent as far back as possible. 
 
SECOND PART. 
 
 OF THE CHARACTERISTIC AND ITS CHANGES. 
 
 7 5 
 
 i. The Characteristic of the Imperfect is always the 
 same as that of the Present, as well in the Active as Pas- 
 sive \oice: yfdpco , yfxtpouca , Imperfect ey^apa , zypottpojuw* 
 But that of the Aorist is different. The Characteristic of 
 the Aorist Active regulates that of the Aorist, and Parti- 
 ciple Past Passive ; and therefore alone demands the Reader's 
 particular attention.. 
 
 i. The Aorist Active has , for the most part, but three 
 Characteristics tr , % , %L : ifa?t\ivru. , I reigned , epuA«£a , 
 I guarded , tyfa^ct , I wrote. Thus , except verbs having 
 one of the four liquids, \, p , v , f , as the Characteristic 
 of the present in ku , pa , yq , $><y , all verbs , forming 
 their Aorist regularly, have one of the above as its Charac- 
 tenstic. These three Characteristics of the Aorist Active 
 change in the Aorist Passive : thus , o- is changed into , 
 or <r9 (i), &0L<riKiv?x, I reigned; iGouriKtvQw , I was governed; 
 kCici(Tcc , I forced ; tfiict&vir , I was forced : £ into x^ > 
 itpv'xocZz, kfvhctxQyir , I was guarded ; and \|/ into sp9, typx^oc, 
 iyfd<pfar. Verbs, having 9 as the Characteristic of the Aorist 
 Passive , form the participle past in pivoc : ifixri\tvfay , 
 (Ix-iKivy.ivoq , governed ; those having <r9 combined in r^lwc, 
 iGns^w , fiats pivot , forced ; those having ^9 combined in 
 yy.iroQ , ifjhzxhY , yvKay pivot (2) and , lastly, those having 
 
 (1) Always into G G , in Verbs in £ w , TW , 6m , that is , having 
 dentals as the characteristics of their present Tense : aXtoOco , I spin ; 
 IkXtttra, I spun; |ylx«c8nvj I was spun; kXcogusvo; ? spun: And in some 
 few in > pure , which pratice must teach;' as dexofa , I hear; ^cuca, 
 I heard; 3x069611? , I was heard; axotxr^sva; heard: yj.zioi , I shut ; iVJ.staa, 
 I shut, or have shut; iyXi'.aHv , I was shut; xXet9p.svo§ ; shut: Also in 
 some Verbs in &> ; as, (3a9av£a, I torment; Slavic*, I tormented; 
 e€a(yavi«ye-/)v \ I was tormented; ^afcy,*.-., I think; e^aaOnv , I thought; 
 S-«/£«<Tuive; , thought. 
 
 (2) The Vulgar usually change this Termination of the Participle 
 
7 6 
 f9 comhined in ^#eyef , with two ,a ( u' fyfaf^W t yf^a^e^f ,. 
 
 written. 
 
 3. It thus appears, that when the Characteristic of the 
 Aorist Active is known, it is easy to form the Aorist Pas- 
 sive , and thence the Participle Past. Attention, therefore, 
 to the above Rules for the change of the Characteristic 
 and Termination , with a knowledge of the i.st Person 
 Present Indicative of a Verb, will enable the Reader readily 
 to form all the other Tenses. The essential point being a 
 knowledge of the Characteristic of the Aorist Active , and 
 that depending on the Characteristic and Termination of 
 the Present, all the Variations of the latter, and the con- 
 sequent Variations of the former shall be here brought 
 together, under one View. 
 
 4. Perispomena , conjugated regularly (1) have always 9 
 as the Characteristic of the Aorist; and change the short 
 vowel of the Penult (2) into the correlative long Vowel. 
 
 5. With respect to Barytona, they either end in w pure , 
 or co preceded by a consonant. Those in &> pure , like 
 Perispomena , have a as the Characteristic of the Aorist ; 
 thus: ficKTiKivu Aor : ificLdlkiwoL' ukovco vulowx. It is the same 
 with those ending in So , 0u , to , and the greater part of 
 those in fa. 
 
 Past, -yuivfis, into ppevo; , with two p, and say <puX«u.u.s'vo? , instead 
 of <pjXa.7u.sv0;, cppafA(j.£vo; , instead of copafy.evcs , from tppacrcrw , I stop, 
 or fence. This occurs also in Derivatives from Verbs ; and the lower 
 classes say T o nrpau.jjt.aj the thing, from Trpanrw , I make, or do. 
 
 (1) The Word regularly is used in contradistinction to a very 
 favorite change with the Vulgar , that of the a , the regular character- 
 istic of the Aorist of Perispomena, into £. Thus, they say fpu-rtaga , I 
 asked, instead of epcoTYiaa ., from epwr^-aco, a>, I ask. 
 
 (2) Perispomena , being contracted from Hellenic Verbs in e'w and 
 aw , the Vowels e and a are considered , with reference to the forma- 
 tion of their Derivative Tenses, as the Penult. This change of the 
 short vowel of the Penult into the correlative long , e or a into « , 
 is liable to many exceptions , which must be acquired by practice ; 
 thus: TjiAiropu j I am able; -rcapawaXw 5 I intreat, I invite , -reapa7roy,qu(jt,ai s 
 I complain , make in the Aorist x(*iro'pe<r(x , eitayxjMtXesa, swctpaTrovstav » 
 without any change in the Penult. 
 
6. But, the above excepted, all Barytona ending in a 
 impure , or preceded by a consonant , may be divided 
 into two classes. 
 
 I. Those which have one of the 3 Labials; & t, or <?, for 
 their Characteristic , either alone , or combined with 
 another consonant, and end in Qo , szrw , f» , tttj. They 
 take vL as the Characteristic of the Aorist : jcpu'&aor icfoorTw, 
 I hide; Act: ex^a , I Md; ■ tSjt« , I rejoice; in^xj I 
 rejoiced : y$cl<pa , I write ;• '(y^a , I wrote. 
 
 II. Those which have one of the 3 Gutturals y, x, or £ 
 tflotte, or combined with another consonant, and those in 
 ff<ra and tto) , and some in £«. These take ^ for the Cha- 
 racteristic of their Aorist : yvKxyu , (pvrAnju or <pv\cLTTcd , 
 I" guard ; Aor : eipJXsdfc*' g?askg> , I weave , Aor : '(srKt^a ; 
 
 I wove : rf&x a > I run . 5 ? T f4* ? I ran : / Oc^ > or P''X T6> 
 I throw ; Aor : ep^a , I threw : azs-^yj^y I thrust ; Aor 2 
 «WfoS«, X thrust or have thrust: ©■>£« , I congeal ; Aor: 
 tvttfcai I congealed: yplfa or <pf<x.<7&o , I stop, or fence \ 
 Aorll'fpafa , I have stopped , or fenced: 
 
 j. The only terminations that now remain to be noticed are 
 those of Verbs in aw , -jta^vei §• p. These verb?, as has been 
 already observed ^ preserve , in the Aorist , the Character- 
 istic of the Present. They change the e of the Penult into 
 tj; and those in «/?©, the Diphthong a/ into a: (TTi\Ku, I send, 
 Aor: 'ivT&ka 9 I sent :' rl^a , I distribute j Aor: tfiifi* y 
 I distributed : frha, I dwell ; Aor: 'iffcnai , I dwelt : Kfha , 
 I judge ; Aor: 'ik$a* , I judged: Jottcuw, I warm: Aor : 
 ijlirau, I warmed : czrtioQ , I sow; Aor: -twuf * , I sowed. 
 fn the Aorist Passive 8 is inserted between the Character- 
 istic and the Termination , and the Diphthong u is changed 
 into a. , whether that Diphthong be in the theme , the 
 present Tense, as in *&&$& , or be farmed by insertion 
 of the / m the Aorist Active ; as in <rrehha , wtukcc thus : 
 ff&iiqw , wnfafct , A. P. , z<raroifQw , I Was sown ; participle 
 past o-'sraLfft.sv&Sj sown : vr'iKKu, icmiKa. , A. P. , wtclkQw , I was 
 sent ; part: past, qtolkiAvcs sent. 
 
 Some Verbs in m 7 and particularly those in cwa, simply 
 
(TCi , 
 
 t 
 
 7 8 
 change the v into : iIigtmsl, I warmed; e?eoW(W, I warmed 
 
 myself, or was warmed ; part: past. 'C^ra^hoc , warmed / 
 
 ikftvfr, I judged; fafifav , I was judged ; part: past. *p(am, 
 
 judged. 
 
 8. Other Verbs in vu , which practice will teach , and all 
 those in onw, which are formed from Barytona in a pure \ 
 Ly the insertion of the f, change, in the Aorist, the v 
 into <r, as ; hlvvu, I dress; Aor: A. eVWa , I dressed * A. P^ 
 l^ttSff? , (i) I dressed myself; part: past. iSvptvoc , dressed : 
 livu, I bind ; A. A. e Wa , I bound; Aor: P. tl&nv } I was 
 bound ; part: past. Ii/uzyoq bound. 
 
 q. Verbs in ova change the short penultimate vowel into 
 its correlative long vowel : tv&qvq I print ; A. A. 'iruwa 
 I printed; A. P. itvwg>%w\ I was printed; part: past. Two/urns 
 printed. 
 
 to. Some Verbs in «/r&> change , in the Aorist Active 5 
 this Termination into a, and take the preceding consonant 
 as the Characteristic. Such are : ra-afWcw, I suffer; Aor: 
 eo-jtSa , I suffered: ^afe/W., I learn; Aor: t/caOa , I learnt: 
 KOLTaKa^cfJvQ , I understand; Aor: ejcaraxaCa, I understood: 
 KcLXwto > I receive by lot ; Aor : ex«x a » I received by lot : 
 *to%&?ro , I am , I happen to be , it is my lot ; Aor : ti^x* > 
 I was, I happened to be , it was my lot. These Verbs, which 
 are not numerous, but, from the nature of their meanings , 
 very much in use , are , most of them , in the table of ir- 
 regular verbs. 
 
 ii. Some Barytona in f vu , but more particularly Per- 
 ispomena in $m , contracted from fv&a , lose the v in their 
 Aorist Active: Itfvo , I beat A. A. 'ihifot , I beat, or have 
 beaten ; A. P. ilcifav , I was beaten ;. P. P. l^uivoQ , beaten : 
 Perispomena form their Aorist in ma , as if there were no 
 v in the Termination of the Present, and without changing 
 the Penult: %t$w, I vomit ; Aor : e^ow-a , I vomited: ov^-co , 
 I embroil ; A. A. iyvfxva, I embroiled; jttjW, (2) I pour out, 
 
 (1) The Modern Greek lias no Middle Voice. The passive is used 
 in a reflective sense. 
 t (2) See Note ung^ this Verb in tke list of Irregular Verbs. 
 
79 
 or give to drink, as Wine \ A. A. \A^s% , I poured ant : : 
 
 wipu , I pass ; A. A. lo^ao-a , I passed. The reason of this 
 irregularity is , that the v , which also passes to the 
 Imperfect, is an insertion, the primitive form being in ?«: 
 foLu , j>«, Ufa , e^fefw, ovf<y , *«f« - v^a. The Aorist Passive 
 of tiie Perispomena is sometimes formed with 0,and some- 
 times with <t0. 
 
 Some Barytons in \a are found written with a r between 
 x and &> : Thus, many say gtzmcd , Vcmxra , instead of gtsa-a.^ 
 
 tffTitKOL 
 
 i a. The second person singular of the Aorist of the 
 imperative Mood Passive always assumes the Characteristic 
 of the Aorist Active , if it exist , or , if there be no such 
 tense , such as analogy , if there were , would require ; at 
 least whenever a- , %L or % is the Characteristic: thus; tnu^nv 
 makes riuww , taking <r from irifAw* ; tyfdyfar, makes yf*\j*v, 
 taking -l from tyf^lx; and ETfajS/xOwj I retired makes tj>«&'- 
 %ov, retire thou, from WfaGfeetz kro^aV8nr , I thought makes 
 mxiwj , think thou; because, if this verb had an active , 
 the Aorist would be itto^jx. But, if the Characteristic he 
 any other than one of these three, <r , -l or % , which only 
 occurs in Verbs ending in k© , y.u , yu , ^ , it does not 
 pass, to the Aorist Passive. This Person of the Tense is 
 then formed , by changing the 8 of the Aorist of the 
 Indicative Passive into. «■; Thus a-j^.V^.a , / answer makes 
 aVtJtf /Bur , I answered; imperative, «.vrU$fow, answer thou, 
 by the change , of 5 inter: £«rT«/Wai , I warm myself; 
 Aor: iU-r-i-y, . imperative &?Tu<rov , (i) warm thyself. 
 
 i3. In the language of the Vulgar , Yerbs in iv», aoa , 
 take -X instead of a for the Characteristic of their Aorist 
 Active; Kwpua I shear \ A. A. Uc^u^x, Vulg. 'ptouft^x , 
 I shewed : Kerreo^, / approach; A. A. Uo»7«wx; Vulg. 
 
 -: - 7 ;s, which have not in the Aorist preserve, in the 
 
 , tlie characteristic of the indicative : i v t pv , I was rejoiced * 
 
 - ;;a::-j, x*:c5 , rejoice thou : ecpam, I have appeared 
 
 :5 : appear thou etc , see the list of Irregular Verbs. 
 
So * 
 iKmtvj/a, I approached. Deceived by tlie sound of the 8* 
 in these Terminations, where it is pronounced as p> , ( see 
 page i ) the common People form the Aorist according to 
 the analogy of Verbs in £«. They follow the same analogy 
 in the Aorist Passive and Participle Past: thus, from 
 tJtou'f fc\|/ot , they form, A. P. iv-ovfarmoi , I was shorn, and P.P„ 
 
 xov^iy.fiivoc , shorn, lilStead of €Kov$ivQyiv, Kovftv/utvot;. 
 
 But exoufeuflw , and 'utovfifQwoL differ only in their termina- 
 tions ; for , if the Vulgar , instead of the more approved, 
 Termination be taken , and it be written cxwrepSw, it will 
 differ from the regular form in orthography only , the 
 sound being precisely the same; since, in the Diphthong 
 tv i the v before aspirates is sounded like <p. See page a. 
 
 TfilRD PART. 
 
 5f. Some Present Tenses Indicative, such as Qh'a , t will; 
 h.iyu, I say; x\a/yw, I weep fyc. when conjugated, lose, by 
 syncope , a syllable. Thus, it is usual to say Gee, thou wilt 9 
 or art willing $ Qs,uiv, We will , or are willing ; S-m , ye 
 will , or are willing-, (fe> , they will fyc. instead of Urni » 
 
 QiKO/Jlilr , 0SA.fcT6, fchOVY '. hiQ , KtftlV ,■ A6T£ , KtV , thOU SOjeSt et€» 
 
 instead of "KtytiQ , KeyojutY , Kiyiri , hkyovv : >cxa?c , kKoufj.iv % 
 
 KKcclTi , xAcd?/, j/zo'k weepest etc. , instead (XiLKatyuc M kx«/- 
 
 ■yc.ut!' , KXcu'yiTi , KKaiycVV. 
 
 We see the Verb thus, losing its characteristic , its ter- 
 mination and the vowel or diphthong following its charac- 
 teristic' , retain only its final consonant , or , at most, its 
 final syllable. This syncope is not admissible , when the 
 termination consists of a single vowel, or diphthong not 
 followed^ as is the Case hi the i. st arid 3. d Persons singular: 
 0{\-&> , Uh'ii ; because , if so , nothing constituting Con- 
 jugation would remain. Ge is the sole exception; and is in 
 use only as an Auxiliary. 
 
 i. It is by a similar syncope that the imperative particle 
 «lq is formed from the Hellenic Imperative oip; , leave ? 
 from dfivu j I leave? 
 
8i 
 
 3. The lower classes employ these elisions in Nouns , as 
 in the following proverb , o xyov^o^at; tKtfixfctv roy oqiy.oyct , 
 instead of ° aycv-oopxyot; k/t fiuai rhv ufi/xocpoiycv. fi) The unripe 
 fruit eater has got the start of the ripe fruit eater. 
 
 4- As of general application, it may be well to observe, 
 that the lower classes have a dislike to v as the termination 
 of a Word. They , therefore , when the regular termination 
 requires this letter, elide it 9 and say 70 >arfka&fi the face, 
 and not 'Grfawurcv \ rhv {aovitx , roy ^afat , instead of /uovray , 
 tyxfzv , the regular accusative's. In the same manner ^ in 
 verbs , they drop the v in y^oyi, y^cx.^ot,ui, instead of saying 
 yt<x.$ouiy , ty^^cty.iv , or subjoin aii e to the regular final v , 
 "as in y?cl$cwi, y$£i^:m, instead of y^l^ow^ 'iy^&^oLv. They often 
 annex it to the article, which from the sound might lead a 
 person to imagine the following Yerb to be augmented , 
 when it is not : thus they say rov\ /2a?'st« ? I see him, instead of 
 Sir GtetTo; lit T9vl Uha t I will not have him, instead of^er rh &m>. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. (2) 
 
 AVafTa/Vw, I err ; Imp. 1 dy^raivx ; Aor: &pi$TWct , and 
 
 r.y.xjrov P. P. a paLp vifjLivoc, 
 
 AtouPxi'yu, I ascend Imp. 1 drotf£cuvct \ Aon £vi$w , and 
 kvuifiwta; Aor: Imp.e xyuffix , availZoiri ; Aor: Subj: yd aiou'£-a , 
 
 (1) If in a good sense, as sjte'p^a^ev would seem to indicate, equivalent, 
 perhaps , to Our « taking time by the forelock : a if in a bad sense, 
 to our « eating corn in the blade. » 
 
 (2) The Imperfect Tenses are all formed regularly, but are never- 
 theless given, as likely to aid beginners. The form of the Aorist Pas- 
 sive in r,v, used by Writers, is alone given: It is easy to substitute 
 vixa 5 wich is the Termination preferred by the lower classes > and , 
 indeed , in Conversation , by all Classes. The Reader, who may be 
 surprised at the different acceptations of some of the following Words, 
 should recollect what limitations , extensions , and Changes many 
 English Words have undergone since the age of Shakespeare ; such 
 ks prevent , obnoxious, nervous etc. 
 
 6 
 
82 
 
 $;, r tJ va oWip-topsv, va efvafpitfir, Or ttvaifSfrre , va avaijJofoi- 
 KorraScavw, 1 descend is conjugated in the same manner, 
 
 A'vaipw , I abolish , or destroy; Imp.* ovaipousaj Aon 
 avaipscra; Aor. Pass. dfoatps0 , nv; P.P. aWpmsvo?* 
 
 A'vacTatv6>, I raise, I re-establish ; Imp.* avacmva ; 
 Aor. avsVnn<ra; Aor. Pass. aVs<7T7]07iv ; P.P. ava<?T7iptiv9<;. 
 
 A'xatBatvu) , Vujg. irai9a£vw-, i die Imp. 1 arcatOawa; Aor. 
 ara'Oav*; P.P. a77o0a;/.p.evo; ; Vu%. ira&OapipEvo;, dead'. 
 
 A'peaco , I please; [flip.* and Aor: aps<ja Part. Past. 
 Kpeo^evogi This is the only Verb that has <j as the 
 Characteristic of the Present Tense. 
 
 AuHzviw, I increase; Imp.* au£ava : Aor: ai^ca , Aor. 
 Pass. au^Sriv-; P. P, au^jptivb^ 
 
 A<piv«, I leave; Imp,* aoiva; Aor. a<pvi<j« y - and aoY,xa; 
 Aor. Imp.* aqrtjjr'e, aosfceTs; Aor. Subj,-va a^viorto, or a^i/.w ; 
 Aor, Pass. cbsGnv ; P. P. a^pvo?. 
 
 Ba£w, 1 set , put, or place , Imp. 2 IfJa£a; Aor. epaXa; 
 Aor. Pass. IpoXWj P.P-PaWvo;. 
 
 Bapaou[j.at ', I am weary, I feel a listless disgust, 
 ( said of any thing irksome , ) je mennuie ; Ioip. r 
 PapsioupLouv. Aor. epap'g0r,v P. P. Papspt.pE.svo?. 
 
 J&s'irto, I see; Imp.* &£J>.£7ca; Aor. sl5a; Aor. Imp.* lSh r 
 i$lc , ttsVs; Aor. Subj. va • tS-fi ? -/j? , Sp, or , by apha3resis r 
 va rfe y va $r,$ , va §?).- 
 
 Bpsyw, I wet ; ( |3psysi, impersonally, it rains) ImpJ 
 e(3psya; Aor. e(3psja '■; Aor. Pass, sjSpayj/iv , lam wet. or have 
 been wetted, as with rain; Ppsypis'vos, Wet, as with rain. 
 
 Buvivo, I suck, as an infant at the Breast; Jmp.* gj3u* 
 Cava , Aor. e(3u£a£a. 
 
 repa^o I grow old; eys'pa^a; Aor. sys'paffa. The Aorist* 
 alone is much in use. 
 
 Hvopcat, I become; Imp.' ey'vopuv ; Aor. iysiva ', and 
 lyiva and syivviy.a; Imp, e Pres.* y(vou, yivscfrsj-Aor. yevoy and 
 yovsj- Aoj:. Subj, va yeivwor yevwj P.P. ysv/;pvo$ e 
 
83 
 iaiykavca, I bite; Imp. 1 iSdcfkKt'& 5 Aor. loayx.asa, P. F, 
 
 Aeta , I bind; Imp. 1 f£sv« ; Aor. s$Sda ; P.P. Sejjtsvo? ; 
 see ( hap. 27, Part 2. ]N r . 8, 
 
 AtSo> and Afoca , I give; Imp. 1 sSi£o§ and Ijwx ; Aor. 
 
 . .a and e^ftwa; Imp. e So< , Sots, or S©<xs , 6_o-:th; 
 Aor. Subj. va ow<jw and va Jwxw ; Aor. Pass. i&ofb&v; P. P. 
 
 E\8yaivu , I go out ; Imp,* spyttulft; Aor. sSyry:a ; Aor, 
 Tmp. e s,3ya, sSya?;, as if from a Perispomenon, djs-yau-yu. 
 Compare this Verb with avai^sc'vo). 
 
 E'Syaao , I lake away, or sand away; Imp.t EfiyaZfi -; 
 Aor, I'^yaAa ; Imp.e ePya'Xs 5 Aor. Pass, iSya/.jvrv 5 P. P. 
 r^- ;.;.y^vo:. Compare this with JJa^Wi 
 
 E'p.j3aivo>, or Vulgarly iy.ita.ivto , I enter; Imp.* ty.Sy.va, 
 EM.7rat.va ; Aor. s^Sr.xa; e^-r./.a; Aor, lmp. e k'/ia , t\LiOt , 
 ?,<L r yy-z , c{i.i?st6 ; Aor. Subj. va s^S-co , r,; , yi, or lait-S, '?;, 
 !gj etc. ; P. P. saSacp.s'voc, or sptacrptivos. 
 
 E'vo'jvfii 5 1 dre.ss ; Imp. 1 I'vSuva ; Aor. tfcjfu&a ; Aor. 
 Pass. fr&ufrqv ; P. P. evSuuivoe : see p3ge~8, N* 8. In like 
 manner, i/.^jvu, I undress, 
 
 EVrp£iroji.as , I am ashamed; Imp.* svtjj eirpupouv ; Aor, 
 svTpaTTr.v ; Aor, ltnp, e IvTpaicou ; Subj. va svrpaircS. 
 
 E'cyoaat , I come; Imp.* e^oupLouv * Aor. vfXOa , Yulg. 
 r:9a ; Aor. Imp.e sXa, ^ars; Subj, va saGco, Vulg. fpOca. 
 
 Euptaxcd , 1 find ; Imp. 1 eupscxa; Aor. vjupa , £&p« , suor./.a 
 and supjxocj Imp. e sup£ , iup£Te ; Subj. va eupto and va siipcoj 
 Aor. Pass. eupsQvi^ ; P. P. eupTjuivo^ and £upgu,£vas. 
 
 'Eyco 3 I have; Imp.* elya : Put. OsXw r/ci. 
 
 Zc# , £ti4, 5^ , Cwjisv, £*}Te , ^oOv , I live, ihou etc.; Imp. 
 fv:0ca; Aor. e&fiaa ; Imp. e %nat 3 £tjts , Subj. Pres. 1 va £fi, 
 5^5 , £rj ^c. ; Aor. va £*jtffc>. 
 
 'H;j.r:op(o, I can, or am able; Imp.* ^xopo&y« ; Aor. 
 - ; 7.TTopt<7aj without changing the Penult, 
 
H 
 
 H^cupw, 1 know ; Imp.t x'^cupx ; Aor. syj&et , from 
 p.a6aivt).' 
 
 Gelco, I will , or am willing; Imp.t vjOsXa; Aor. -/ibCkr^d. 
 
 0£Tco, I place, or set; I'm 'p. 1 ifeVa 5 Aor. Ufane ; Aor, 
 Pass. £T£6viv ; P. P. 0£pvo; o 
 
 KaGofwtt ,1 si I , abide , dwell; Imp. 1 cV-*:8oua'ouv ;' Aor. 
 txaOvjca; Imp. e Pies.* 'xa6ou; Aor. fedftqce'; P. P. xaQod(i.£vo£. 
 KaOi'Cco, T place , or seat, is regular ; Aorist acaOtrfa; P. P. 
 xa(kap-£vo;. 
 
 Ka&co r xaiyco, and Vul^. xauyw , I burn; Imp.* Ix'ata , 
 txatyoe, sxofoya;:' Aor. IxauG« , t r o1g. fxaajfa, See Page 79 , 
 K. «3. lmj). e xaifce , V. xa^e. Tlie Present and Imperfect 
 liave also a Neuter signification. When the Verb i^ 
 thus used' the Aorist is Passive excSfy V. exaT,xa ; Imp. 6 
 Pres.* P. xouoy; A. P. xaucou, xacpGvJTe; Subj. va xa&;P. P. 
 xix^pivo? , as if from xa^iw , iu analogy with the Aorist 
 Active &.&§&. 
 
 Kalw, I call ; Imp.t IxoXou sa ; Aor. l*a&Gtt;'Anr. P.'^s. 
 without changing the Penult ; exfl&saOviv; P. P. xatefffiivo';. 
 
 Kaavco and xavw, I do, or make; Imp.* f&epwa , and 
 sxava ; x^or. exa^a •;. Imp.e najjL'e; P. P. xa|/.<o(xsvos. 
 
 KaTatj3aiva> , I descend, like avat^Guvto. 
 
 Ka?a}.a(3aiv(i>, I comprehend; Imp.t exaraXapaiva; Aor. 
 IxesTd&aga , or xa-a^a^a , See ^a^avco. 
 
 Kfip^aLva) , or xsg^w,- f' gain;' Imp.t sxepSffiva, exep$i£a ; 
 r Aor. £xeo5'/ica > and ex£p$i£a; P. P. X£pSyj|AeVo$. 
 
 Kspvw , (1) I pour out to drink ; tmp.t IxepvoStfa j Aor, 
 ixeoaca ; Aor. Pass. IxepasOviv, P. P. xspatfpvo;. • 
 
 (1) Just as we say , mix a Glass of^Lemonade, Orgeat , Punch , etc. , 
 but pour out, and never mix a Cup of Tea, or Coffee , though v as 
 generally drunk, they are all mixtures. The primitive meaning of 
 the word was to mix. The Ancients usually mingled Water with Wine, 
 as we often do ; hence the progressive limitation ; and the Modern use 
 • i'apowi as- a -generic Ter,m for "Wi»* ft 
 
-RXata), and xXaiyo; I weep; Imp.* fitXaia and fi&aiya- 
 Aor. e/.Vauca and ei&aijja; See P. 79 . N". i 3 ; P. P. ySka^Avoq. 
 
 Kotttco, I cut; Imp.t gxoirTa; A. A. exo^a, Aor. Pass* 
 jlepiniv; Aor. Imp* Me , jcqtu^ts ; P. P. xo{/.|/ivo^ 
 
 Aap.8 avco., and Aa[3atvw , J receive; Imp.t £>.au.(3av<% 5 and 
 &« t Saiv« ; Aor. IXafyx; Imp. e lajk. 
 
 AavOavofAKji , I mistake, or am deceived; Imp. 1 s^vQavo- 
 [xvjy; A or, £"XavQas6v]v, Subj. va"Xav9aa0w; P. P, 7.av6a<jp,evos 
 sJffQe xoXXa ^avOaGj/ivo?* I^stc (xeyalo >,a0o; , you are very 
 ranch deceived , or mistaken. 
 
 Aa^atyw , £i; 5 €/c\ I receive by Jot ? or it is my lot, 
 thou receivest by lot , or it is thy lot etc. Imp. 1 i\%- 
 yjwa ; A or. sXa^a, See page 78, N. 10. 
 
 Aeya>, I say; Imp. 1 IXsya; Aor. elxa; Imp e £1775, or by 
 Aphaeresis , and the addition of a a' ra;, rare , iu(g to , 
 tell it; Subj. va eJsuS-, and vaxw, P. P. irregular %zywj.& 
 V05 , the aforesaid ? the Person in question. 
 
 Ma£ov&>, I collect, or gather together; Imp. 4 Ijjta^ovos, 
 Aor. £(i.a£fe>£a; P. P. f/.a^<o[/ivoc. The v of jxa£ovw is by in- 
 sertion, See page 78, N. 8. The 5 instead of <y as the 
 Characteristic of the Aorist is the only Irregularity^ 
 See pagjB 76, Note f. 
 
 MavOavca , and MaOaCvw , I learn, I accustom myself 
 to; Imp. 1 £[xav8ava, and £p.«6sava; Aor. ejxaOa , Imp. e p.aOe. 
 See page 78, N. io. The Participle Past alone is ir~ 
 regular , ^ctOvi^svof. 
 
 NoioGco , and voiovw , I perceive j Imp.* IvowOa and 
 fyoiova; Aor. IWwca. The v is inserted. 
 
 Seovw , I vomit ; Imp. 1 e?epvoGf<ra ; Aor. eEepaca , See 
 pa.se 7.8, N, f 1. 
 
 S«, £&yco, and £j<o , I scrape; Imp.t e^ouora; Aor. ?&>?«. 
 
 Ilaipvw , or rtepvco , I take, take away; Imp.t £'nrccipv« 
 Aor. iicrjipa ; lmp, e irape , reapers ; Aor. Pass. eTOcpO'iv j 
 jSubj. voe reapOfci; P. P„ xap(/ivo;. 
 
m 
 
 HaV/io, 'fcaQaivco , I endure , I suffer ; Imp.* f^W % 
 liz&bqffli , Aor. common to both , IWq^a,; 
 
 IIspvw , Bnwpvw, I pass , pass through , or across % 
 Imp.* ^wspvou^aj Aor. arapaca P, P, 7r£pa<7[/.syos, airspaq/ivo^ ^ 
 from ra-paco-pto, by insertion of the v. See page 78 , N. 11. 
 
 ribs , I fly , (N) I make fly ( Act: as we say of a bail ) 
 con traded from rrsTawi 5 Imp t |tc£to5?#$ Aor. S7t£ta£a , 
 ?:£T£ioij(Jiai, I run in haste, fly, Aor. ei^ayfyov ; P. P, 
 -sTaywivo^. Ail the irregularit'yeotWists in the substitution 
 of die characteristic £ for <f and its consequences. Sefc 
 Page 76 , Note i , 
 
 ITviyatvw , Tuayaivco , and Tuayto , I #0 ; Imp.* sV/fyoivse ^ 
 Ixayatva; A ircfiyft Pluperfect, siva 7nq,ya(v§i; PteS.* Jmp.% 
 7r/fyatvs, ^aye. There is a first Person Plural , without a'V 
 the particle; Trimev , let us go; instead of ^aytapv' Trayca 
 admits the syncope noticed Page 80, N. 1 , and it is 
 usual to say 7cayo> , 7?a; , xa , rcajxev , 7?a-£ , 7?av ; instead 
 of Tr^yco , TTceya; , Traygi , Trayo^cv , i^aye^e, Ttayoiiy | P. A, 
 TT^yaivQVTac. 
 
 JltvOj , I drink; Imp. 4 £%ygT; Aor. ema , fea ; 
 Imp. e Trie, ttl£T£ ; Sul>j. va tu& ; whence the Pluperfect , 
 el/cc 7rt.sr ; Aor. Pass. ercoGviy, and eiuoGviv ; P. P. wicopivo; s 
 drunk ( intoxicated. ) 
 
 17.^777(0, and^Tw, I fall; Imp. 1 ?-^7t« , eWs^pTa , Aor,, 
 IVreda ; P. P. 7T£(j{/.evQ$ , fallen. 
 
 II)v£w , I Sail , hup,* |7cXsa ; Aor. gir^euca. 
 
 Ilviyw I dr.own {actively ) Imp.* frcvtya ; Aor, |Wvt£a$ 
 the only irregularity is in the Aurist Passive , which 
 preserves the Characteristic of the Present e7uviyy,v; P.P, 
 TTvty^evo^ , or miy^Ayoz, See Page 75, Note 2. 
 
 IIpr*<Pio|i.ai j 1 swell ; In) p. 1 eTypw-otr/jV ; Aor. g^pyfcGviy , 
 P. P. xp'/icrj/ivo;. 
 
 2j3uw , cpuvw ? and <?8co , J extinguish , and I am 
 extinguished. ( transitively and intransitively ) Imp. 
 
5; 
 Ikgua, Eo-(k>va, Ia 4 6ouca. Aor, ecjSuca. There is nothing 
 irregular in this Verb, but the insertion of the a in 
 the P. P. c,S'j<ruivo£ , as in rWt/ivoc, 
 
 2r ) >'»ovo) , I raise; imn. 1 eY/pcova ; A. A. s<y$Ma<ra ; A. P. in 
 an intransitive, or reflective sense, eV/izoSOnv , I rase , 
 or have risen; P.P. S7ptfc>pivo;o The only irregularity of 
 this Verb, is in the iA Person of the Aorist Imp. e Pas- 
 sive, or rather reflective, gtt/.ou, rise thou. 
 
 Zraivw , and <r*4vco, I erect, fix up ; Imp.* s^-cava and 
 ,IV^va ; A. A. £<pi<Ja ; A. P. fe0$y ; Suhj. va st.Ow ; P. P. 
 c-^jlevo? , regularly from ^v*Ww« 
 
 2t£xw, and ?&xo{£a>', I stay , remain; Imp;* s^cV.ou^ouv; 
 Aor. e^a67iv. Imp. 1 <r£wc, £e#£T| , and ^acou, s-aOvjre ;■ Subj. 
 va ^aOw. 
 
 2tsIX<o, and <rslvw, I send; Imp. 1 IVeXXa, 2?&Xva; A. A. 
 f~zik% ; A. P. ig-aX^Tiv; P. P. ^aXpivog -.: See Page 77, N. 7. 
 
 2u[x(3aivsi, It happens; Aor. cuvs^ti ( to ay^p s^yixo; , the 
 Tseuter of the Ancient, Pe>f. Part. , an occurrence 9 
 accident , event , that which has happened , and its 
 plural, t% Gy(j$e(37)3coTqt, though occasionally used, have 
 no analogy with the language, as now spoken, and 
 must be considered as Hellenic relies. ) 
 
 Tpip}, I run; Imp. 1 'hpeyjz; Aor. erpsHa, fmp.e Pres. x 
 'Tpsyjj, rps^STS, Aor. Tp£<;£, Tp£^£ir£, and Tpey_a, Tpe^are. 
 
 Tpc6y<o. I e.U ; Imp. 1 Irpcaya; A. A. e*>aysc ; lmp. e <pay£ , 
 foyers ; Subj va <pay«; A. P. s^aywBvjv ; whence the P. P. 
 <payco|X£vo;. Tpwyw, in the Indicative, and va (payco, in the 
 Subjunctive, are often syncopated , like jcXaty w : See 
 ]>a«;e 80 , third part,N. r. 
 
 Tu^aCvw, I am, I find myself, I happen to be; Imp. 1 
 eTu/jnva ; Aor. fcuya, 
 
 X7:dcr^o[;.aL, I promise; Imp.* uizoayjiufiouv* Aoi\ uroc/s- 
 4h)v; lmp.e Pres. 1 utcocf^ou , bxtiayj^h ; Aor. urroT^scrou , 
 "o^oc^gG^Te ; P. P, fooweu-evof. 
 
S3 
 
 $a£ta(£oei r ', I appear; Imp,* - 3paivoj^-r r v or auv ; Aor. dcpav*;* 
 
 imp. e Pres,* <pouvou, cpawcaOs; Aor, ^pavou,. or rather^ (pavou.^ 
 <pavvjTe. 
 
 ^euyto, I depart, flee, go away; Imp.* ecpsjyoc ; Aor Q 
 
 e^uya, Imp.s Pres.* cpeuys; Aor. ^uye, (puyeirs, and <peuya ,_ 
 
 ^Qav&i, I arrive, has the v by insertion; Imp. 6<p9ava fc 
 Aor. e<p0a<ra; P. P. (pSast/ivo; , arrived, 
 
 Xaipo[Aot , I rejoice, am pleased, Imp/ syaipopi-v. , 
 t^atpo'jp.ouv 5 Aor. iyapyy- ; lmp. e ^apou , or rather, ^p ou ? 
 ^apTJTe ; Subj. vayap-co, yjs , $i; Part, ^apouaevo? 5 pleased , 
 satisfied. 
 
 XopTQciv<«) , I am satisfied, as with food , I have enough $ 
 Imp,* gppTatva; Aur. ^opTcara. Part. P. ^opTcccrp.evo?. 
 SYNTAX (i) 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 i. The Article (2) has nearly the same force as in French ; 
 It is sometimes prefixed to the Participle Past, b Sajuw WHyt 
 yd &tww$L\M } He who had- been beaten went to complain* 
 
 (1) The Reader will observe occasionally a difference between, the 
 accentuation of what follows, and that exhibited in the preceding 
 etymological part of the Grammar ■, particularly in adjectives of the 
 3.<* declension accented on the antepenult ( pro paroxytqna. ) To obviate 
 any perplexity that might result , it will be sufficient to observe t 
 that the learned among the Modern Greeks , and indeed all who 
 pique themselves on, knowing their Language , follow the Hellenie 
 principles of accentuation, as well in speaking as in writing. Their 
 example will, in this particular, be followed. The difference consists 
 chiefly in words declined like , dcv8pcMro« > ^o'cwTrcv , a-fptoc , see pa- 
 ges 17,19. In general, the Language, here attempted to be taught, 
 being the language as spoken , no notice is taken of a variety of 
 Hellenisms and Corrections, which the learned, with reason, wish tq 
 introduce, 
 
 (2) See Appendix 5- !» 
 
a. It is sometimes a relative, by ellipsis; Uv ( « a^Ve; jfafyfl ?*, 
 .; ^ xyz'&u twtZ ?/ak a«c ; His Daughter Joes not please me, 
 but I like your friend's. ( 'Daughter understood. ) 
 
 3. When the Article is joined to a Substantive , which 
 is itself accompanied by an adjective , the adjective must 
 invariably be placed between the article aod substantive * 
 l itoLKoc (plhot: , the good friend ; If the substantive precede, 
 the article must be repeated, thus; b <pi'hoc b xakbc The 
 latter phrase is more emphatic. In the more elevated style, 
 it is not unusual to interpose short, qualifying Phrases , 
 between the Article and Adjective ; as, b W tol wcwuxToi t* 
 Grifiynpoc tfptyftt, Homer renowned for his Poems, or, with 
 a repetition of the Article, thus; b d(w?oc, b W to, ttompcltcltx 
 vnfitpnpos. That , or the Homer renowned for his Poems,, 
 This turn , however, though elegant , as it is bold , ought 
 to be used sparingly , since it has very little analogy with 
 the Idiom of the Language , as now spoken ; at any rate i § 
 far from being generally received , even if generally intel- 
 ligible. 
 
 4- It sometimes defines a number, as forming a part of 
 another number , expressed^ or already known ; as , aVi 
 
 TOL TiGVCLjCl CLTTthlC/. , 07TM U^O. , (T^aV TO IVi y TOL luO , TOL TflZ , 
 
 of the four pears that I had, they have taken one, two , 
 three ; in like manner r« 'Iko^olv to ha -^ior tv Ifiyahxv to ha 
 {uolti ; they cut off one of Jiis ( tw r o ) hands, they pulled out 
 ©ne of his (two) eyes. 
 
 5. We may , by ellipsis of the Words licrzcrbrn^ tm&wfrai » 
 say , I *2.pv-pM , E f <ps<m , the Bishop of Smyrna , the 
 Archbishop of Ephesus. 
 
 6. The Noun of Number hae , pta , h ,ope, is used as an, 
 indefinite Article , but less frequently than in other lan- 
 guages of the South of Europe. When opposed to «>\cc H 
 assumes the article; as, Ivolq otliku toy ockkov, the one injures 
 the other. 
 
 K«S-?/V likewise assumes the article, as 
 W&wh , give a Para to each. 
 
 met eyx 
 
m 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 1. The second Person Plural , in polite Phraseology ? 
 as used, as in our language , when addressing a single Per- 
 son : MTa^W //« , Icoitri pv ^uyJ , Papa, give me some .bread, 
 
 2. The second Persons singular and Plural are , bj a, 
 singular anomaly, often found in almost immediate contact 
 with a nominative in the third Person ; as , n tvyiviia. <rxc 
 yfyvftic on ai ayavrx. , you know Sir , that she loyes you ; 
 vi tc,o^'oTyi^ vac Ih rfctvgiTi kukcc to / srociy{jL&L , your Excellency i$ 
 liot well informed of the matter,, 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 ROUSTS OF DUMBER. 
 
 I. To express a quantity, the cardinal numerals are ranged 
 in succession , from the highest to the lowest, without any 
 
 Conjunction 5 as , yihioi , cKTaKoaioi , HKocri TitKia^iQ ciffyaGrci , 
 
 one thousand, eight hundred, and twenty four Men. Dates, 
 are expressed in the Neuter Gender, §- take the Article ; as , 
 
 el AyxfYjvoi eTrn^av tyiv tvohiv tic ra yj^ict TtTcaxovioL wiv/iVTa. ana 
 X£W7K ; lyzfrdv Tin K'ofivQev (jjaai 7roKKcl ahhet f^s^ia ( ytda-rfOLj 
 t?c TliKomdvyvxTM , tic t& yj^iQ- (iY.TCLY.osia ukoci Tfia., Tile xUrks 
 
 took Constantinople, in the year of our Lord One thousand, 
 four hundred and fifty three. They lost Corinth, and several 
 other Fortresses of the Morea, in j8a3 ; x( ona * s understood? 
 it is even sometimes expressed. 
 
 1. The Ordinal Numbers follow the same construction; 
 
 t'lC TY!V iK0f.T6(TtriV TflOLKCfTTr.V TflTVJV O kVliGTldtx f jll the OU6 hun- 
 dred and thirty diird Olympiad. 
 
 3. To express many thousands , the substantive %i\t*c$ 
 preceded by a cardinal number, is declined, and the Noun, 
 
 (1) M"ons, r David has here, rather unadvisedly, assumed the Charac- 
 ter of a Prophet , or retailer of Prophecies , predicting the fall of 
 Constantinople in 1821. I have altered the Phrase, 
 
9 ¥ 
 
 whose quantity it determines , is put in the same case § 
 hKorcoai tvo xjkiy-lii; av^wGrxt; , he killed two thousand Men. 
 
 4. The idea of half is expressed in two Ways ; I.° a 
 hy the adjective (ait-h , « , o* , half 7— following the 
 substantive , with the intervening copulative mi ; acaV* 
 \to riaf/Vi fcxx xf- urx KX '' i JAJT ' 9 > ^ resi & e & 1 in Paris ten years 
 and a half; t$&yi Ivo ra-sjp&xec nxl fiiah . ( pi&w )• He ate two 
 Partridges and a half; II.- f by the substantive liuwv, a half 
 immediately following the noun of nmmber which it modi- 
 lies; X H tfimv six and a half: When preceded by a cardinal 
 number terminating wi th a vowel, v/iurv loses its first syllable, 
 and becomes .enclitic ; Seepage 1 i.'Wrst pu seven and a 
 half : it even forces the accent of paroxytona forward ; 
 thus, liKCL united becomes St*a '/v.isv ; ten and a half; in 
 the same manner 3 \yd 'y-pu, one and a half; loiMzd \u^v , 
 twelve and a half; Tt&tr^fd 'yu/ojt/, four and a half; riatroLf 0.^171/ 
 fMtfidti four ducats and a half. 
 
 The feminine of the adjective pmc is also enclitic after 
 #U: yja.\u«syi we* , an hour and a half, half past one o'clock. 
 
 5. The Words fya. and vplg* are generally omitted after 
 Cardinal Numbers ; Mi tk rm firl '/mtav , he came at half past 
 pne; &hu dvwcofwti %i$ TaTf Ivo d-mo to ju&wfiifi , fye will set out 
 at half past two ; ik touq thx r* wafbvTos (AYim the tenth 
 of the present Month. ( viptfous understood. ) 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 OF PERSONAL PRONOWNS. 
 
 1. The Pronoun Personal, when the Subject of the 
 Yerb , is generally understood, as in the Ancient Language, 
 Latin , and Italian ; because the terminations of the Verb 
 are sufficiently varied to distinguish the persons, without 
 the pronoun; thus Ck^-v , us , u\ I see, thou seest, he sees,, 
 
 2. The pronoun , as the Subject of a Verb , is never 
 expressed, but for the sake of distinction or emphasis; as, 
 
 lyw %\ to &\cj k%Qqkv y I will hj no means allow it, or hay® 
 
99 
 |l so. When however it is the Object of the verb, it is; and if 
 emphasis be aimed at, it is repeated; thus, y.l pamra/, it 
 appears to me ; kpiva /A oodnron prt tafuKtg ; it appears to 
 me that you have erred. 
 
 3. The monosyllabic personal pronoun 9 when governed 
 directly or indirectly, unless the governing Verb be in 
 the imperative Mood, precedes it ; (A dyuTrz , he loves me ; 
 p* liltt , he gives me; Imp.e a-yiVc. ^g , love me; ScJcrs ^« , 
 
 give me. 
 
 If , of two personal pronouns , in the same Phrase # 
 die one be directly, and the other indirectly governed, 
 the latter precedes ; thus, ^ to 'l&xi , he gave me ; 7« toV«, 
 { iTttcl) I told it him ; Imp.e ^ ff£ Ty ' TOj gi ye it him; «>g t* 73, 
 fejl it him. 
 
 The Vulgar, however, very often neglect this rule; and 
 jt is not unusual to hear the following, and similar Phrases y 
 uld rov , I have seen him , instead of toy tlla.. 
 
 4. With Compound Tenses, these Pronouns are placed , 
 always in the above order , between the auxiliary and the 
 Verb ; thus , 0&.<a rh flu , I shall see him , I will see him j 
 i)a roe ayra.(jiMii , He will meet him ; S9e^£ tw ttfyfii , He 
 would find him; 0a *$ to %ii%u , I will shew it him ; 
 ( to him ) #* t» to VJ ( fc/77-J ) I &>/// tell it him , I shall 
 tell it him. 
 
 The Reader has already seen that, when these pronouns 
 follow the Verb, they become enclitics; and that on the 
 contrary , when they precede it, they preserve their accent, 
 The idiom of the language inclines strongly to the use of 
 these monosyllabic pronouns after other Words , as after 
 certain adverbs ; See Chap/ XLV , 1 , 2 , 4» 5 , and after 
 some pronouns and adjectives; as, ctirbc pa (1), myself; otiToe<m 7 
 thyself ; clvtoq its himself , ubvos ,«« , I alone fyc 
 
 5. It has been observed, Chap. r XVI , N, I. , that the 
 .Modern Greek has, properly speaking., no possessive pro* 
 
 (1) Tli e Vulgar dyop the y and say £ T0 ' 5 ^.ou , octo's^w, drro; 7ey» 
 
3 J 
 
 ftoun, but substitutes the genitive case of personal pronouns* 
 following the noun, as an enclitic; thus, h (pihor, ^ ; my" 
 friend ; tvxr $ihor, u.< , or has ,«» <pi'h6s , one of my friends , 
 6r a friend of mine. 
 
 tloX TOY (fihOY ( U\i , GX , Ttf , F. TY:Q ^lrig. 
 
 yaQ y a-uc, Tw, or t*.; M. F. N. Plur. 
 
 I have seen my j thy , his , her j its / Friend Sing* 
 our your their Plur. 
 
 6. If accompanied by an adjective , the pronoun may 
 preserve its place after the substantive , but its more ele- 
 gant arrangement is between the adjective and substantive ; 
 thus , ul-oL toy kxkov (DtKcy pat i more elegantly , iiloc toy noe.h.'oY ( a* 
 ffhoy, 1 have seen my good Friend. 
 
 7. The Personal Pronoun , thus constructed is , by 
 pleonasm, put after certain substantives including the Mea 
 of exclusive property in the subject , as of the hands, the feet; 
 file eyes of a Man ; thus, ™ 'Uo-^oiv t* xh™ r« , fx tt \x^x r* 9 . 
 they cut off his hands , his feet. The continually recurring 
 habit of employing this genitive has doubtless originated the 
 pleonasm. The use of this pronoun as an enclitic is \ 
 consequently , very frequent, which, to obviate the neces- 
 sity of recapitulation , the Reader is requested to bear in 
 Mind. A new example of it will occur in the ensuing 
 Chapter. 
 
 8. By means of a demonstrative Pronoun preceding the 
 substantive , the Greek reaches the following energetic 
 Phrase in old French ; J'ai troupe hier ce mien bon ami, 
 nearly as energetically expressed m good Modern English, 
 I yesterday met with this my good Friend »l^x l^U tQtov 
 r'ov xocxor y.v Qi'kcv. We often add a old »', expressive not of 
 age , but of length and cordiality of intimacy ; and the 
 Phrase is , then , I think , more energetic than either 
 Modern Greek , or old French. 
 
 9. Some Authors use the Genitive of the personal Pronoun 
 of the third Person , without elision of the incipient syl- 
 lable , and say, and, more particularly, write, uba re? yt-uv 
 *»7*' rof ft km KbTuvy I have seen his , their , Friend, 
 
io. The CoinpoitiKt Personal Prdhbiin rZ k'ojm ft* , <n>\ $*, 
 follows the construction of the Simple iyd , aw , «utq? , but 
 it is more polite : Thus , instead of saying , ky lh toy 
 yruffliK KaAa , thou clost not thyself know him well } it ii 
 Usual in courtesy to say ; t« ^y* ay Sey rep yrofifa kx\ql , or , 
 in the plural; rw xoywo-ac ^tw yvQ^ri kuksl , you dont 
 yourself $fe. Thus also , speaking of a person present, in' 
 
 the tiiird person , t« *cy« tw rh tltiv ex®h , M. r . 
 
 ( this Gentleman ) saw him yesterday* considered much 
 •more polite than avrhs rh itlt. 
 
 ii. When this Compound Pronoun follows a preposi- 
 tion , it drops the Article; Trny-outa M kbyv <rv , I am going 
 to your House; ifX 9 f JLm ^ K ' Y* ™% I come from your Houses 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIIL 
 
 Of THE RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRO&bllft. 
 
 I . In the Relative Possessive Pronoun b iWc p? , mine 4 
 the Adjective $/jwc expresses the idea of possession , sl4 
 observed fn Chapter XVI, while its relative force is con- 
 fined to the Article, which , as the substitute , refers to 
 the preceding Substantive; thus, in the following Phrase, 
 yd ro frifikiov /am , nal va to tlmh <rv , here is my Book , and 
 there is thine , or yours , the second -ro is elliptic , and. 
 refers to the Substantive fii£\iov , in the preceding member 
 of the sentence ; so that , to render the Phrase complete i 
 it would he necessary to say , w to QiQkiqv ^v , ko.\ vd to 
 
 10 MOV G"d filCkfoV. 
 
 1. When this adjective ej/koc is not preceded by the 
 Article, it indicates possession iirelatively : thus avrh to 
 •GtfitJor that tliKov jam , this book is mine , ( belongs to me ) 
 uvai iliKoycru uvtq to ufohoyicv • Is this your Watch ? 
 
 3. The Adjective eWc, preceded by the Article and fol- 
 lowed by its substantive , serves only to increase the force 
 of the Phrase , without having any character of a relative ; 
 thus ^ vol 70 iliKov (jlm &i$kUv % « thare is my Book*,- is more em-- 
 
phatic than vd rb Ifiuuv ( wv, there is my book. If still greater 
 emphasis be desired the adjective may be placed after the 
 Substantive , vd ib Q£k!ov rb ituir ju*. 
 
 This adjective is often used emphatically in the sense 
 of our word own ; thus , i-z-fpHh d^e tx TTz&iy. r» , more, 
 emphatically aVo rd thud™ 7tailrJ , and still more emphatical^ 
 ly , two rd thud ™ id Trails , he was betrayed by his owo 
 Children, 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV, 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 I. The three Demonstrative Pronouns, aJroc, >*, ?, tvtoc and 
 ImhcQ always require that the article should be prefixed to 
 the indicated Noun: thus a-Jrcc b a^ac, t^to; b a^ac , this 
 Man; aJrj? >j yurxlKx , this 'Woman; k^oc o arS^ac , that Man, 
 Ixtitti -a ywotTkz that Woman , the article is indispensable , as 
 the pronoun alone would not adequately express the indication,. 
 
 For greater elegance the pronoun is often placed afier the 
 noun; b avspas wtoc , b dvlpxs IxCivoi-. 
 
 '2. \vrbc and Uihas are often substituted for Personal 
 Pronouns of the 3. d Person. They in that case have no 
 Article following them, but are succeeded by a Verb refer- 
 ring to the subject they , as personal Pronouns , represent: 
 auToc tihdt , he is come} iitiTtos uh rh dli\(pbv [a%g , he has seen 
 our Brother. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV. 
 
 OF TlIE PRONOUIf RELATIVE. 
 
 t. The Pronoun Relative i b l-row answers to our Rela- 
 tives who which, and that; i%woa rh ywx7xx rm qtoiolv \eye^, 
 I know the Woman of whom you speak: &q rh ar^wro? , 
 h b.?o7os dy.ih.wi p% ipirct > did you see the Man who spoke 
 to me ? 
 
 d'ffTtc is confined to the more sustained style of writing r 
 
9 6 
 ytupffyk toy crfya'rov oo-Tiz h*K$t e^Oe'c j Do you know the Mail 
 
 \vlio ( that ) came yesterday ? 
 
 oV» ■, indeclinable , and agreeing with all persons and 
 
 genders, in both numbers, is of very frequent use, as a 
 
 Relative, particularly by the Vulgar j and in the colloquial 
 
 style : ai yuwjKtc on* tlla , the , Women whom I saw. 
 
 2. In speaking i) the first syllable is often dropped : t» 
 X^tI '** F* '^>ief , the paper you gave me ( or that, or which 
 you gave me. ) 
 
 3. Some Writers place the antecedent after the rela- 
 tive in the same Member of a sentence, thus; i$eiifo rh ottoIov 
 KiynQ mbfuwov , I know the Man of whom you speak , or of 
 what man you speak. The indeclinable particle hvrZ cannot 
 be thus used 5 and indeed the construction is , by many 
 Writers, thought to have two little analogy with the Mo- 
 dern Idiom , and to savour too much of Pedantry to bt 
 imitated. 
 
 4. The Modern Greek has several correlative adjectives \ 
 
 SUCll as TOffe? , ocrot; ; tqiStci; , o-frojoc : i X il r ' ocry ! v tv%w 07r,v Kdi 
 
 a dlik(po<; t» he is as fortunate as his Brother; il'vcii nat o\%o[M 
 701* toq 'czjoTov rev tile*, he is still just such as ( just what ) 
 I saw him. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVh 
 
 OF THE REFLECTIVE t'RONdU^f* 
 
 t. The Reflective Pronoun is substituted for" the siniplfe 
 Personal Pronoun 9 whenever the verb governing it expresses 
 the action of the subject upon itself: thus , dyxTra. r'ht 
 iolvt'qv r\s , he loves himself, and in the feminine^ dya-tra rov 
 taurbv rw , she loves herself, ym^i'i toy lavr'ov um , know thv~ 
 Self; and with prepositions \^oni\n\ \ivl toy iwtbv vac, think 
 of yourself ; v\(auq %h tyivvvi^n^Lip tic to? koo-juiov cicc toy tdvrov /ucc£. 
 We were not sent into the World ( born ) for ourselves 
 alone, The simple monosyllabic Pronoun would in all the 
 above Phrases be a solecism ; and it would be improper 
 to say j yi®$i 4% } yfinfy hi vu The polysyllabic Pronoun 
 
li not, under similar circumstances, more correct, accord- 
 ing to grammatical analogy; but, as it gives a better 
 "close to the Phrase than the monosyllabic, it is admissible^ 
 as a substitute for the Reflective Pronoun ; and one mav 
 say indifferently lh tyivvlSypiv lid tov tcuirov fidg y or Ih zyivii- 
 fjyijuiv oix y]ju<xQ. 
 
 i. The Compound Personal Pronoun, r« xcy« om , Without 
 Article, may, after Prepositions, be substituted for the Re- 
 flective Pronoun : <pfbvTt{i lid hoy* o-h, %h kyiwyiSvipciv lid ao-jvmvc, 
 to Uxtxkcc&x cctto Koy\s [ax , think of yourself ; we were not 
 bom for ourselves ; I , of myself, understood it. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS* 
 
 , i. The Interrogative Pronouns tig , ^o7oc , are construct* 
 &I as in English: rig JjkS-i ; Who is come ? zrolos r» to t/Ve ; 
 Who told ( it ) him ; za-olog iTwi av-rk ; Who is he? zxoix tTvii 
 
 ( Trai*, vii ) oiVTVi ; Who is she? aroiog 'cccr'QLVTVg toy ilti ; Which 
 
 of them saw him ? Iwo-i ^ to fiiQhiov , give me the Book ; 
 ■zroHov ; which? ( Book. ) 
 
 i. These Pronouns are also used as Relatives : lh '£%iv$a 
 hi i/m tivri , I know not what he told ( said to ) me ; al 
 sfUTwi izoioc, Jk8fi , he asked who was come; ti%iv$ug vrbaag yj~ 
 hiding (i) ifyUvtn; Do you know how many thousands ( pias- 
 tres ) he has spent? 
 
 3. The Interrogative Particles tt^ , tt'qti , nS , 5^c., 
 follow the same construction : i^w^a &Zg to t-nipu., I know 
 how he did it , lh ^ iTzrav tron uxk , thev did not tell 
 me when he came ; vfcwpiv «r» iv^yi , they know ( or it is 
 known ) where he is gone. 
 
 (i) Just as we omit pounds, because the nominal coin in which 
 we make up our Accounts. Piastres , as pounds , are always under- 
 stood, unless, from what lias preceded, reference to other coins be 
 distinctly deducible* 
 
o 8 
 
 4, The neuter r/ , used either in exclamation ', or inter- 
 rogatively , is constructed with Nouns in all Genders? 
 Numbers and Cases : ri avfyuvot; iTvai uvr'oq ; What Man is 
 this? ri ywoCiKOL tTmroLvrfi; What Woman is this? ri fya uvat;< 
 What is the hour ? In exclamation ri u<aiu ywaTxa ! What 
 a beautiful Woman ! ri wjuoffx -arailia ! What beautiful 
 Children! ri xa^ocfo n$b ! What pure water! 
 
 Instead of zro? r and ri , ( except ri in exclamation ) 
 the Vulgar use ri hoyns; how ? in what manner; of what 
 kind ? ri hoyvc rb 'ixay.i , how did he do it ? ( or make it? ) 
 kwaOa ri hvyw fb 'UafAi f I have' learnt ( fou-od out ) how 
 he did it; ri \oy% w^emro's ihw' olvt'o;. What Maa of What 
 kind of Man is this ? Hzvfo rl hoyHc thai ctvros a^G^utsro^ 
 I* know **V*a£ /*/*£/ 0/' ( £/ze ) Man he is. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVBL 
 
 ' OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 i. Of these nxnk is more in use than ik : it has ge-' 
 nerally a negative sense. It, in fact, answers to dur one y 
 body , person ; for if negatively used, to he correct, a 
 negative must be added , as we add no, thus; lb rb nh^u 
 xdaic , no one , 720 person knows it. It is sometimes used' 
 affirmatively ,, thus ; rh tilt v.dinit; , somebody saw him; 
 and sometimes interrogatively :■' Ik u a xavu'c ; Is any one 
 come? It is also used with the Imperative Mood, thus: 
 ac rev vrtxw xx\«/c let, some one take ( hold of ) him; 
 o( fxrv rh -ridoyi y.dnir,, let nobody take ( hold of ) him. 
 
 a. The Neuter riven is of very frequent occurrence ,• 
 as an Interrogative , wilh,. and without negation; thus , 
 tXuc riyron; ( vapor f/Vyfc ) Have you any thing ( to say to 
 irie')? maybe answered, according to circumstances , af- 
 firmatively , e^fij , vai - pdhnrra ; negatively , W £^<y - oyj ~ 
 rforori. In like manner it is very usual to sajr, Si* £*&> 7%<?rt, 
 I do not wunt'f ' wish for ) any thing,. lit ula ri*or* } I did 
 2K>t< jee any things 
 
I, ki,uwwec % ^ , 9v expresses the idea of an iiideterriii- 
 Viate quantity : r.jJlir KxjuTrocot kt^avroi , a considerable num- 
 ber of ( 'a great many ) Men came ; t*a£i:, **/ lyon 
 Ksif/wUih tf«f«ta , (i) he played , and lost a good deal of 
 Money ; nzp.'rwft 7t^o( a Considerable number. 
 
 (I'voiot , trik j o-roiev. answers to bur whosoever, whoever ; 
 it requires the indicative Mood, when referring to time 
 past) orfoiH tc inn* tilpaM whoever said it was mistaken: 
 it may be constructed with the indicative , or subjunctive, 
 when referring to time pfeseilt, oirmc to x<yv, or hiyr; <r<pxh>,ti, 
 whoever says so is in error: but invariably with the Sub- 
 junctive j when referring to the future : ottom to s/Vjf , 
 $i\ii to jMt&oiuM , Whoever* may say it will repent ^ 
 ■shall repent it. 
 
 4- Sometimes , t6 give a still more indefinite turn to 
 the expression \ the particles *ai aV are subjoined : o-rotn 
 xxi av to s/V«, $* to juiravoidoYi whosoever may assert it 
 shall repent it* 
 
 In the hiobe sustained style, writers use J'rr/c ; osth; koli 
 at i*«« , whoever he may be; oc t k *«< iV tc wV*T, whoever 
 may say so, fyc; o,ti km <*.v um , Ih i%a lUaiov , whatever 
 he may have said, he is hot right. 
 
 5. These pronouns may be governed by the Verb : 
 ar*ft ottoiov 0s'w;f , take which you please, will, wish (may 
 wish)', HctMi oiTiQihyt . o^ti kx'i a\ Qihvc , do whatever you 
 like : they sometimes , to increase emphasis , are placed 
 at the opening of the Phrase : o,ti 0«m# , jca^e , do just 
 Whatever you pleasei 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 
 FIRST PART. 
 • OF THE GENITIVE. 
 
 i. The Genitive after a Noun Substantive in Modern 
 
 Greek, as in other Languages, indicates possession: b vM 
 
 (i) Itotia^e;, in the plural, is used as oiir generic Term Money. 
 
TOO 
 
 t~« (pikY (jlm , my friend's Son ; o Avroxfd-ruf rue I'Wa ton:, Tfcs 
 Emperor of Russia , See Chap/ XXXII , 5. 
 
 2. It is used in speaking of age : Tftar x?' om7 vai M 
 an infant three years old , or of age ttocuv x?' ovav twcu'i 
 how old are you'? «kw« r|>/<ap, twenty three, ( Xf' 0yuy under- 
 stood ) These and similar Phrases, are elliptical in most, 
 if not all, languages. 
 
 3. It is also employed to fix a point of future time; 
 6s*.'ea oVaK$j>su(& tyiq ml/lit $ m , I shall many ^ or he married 
 at Easter, and, in the same manner, tv X& u i^eaiis the 
 ensuing year. 
 
 l\. It supplies the place of the dative , which exists 
 only in a few Hellenic phrases : We p.v -^api , give me 
 some bread ; Ivan, tvk 7rx^oc tv vt$v£v t~ Ka.vp.et* , give a 
 para to the poor blind man; tv Kiyco , I tell him. 
 
 SECOND' PART, 
 
 I. The Accusative ',■ with the preposition ik , is alscr 
 Used to supply the want of the dative case : Key a iU- toy 
 qii.ov pv , I say to my friend ; and without a preposition ,-■ 
 {ittcl 7ov Ttufyicv vol ehSvi , I told George to come* 
 
 We may therefore indifferently use the genitive , or 
 accusative, and say pv eWe , or pi s'Ws, he gave me ; pv 
 yaiviTai, or pi yalviTai, it appears to me ; Tv-xeyw or tIv Keyu , 
 I tell him. The accusative appears to be very generally pre- 
 ferred, and indeed, in the plural, it is in exclusive use; thus it 
 would he a violation of the idiom of the Modern language, 
 as spoken, to say rm 'Hukx , I gave them, We %y , give' 
 them ,- instead of rvt, tWa , We" rvs. The genitive plural 
 of the second person does not exist in the Language ; 
 and that of the first , being a dissyllable , cannot precede 
 the verb ; the accusative, therefore, of both is of necessity 7 
 the only case plural that can be employed : paq iWi , aa; 
 tt7rt' 9 he tald us p he told you , It has been observed, in 
 
3<M 
 
 die declension of Pronouns, that the accusative plural of 
 the Pronoun p ersonal of the third person , r«V , joined to 
 substantives, as an enclitic, expresses, as well as the ge- 
 nitive , the ida a of possession : thus , we may say, indif- 
 ferently , o Tan j>«c ray, or o Trxrtfac t«c , their Father : the 
 genitive may be more elegant and correct perhaps ., but is 
 by no means in general use , at least in .conversation. 
 
 2. Some Verbs active govern two Accusatives , one 
 directly* of the Thing, and the other indirectly, of the 
 Person: S/Wxa to vaili rd yfdjupard , I teach the Child to 
 read; rhv erWe v^rdvi , He put Kim on ( on him) a caftan, 
 
 3. It sometimes marks a particular part : ( the prepo- 
 sition xara, in, with respect to, as to, being understood,) 
 Kxfi iTvcj k'okkivx tcI uctTicL voce ; Why ( how ) are your eyes 
 so red ? tovq tci, they pain me, i. e. I have pain in them 5 
 
 ( KCLTCL TV. jUOLTIOC. ) 
 
 4. The Accusative case expresses the circumstances of 
 fiine , measure, distance, &;c. , by the ellipsis of Kxrd : 
 toy tl^hivcru Ukx xf ord ^ 1 served him ten years; h*.§t re £fs5t/, 
 he came in the evening; r^tc $o'$yfc tm i&lo^dla , three 
 times a Week; rh a^p.^ov , to day; frjufyxv understood: avrh 
 
 to ^cofiov iJvoli fAXK^tid CC7T ihd lixx yJ-hhia this Village IS ten. 
 
 sniles hence ; Ti^avh t° ytyos, a German born, or by birth; 
 rrovov uaoti juxxfyTtfoq 'cltt olvtov ; how much are you taller than 
 he? (Mav (jTr^XfAY.v , a palm : thus also , by ellipse of the 
 preposition ik or Kara, the accusative may, like the genitive, 
 mark a point of future time ; 8exw vac ta-wxefOE r'm aKKny 
 KVfixKviv , I will come and see (visit) you next Sunday: 
 by ellipse of the proposition lid , it marks the price of 
 of a thing ; iTrdrKwx to dxoy'ov /uk houio<na yfoaict , I have 
 sold my Horse for two hundred Piastres ; to nybfctcra. X'' K!CC 
 yjmicL ; I bought it for a thousand piastres, 
 
 5. It signifies the mode of action : Trnyxlw yiiiKo , yia\o f 
 1 coast it , I go along shore ; ty put^d narfkia. Trnyatvw 
 yuvid , ycdnd. Small Boats go , sail, make from, point to 
 point: of similar import are evafftrx, one by one, lvo } Ivo 9 
 two and two, by twos , or in pairs. 
 
TQ3 
 
 G. It als* indicates the matter : : ytpdrt nfo , lull q| 
 Water ; er^uivo ^d$xi<; covered with 'matting; u/a x^a n^c,. 
 q pup of Water ; crot {wyaft u7to%yi^tol , xa\r£a/c , a pair of" 
 shoes, stockings ; era x$?ra$/. t*jW a troop of children. 
 
 7. It is also used to signify an arithmetical proportion : 
 Hiflma. IfKa to. tKctrov , 1 gained ten per cent. 
 
 8. Adjectives of the three degrees of comparison , in^ 
 the accusative plural, are often employed , without pre- 
 position, adverbially: IkQtc <*fy* >, you are come late, **&#*£ 
 xxhx , if.0Ly.cx> , a<j)(Yiy.a , ykwyo$ct, , ttokkx , you djd well , ill % 
 
 unbecomingly , quickly, much; also with the preposition 
 Kami : tffitLt kztcI 7TohKoi iv^^i^Kf/hci: , I am exceedingly pleased 
 hxCdltn: KUhkr,Ti(-ct , xiip'oTtfoi y KzhKifTet , you read better % 
 worse , exceedingly well ; bfAihiTc kclkkivtu. , you s,peat ^ad- 
 mirably. 
 
 CHAPTER XL, 
 
 OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 i, When the Comparative is followed by a substantive^ 
 the latter is put in the accusative case, with the preposi-- 
 
 tioil, a tto , Qr Trapa : n Ttf/uxvioc ejfrai piyuMTtfci c^tto , or ?raf~ 
 
 7w Ta-hiJoLv < Germary is larger tlxan France. 
 
 1. Relatives and Adverbs are also put in the same case,, 
 with either of the above prepositions , though tx^x is most 
 usual: olvtqq ilvai 7Thxo}<L>T$foi; Trap o,ti (tto^Iio^i , he is richer 
 than you suppose: e^uaGe 7^^10-7 o%ox iraf sera 'ihWiuo*v<Ti , fie has: 
 learnt more than he has forgotten, Sometimes the relative 
 is suppressed, and, in that case, **»« becomes a compara- 
 tive conjunction, like than in the English, equivalent to 
 
 « than (hose things which » £,«a0e wepwo-erefa -rxprc ihw/Libvwt ; 
 
 but, to admit of this, the Subject of the two verbs must 
 be the same : thus turn* twgiutk>9q ttx^ol <ttox«'{i(tQi , would 
 not be Greek : it , indispensably , must be *tf on 
 
 3. The Verb, when the same, is, in comparative Phrases, 
 suppressed in the second member of the sentence : an^o* 
 r%tufu rripv'rfoife wxp i-^k , he {aiows more to day than yes? 
 
ioS 
 
 sjerday, instead pf ntf oV* vfaptpv lyQk 3 u^it <p?criuo7tjoc Trugx 
 TTfuTOL , I am more prudent than formerly , i. e. mtf b y 7.i 
 
 4- The positive , with the adverb yrhiov , more, is often 
 substituted for the comparative : a'Sexf 6f <r« e/^a/ 7r\£oe p^ou- 
 ^oc ana « , (aVksra ) your Brother is more prudent than 
 vou. 
 
 5. It has been already remarked Page 3 1 , N. 6 , that 
 the adjective in the superlative degree is used absolutely, 
 Relative super onty is expressed by the comparative , 
 preceded by the Article : l .\\i\Kij.t; yjrov avlfuoltfoc elrb t«c 
 WkhKwzt , Achilles was the bravest of the Greeks ; The 
 Vulgar sometimes add the adverb *hkw to the comparative , 
 just as the lower classes in England often add more : 
 n vkIqv ofjLOff'oTtfv yvmjKOL aVoAac, the most beautiful ( the 
 prettiest ) Woman of the whole. 
 
 6. The personal Pronoun is sometimes put in the Ge- 
 nitive Case, after the Comparative : yyu^t rh *.«.KKYiTifa <r* 
 ( learn to ) know thy better ; aaVej uvxi piyuMTtfoc ^« , he 
 is older than I : this construction is confined to the en- 
 clitic personal pronoun. When the pronoun, not being a 
 monosyllable, cannot become enclitic, it must be constructs 
 ed in the usual manner, with the preposition T*j>a, or d*??. 
 
 CHAPTER XLI. 
 
 OF THE VERB, 
 
 OF THE VOICES. 
 
 i. The Active presents nothing requiring particular 
 Notice ; but the Passive has many peculiar applications 
 demanding the Reader's attention, (j) 
 
 2. The passive Voice. 
 
 (1) There is one rare use of the Active , that require* distinct 
 notice , or the III. d Rule for the Peculiar use of the Passive Voice 
 might mislead ; particularly without the restriction , I have added , 
 * in a very few instances. » The Phrases there instanced , fall rather 
 
1 ® J ^ 
 
 1.° Is used in a Reflective Sense, i. e. the action is upaia 
 the Agent : eilvyepan , I dress ( myself , ) or am dressing \ 
 Zvfi(Qfii&i , I am shaving. ( myself ) Yery generally the. 
 reflective pronoun is used , when reflective action is in- 
 tended thus , dyoL'&ci rov iclvt'ov tv, he loves himself. When 
 however the action is upon the Agent's person , the Pas- 
 sive is always preferred: 'Mvo^ai , I am dressing ; idifyjjuxi , 
 I bathe ; Grhvvo{u.ai , I am washing ( myself ) xTy&pat 9 
 I am combing myself , fyc. 
 
 The Passive Voice in a reflective sense sometimes go- 
 verns the Accusative case: «rao-cut/,3^a/ nva , I jostle, brush 
 
 against some one j jUW vnxyyq vol GuctaoLhiidvai tvs of'rOfwVvf 9 
 
 t&ulvi thou cKofiukoi , dont go. jostling, or brushing against 
 people, for the plague is about. 
 
 II. ° It very naturally passes from a reflective to a 
 reciprocal sense : thus £yy.ci&w$t*$«. , we embrace each 
 other , we mutually embrace ; li^h^a , we beat each 
 other; aVra^o^o^eOa, we meet , ( each other ) 8$c. 
 
 III.° It is used also, in a very few instances, to express 
 what we get done for ourselves by the agency of another ^ 
 as in the following formula of the Greek Marriage Cere- 
 mony , when the Priest places the nuptial crown on the 
 heads of the espoused , b Ixkoc t« 6e« M/^awx artfctv'onrc/j ri'p 
 ixhviv r« Giy Giolcofccv, the Servant of God Michael weds 
 ( takes as his wedded Wife ) the Servant of God Theodora 3 
 here (rn^avonrai properly means that , by the instrument- 
 ality of the Priest, Michael places this crown, the symbol 
 of their nuptial union , on the head of Theodora ; and 
 that , thus , he makes her his Wife. Thus also , in com- 
 
 under the Character of exceptions than examples of a General Rule v 
 and ought to be accounted Idioms ( Idiotisms ). The Active Voice is 
 sometimes used , as we use it, in such Phrases as the following, wheref 
 others are employed to act for us ; I am building a House , Ktj'Coj 
 fva (j7i7i-t ; I am sowing my Lands, $nvm tk xwp«<p«* fwu ; I am planting 
 a Vineyard, cpuTsuco a^weXt ; and also in some very few instances where? 
 we do not j as ? I have ordered a Coat; cprtavw e'va (fo'pej*^ 
 
ICO 
 
 m%n Conversation , b rait ecm<para9w$ rh rawe .ff^c/z a cue. 
 has married such a one, i. e, literally , has crowned, 
 ner\ or caused her to be crowned for himself: and again 
 fn'r e^wp/«r8wj has divorced Aer , has , by means of the com- 
 petent Authority , separated 7?e/' from himself : the sense 
 being active regulates the government accordingly. 
 
 IVo Sometimes, though purely passive , i. e. in sense 
 as well as form, it governs the accusative ; b Azfuos icTiovify 
 
 rbv fy'ovov , Kcct rnv Zp>M cctsro txq eda«c i* vvrrxb^q DariUS was de« 
 
 prived of ( his ) throne and life by his own Subjects. 
 CHAPTER XLII. 
 
 OF THE TEASES. 
 
 I.I have thought it more advantageous to the Reader, 
 
 in the English Text , and in the short notes severally at- 
 tached to the different Tenses , in the conjugation of ypa'<p« , 
 to do as much as- possible towards exhibiting their force ? 
 instead of reserving the matter for detached explanation 
 here. See particularly Pages 47 ■> 4°* ■> 5o , 56 , Text and 
 Notes. I have not been so sillily pedantic as to think it 
 either right, or feasible, to change the Nomenclature of the 
 Tenses, though I have affixed to the immemorially received 
 Names, second Names or Definitions indicating their force. 
 Men who have already mastered the difficulties of reconei- 
 Jing Names , however inappropriate, to the objects named, 
 feel habit of too much value, in aid of Memory, to give it up a 
 without a struggle. To young people , however , the habit 
 of qualifying the first Names, by always repeating with them 
 the second , could not, I think, but be useful. little re- 
 mains to be said here ; but as examples are of great force 
 in illustration, and I have given but few in the conjugation, 
 I shall here subjoin those given by Mons. r David , on the 
 distinction to be made, in expressing continued^ repftedtive, 
 or habitual action, passion, or state of being, and in express- 
 ing their single occurrence. 
 
jo6 
 
 a. If I advise a person to practise writing, for the purpose 
 
 /of acquiring a good hand , I say ypa'pe lid yd ^afyc naxa , 
 which means write often , repeat ^e <zc£ of writing , till 
 you have learnt to write well. If I request a person to 
 write a letter to one of his friends , I say -ypa^e t« <pix\< <ra , 
 and mean , that he should write once, and not repeatedly, 
 Should I say y?d(pt 7 « <p/a« m , the meaning of my Phrase 
 would be, continue to write to , keep up a Correspondence 
 with jour Friend. In the same manner, in the subjunctive 
 Mood: crpeCTe/ vi ypa'<pv;c $id ?« ^a'O^c xa^a ^om must write ( con- 
 tinually, frequently ) to learn to write well; t^ttu vd y?<x^r< t» 
 <p/x« ov , you must write ( a letter ) to your Friend, If being 
 jhungry, or thirsty, I ask a person for something to eat or 
 drink,I say luai Mi yd ma f mi yd <pdyco (i), give me (something) 
 to eat and to drink ( now , this once. ) But, if I speak of a 
 permanent obligation to furnisfr my food, the proper mods 
 of expression is, lilt (m vd mm xai yd Tfuyo, give (^continue to 
 give ) me my necessary supply of foocj, 
 
 3. Tins distinction must regulate our use of the mv 
 conjugated , as well as the conjugated part of the princi- 
 pal Verb, in forming the future, and conditional Tenses, 
 as I have already shewn , Page 56, at the end of the 
 Passive Voice of Tfdtpo. Thus Um ™ yfd^u , or tid r« y^d* 
 ^w , I shall , I will write him ( once ) a letter ; 8?\&> 7* 
 yfu<pu or 0a rv y?d<pu , I shall , I will keep up a Corres- 
 pondence with him. 
 
 (i) These latter examples require a caution, or they might perplex 
 tjie subject they are intended to illustrate. The reader must bear in 
 mind that c^to is not a present Tense , but part of one defective 
 Verb , used as the Aprist of another defective Verb. They are , with 
 this caution , being expressions of the most familiar use , the best 
 possible illustrations ; as they shew this admirable accuracy to be 
 an intrinsic character of the Modern Greek. No Goody Herbseller , 
 either in Athens , or in any other corner of Greece , but would 
 detect a Foreigner , by the confusion of these Terms , and smile at 
 \t , as a most barbarous solecism. 
 
107 
 
 4- In speaking of Bodily sensations ,'" particularly if of 
 any duration , the Aorist is often used where we use the 
 present: Ufi/w<ra, I am cold; irjvTafck', I am sleepy; hre/rop* , 
 1 am hungry; ( i.e. sleep , cold , hunger have seized me. ) 
 
 5. The Participle, past in composition with the auxiliary 
 tX u > forms also a kind of indefinite past, and of pluperfect, 
 applicable only in speaking of a thing present, or present 
 at the time spoken of : <r« ocflirer olvtol 7 a iawrbtiz ; rd t^y 
 lixKty f u-Yx , do you like these melons , I chose them my- 
 self ; J7A9e KCLl Ui tjfZSrxZt TCL TrtTTOilCC fJM , TOL OTolx TO. U")(CL %lCLKiy 
 
 /uhx, lie came and took from me my Melons, that I had 
 myself selected ; tifiup.*<ran 7} zTttiv IiIxckxacz ; do you re- 
 member what the Tutor said? rb e^« y^u^yov , I have 
 written it down , I have it written, or in writing. Some- 
 times instead of this participle , the neuter plural of a 
 Verbal adjective , having the force of an adverb, ( see 
 Page 102 , jN t .° 8 t ) is substituted for the participle ; thus, 
 writ ifyz<T7yifia.fnc \%%i duoiKTa. , TJiis Tradesman ( shop- 
 keeper ) is open, that is , has his shop opened ; ( t» 
 
 tfyudTy^i ctvoiyuivc* ) t^u FfahiarTct IS shut ; tcv \yu clmvtx , 
 
 I have heard of him , heard speak of him , heard his name. 
 
 6. A conditional Phrase is in Modern Greek always 
 constructed with the Imperfect Indicative : ay tlx* vrafc&te , 
 vbihct Tkr ludii tic twV sttg^c, (1) (/'/had Money I should 
 give it to the poor, or if I had had Money I should have 
 given it to the poor. See page 56. 
 
 7- For greater brevity , the Imperfect is sometimes used 
 
 (1) The above Phrase might be translated « if I were possessed of ;» 
 and then , both hypothesis or antecedent, and consequence would 
 clearly appear to be in the subjunctive Mood : again, a though I had 
 been poissssed , or should have been possessed of the riches of 
 Croesus, I would not have given him a Para, must in Modern Greek 
 be translated, K.au *' *h* 8X«»« ~t'k 77*p*£es rov K:ei«y, <Hv r.OeXa Toy 
 
 &0}<7S>. i'yT3 it% U.0V6V TTXS*. 
 
in both members of the above conditional Phrase: ai %f%$ 
 
 8. The simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood Active, 
 preceded by the Auxiliary Particles, Si vol or 0a, express con- 
 jecture: Au70f f£CC bjUihU VVyjCL jA IKlhw TVIV K07ri\htXV , Ofe K« T^C 
 
 dyoLTra. That youth is frequently talking with that Girl, 
 he must be enamoured of her; rov J'W Shippim , G& r?t 
 i^aOe tsi' &<VaV 7S (pfh* rv , you saw that he was distressed., 
 he must have heard of ( learnt ) the death of iiis friend. 
 
 However superior the Modern Greek Verb is to ours, and, 
 I believe, to that of all other languages of Europe in the 
 expression of continued action , under every modification , 
 the great advantage of our unequivocal precision in 
 expressing Simple Futurity and necessary consequence , 
 appears strikingly in such Phrases, as the following , when 
 written , and destitute of the aid of emphasis ; oVo/oc ™ &'V5, 
 %'i-hu 7o (tiToiHidiu. It may be guessed in this latter Phrase , 
 that a threat is intended ; and that therefore the proper 
 Translation is « whoever may say so shall repent it » 
 equivalent to, I am determined, that he shall repent it. 
 This is , however, by no means , necessary , or certain ; for , 
 if the speaker be not himself concerned , but merely pre- 
 dicting the consequence, it ought to be translated « he wilh\ 
 See page lq. 
 
 9. The future tense QIku is also used to express conditional!- 
 ty, when referring to a future hvpothesis, vQim when referring 
 to a past, as; Uv }o 'Uxviv, WiKtv to ^era^/aVr,if he had done it 
 lie would have repented i^. This may be translated either „ 
 whoever should assert it should repent it , or would 
 repent it. The meanings are very different, though express- 
 ed in the same , and therefore in a very equivocal manner, 
 in all Languages of the South of Europe. The first transla- 
 tion , « should repent it » includes a threat, equivalent to 
 J would make him repent it. The second , « would repent 
 it » , expresses merely the prediction of a necessary conse- 
 quence , unconnected with any idea of the exercise of 
 \olition , on the part of the speaker, or of compulsion towards 
 the Person spoken of. See Page 5o, 
 
fgjtj 
 CHAPTER XLItl. 
 
 OF MODES, 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 What has been said on the Tenses embraces alt that is 
 peculiar, with respect to the Indicative and Imperative 
 Moods. 
 
 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE,,' 
 
 I. Preceded by the particle Is , instead of vd , it suri- 
 plies the place of the Imperative Mood. n£juw , let us go , 
 without particle , is the sole exception. 
 
 •2. It is also used in interrogation, as to the advice, or wish 
 of a person , by ellipse of 6!m/£ or Ktyui; Not al KoL^r^iva-cb k&co ; 
 shall I wait, for you here? Na 7rnya.hu drro^i ui rbv x°f* v i 
 yj vd x.aitib<ra \tq o-ttuti ; Shall I go to the Ball this evening, or 
 shall I stay at home? rl vd aa^cj ; what shall I do? ft ret ti#a ; 
 what shall I say? 
 
 3v This turn has peculiar force, in refusing compliance 
 with another's wish, or in rejecting advice, as absurd ; iy<*> 
 
 yd liQLvmca qtq v&yjti , nxi roc junv vrayco clcv yooov , aurs tivxt to 
 
 iaovov d.l'Jyy.Tov , Stay at home , and not go to the Ball , that 
 is out of the question. This Phrase has a spirit of Irony 
 about it. 
 
 4- This Mood is also used in expressing a wish, by ellipse 
 of the optative particle S^iwon , Heaven grant : thus, b &oV m 
 idq <fwri(jy] ; May God enlighten you , <pcojid vd tvc tk^ty , May 
 the flames consume them ; kqmo xf^c vd 'x?y , evil betide 
 them. 
 
 5. The conjunction «V,- and its derivative adverbs of time 
 9%cti , bvoTOLv when, whenever, as soon as; also a<p v from 
 what time , as soon as ; eJOu? ott\s , immediately that, lsc. 
 are constructed both with the Indicative , and Subjunctive, 
 but; invariably, with these essential restrictions : that, when 
 a particular fact is spoken of, they require the Indicative i 
 
iro 
 
 crav tilt rov ixfyw* "yvyt ; as soon as he saw the eneniy , m 
 fled whilst on the contrary , when what is customary, what 
 •usually occurs , without specifying a particular instance, or 
 fact, they require the subjunctive ; otolv &« nh f^fyft, fivyti, 
 as soon as he sees the enemy , he flees. ( usually , in speak- 
 ing , but improperly , fllies. ) 
 
 In this latter Phrase , the Aorist is used, where we use 
 the present ; because the acts are consecutive , and not 
 simultaneous-, he sees before he flees. When the acts are 
 simultaneous , the present is requisite in both members of 
 the sentence : qtclv aot^drai , foyx^l 11 > when he sleeps , he 
 snores; 
 
 When both antecedent and consequent are definite ; and 
 past , the verbs must be both in the indicative : b KcoVcxf 
 
 CTQLV XXTtlvKCOVi TH S ' P 'UfAbttVf . 'lyilM {AKTVTQQ lit; «JtWC aS SOOIl 8S 
 
 Caesar had enslaved the Romans, he became hateful to them; 
 As a general Maxim, according to rule , thtis , or at 
 
 jcaTa£v^«o"Ji t/c t«c vvu-nQKirat; tm , yinrii juiiktcx: iic aurwc. 
 
 Whenever any one enslaves his Countrymen , he becomes 
 hateful to them ; ottoioq , whoever , follows the same con- 
 struction ; oVo/oc xalaWac™ a , r , k. Whoever enslaves 8$c. 
 
 When olar , d? 5 , fyc. 4 afe followed by the Aorist sub- 
 junctive, in the first, and the future Indicative , in the se- 
 cond member of a Phrase, it indicates two future consecu- 
 tive acts, or events : otoly %uwimni Q'thti &oi<; krivkipty % when he 
 has supped , ( that is shall have supped ) he will come 
 and see you. 
 
 When by two Aorists, two consecutive past events , 
 to be translated by our pluperfect , followed by what 
 M. r Murray calls our Imperfect , as in the above Phrase ;> 
 i Kouva? &. C 
 
 6. The Greeks sometimes , form a Compound future, by 
 adding the Aorist of the conjugated verb to the first form' 
 of the future of e^w , thus- ; fchu 'ix €l &*""»'*« Hq tolq mtu, bet 
 will have supped at eight. 
 
 If* the verb be active, and the object of the action be 
 expressed i they form a compound exactly similar to our 
 
 
Hi 
 6wii : OfVw 'lx il ^i*fo-vpwov to Gt$tJwint ai^ov^ I shall have read 
 your Book to morrow. 
 
 n. In French , « when the declaration of one person 
 is made by andther, that is, » in an indirect Phrase, after 
 a past tense , the present is changed into the imperfect , 
 and the future into the Conditional. In Greek, the Tensed 
 and Moods suffer no change , under such circumstances ; 
 and. we say, indifferently, in the present, h?yti , on U\u t« 
 
 luc, •jrafaW , orxv \a% o;a t* x% i(jo7T)iv (0 U dit ,• qil U kit 
 
 donnera de V argent quand il aura recu ce quon lui doit, 
 he says that he will give him Money amen he receives 
 what they owe (is due to) him; and,: in the past, tTW , 
 
 en fchti Ttf luati •srapa'SfcC , qtclv ko.&a ojcc 7* Xftucrixv . U a dit , 
 
 quil lui donnerait de V argent , quand il aiirait recu ce 
 quon lui devait , he said that he would give him Money f 
 when he received what they owed ( was due to') him. (2) 
 
 (.1) This Phrase affords a good opportunity of noticing that th# 
 indefinite expressions, on dit, it is said, People say, they say , ar<f 
 almost invariably rendered by the Vulgar in our last mode : Xsfeuv , 
 Xeid><r&^ ; Xe^exat , ^m^stron, are more refined. 
 
 (2) By whatever difference of Tense, the above Phrases may h4 
 Expressed, in the three languages, it is evident, that that they are , 
 in all, equivalent to , « he says , that when he shall « « receive, etc. , r 
 he will give etc. » and « he said , that when he should receive etc. 
 he would etc. » When the nature of the Subjunctive Mood is philoso- 
 phically considered, that, like the Imperative, it necessarily implied 
 some modification of futurity, inasmuch as obedience and consequence 
 must necessarily follow their correlatives command and hypothesis, 
 these striking anomalies of the three Languages are easily accounted 
 for , by an acquaintance with the subtHty of the humari Mind , and 
 the very different, though nearly equivalent means, by which, under 
 very varied circumstances, it reaches the same ends. I have thought 
 this opportunity of illustrating what I may have to say , in' the Ap- 
 
 fendix, on a very perplexed subject, too good to be allowed to slip • 
 have therefore given in this instance, an exact translation of Moris. 
 D. s Rule and the original French of his example; though , without 
 such an object, the Rule, to apply to English , must like some others, 
 have been entirely remodelled ; for after what has been said on the 
 peculiarities of the Modern Greek , as to the future , and' conditional 
 Tenses, Pages 5o and 108 , § 9 ,- it differs nothing , in principle , from 
 the first part of Rule 6 , though the example is transposed. 
 
SECOND PART, 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE MOOR. 
 
 I. There being no Infinitive in the Modern Grfeek , iii 
 place is supplied by the subjunctive; Uku vd wm\ je veux 
 Loire; that is to say, is used, in the three Persons, as the 
 French ii'se it in the i. d , <Sf 3. d for they can use the in 
 finitive only in the i. st ; je veux boire , and employ the 
 subjunctive in the i. d and 3. d ; je veux que tu boives, $£Vd> 
 id ttivq , je veux qu'il boive Uxu vd my ; whereas the Ancients 
 would have used the infinitive in the three Persons ; bibere 
 volo , te bibe're vblo , ilium bibere volo; 7riiin fixhcpu^ -nidv 
 
 ill (&~hQjUOLl . 7TltlV txvrov €'*?yc l uai (l) 
 
 '2. The Neuter Article rb is sometimes prefixed to the 
 Subjunctive , together with the particle vd , as a Noun ; 
 and the Subject of a Verb, as we use the Infinitive: u-,m 
 xahh to va. txGrcQdvn r/c lid tyv ttoIp/Iqi t* , it is noble ( comely ) 
 to die for one's Country. This construction facilitates the 
 iise of whole Phrases as Substantives ; thus , to vd dv-S^M^ , 
 
 KOLl VOL 6lda.£/l TIL] KOLKOL TOL 7T0Llbl0LTX , OLVTO llVCXl KOLKKWTiPOV tTT^OL VX 
 
 td x°&wy . It is better well to train (nurture ) and instruct 
 
 (i) The English in this exactly follow the Ancients; I wish to drinks 
 I wish thee, him, her, it, you, them, to drink: so in the plural, 
 We wish to drink, We wish i thee, him , her, it, them , to drink 
 This comparison with French may serve to abate , somewhat . 
 the prejudice , which many have rather hastily taken up against, the 
 Modern Greek, when it is observed, that what they have deemed 
 clumsy exists , as a very extensive anomaly , unobserved, I presume , 
 by the impugners , in one of the most cultivated languages of Mo- 
 dern Europe. There can be little doubt, that under advantages , 
 devoutly to be wished , the Greeks will gradually raise their language 
 to a rank not at all unworthy of the unrivalled Parent ; and will 
 probably unite many of the pre-eminent privileges , and much of 
 the fascinating naivete of her Infancy , with the peculiar Graces of 
 the Offspring : for it is most certain , that a great part of the in; 
 definable naivete, and playful simplicity of all Languages is due to 
 the exercise of strong Minds, and quick and brilliant Imaginations^ 
 among the' lower classes, 
 
n3 
 Children than to indulge ( fondle ) them ; to vet dycura xa- 
 ttis rr.v Gr«7f/Sa, avrr, thai i gt%(*tM &.^nv\ , to love one S GoUIllrj 
 
 \% the (i) first of Virtues, 
 
 THIRD PART. 
 of the participle; 
 
 i. Tire Active Participle undeclined agrees with all 
 numbers and genders, though not with all cases ; for it 
 tan only refer to a nominative, which is usually the sub- 
 ject of the Phrase : olvtcuq at yt/»a/klc £hi7royToic_ rev ki'vIvvov 'iyvyat , 
 these Women seeing the danger fled ; r« -sra/W ^kittovt-x^ 
 ih a'fxvSa, h^ou^av, the Children seeing the Bear trembled. 
 
 It is not the same with the present passive participle , 
 Which being declinable, in gender, case, and number, 
 agrees, with the Subject \ agtcus &1 yvtaukit , ffffivptwic re* 
 kiyIv>oy . tfvyat. 
 
 2. Whenever the undeclined participle, or the participle 
 present passive , refers to any other noun, than the sub- 
 ject of the Phrase, it is used absolutely , and expresses a 
 
 (i) Good as a Grammatical Example , and an admirable moral 
 Maxim from Cato , or any other Stoic , among the Heathens ; but 
 Christianity requires one other Virtue, at least , to have precedence, 
 the love of God , as the only solid basis of every other Virtue , the 
 onlv firm security for the performance of any of our Duties towards 
 bur Fellow Creatures , to which latter the qualifiying word Moral is 
 usually most improperly limited. Silence is by many thought equal 
 to consent. Stability of Morals , without Religious Feeling , is what 
 I cannot understand ; Mons. r David is perhaps of the same narrow 
 understanding with myself; but many of his Countrymen, and of 
 my own , I know , have long since shaken off these , as they think, 
 puerile , vulgar prejudices. Did not Arlstides feel accountability to 
 the God of Nations, who maketh empires rise and fall? Did he not 
 aet under a much higher principle, when he nobly rejected the time- 
 serving expediency and treacherous baseness of the laxly moral pa- 
 triot Themistocles ? I know thousands of my Countrymen consider it, 
 as it truly is , amongst the first of Virtues. 
 
 8 
 
i.4 
 
 circumstance attending the action : the participle passive 
 declinable is, in this case,' always in the nominative: ara^aourrjtc 
 
 (tyo) ) cItto rrir %fivfvffr , tyttvi atKrju.bc , on nry quitting ( as 
 I was setting out from J Smyrna there was an earthquake, 
 eua/uoc is the nominative of the Phrase ; o/Iolq viatic tic To x®$' lov 
 ixccy To an fa i /uxs , while we were in the Country our House 
 ivas burnt ; KoAfoptvos aiTc % k To 1fOLiri{i > hhSav o! <pi\oi ts i 
 His Friends came, while he was at Table ; vwyoLivdpivoi avroi 
 tic To x a ?' 0Y i ^ £ T° Ko-fx&i t^, their Vessel arrived while they 
 were proceeding ( on the road ) into the' Country. In the 
 three first Examples, To car fat , ol <pihoi , To xctfci£i , are the 
 Subjects of the Phrases. 
 
 CHAPTER LXIV.- 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS.' 
 
 a7]/\ or olvTc for, in exchange for , instead of , required 
 a genitive , ph a/laarcS/fyc komov dfll kolkQ , return not evil fof 
 evil ; d-Trhrnatc <piw cot?? i%$fi ; you have acquired a friend 
 instead of an Enemy, aVn rl yd for hrcu-wc, Tv vC^Xnc instead of 
 commending you insult him. 
 
 In composition , it signifies ( against ) ctmjcefycwf , op- 
 posite; dvTtixicc, the reverberation of the Sun; i. (before:) 
 
 aVr/Vfo^Gef, the day before yesterday ; 3. ( Imitation y 
 
 counterfeit : J dvTiv.Ktili , a false key. 
 
 Atah (from, by, ) governs the accusative; this preposition 
 indicates ( the point of departure / ) 'i$x o P LOLl d&i rb vr'aw, 
 I come from the Town ; — - — 2. (The origin, J avry i k&k; 
 <sra$dytTxi dwl rd e'mwjW ? this word is derived from An. 1 Greek; 
 To thufict a<aro Toy <pfhov pv , I have received it from my friend ; 
 tl/jLardTTo %y -ww ; ( I am/'/ om sleep, ) I have just awakened^ 
 lam just, (hardly) awake - — -- 3. (apart:) w/aWV aVo to 
 
 X*fh ^ e him by the hand ; — 4- ( abstraction ) $V«c aVo 
 
 7kto to nfb % I have drunk some of this water ; woiec dno lo-ac t* 
 %kaf*t; which of ( from amongst ) you did it? — — ? 5. ( the /nat- 
 ter: )xvtt« «V» piwyp*, a cup of gold ( a golden cup ) yi/udfa 
 
1 1 J 
 &h rife, full of water; see p. 102 , § 6. — * — 6. ( the efficient 
 cause : tt*&* : - ; -'~^ '■"' *ty<**, he died of thirst; tmlw Qprnr, 
 of fever • €*%? wmtiQn «tVo ^w A'%?hM<z, Hector was killed 
 
 bv Achilles; ixffyfht tesrl % citot %; he hid himself 
 
 through fear; 7. ( division, allotment : jea'Os s-t^t/ s^ej 
 
 aWo '"-/a rr/Jaa-ra, each House has three Stories ; ( is of 
 three Stories ) % lt77rtcv ( * v*/ ) &s»d€fca -, fsa& , g'i^c&z rhn^: , 
 
 tt'^tvt kci-tIi Z7TQ Tfix yfofjici rlr y.xhha, the supper co,??.? twelve 
 Piastres, we are four, that is three. Piastres a head; (three 
 
 Piastres therefore fall to each) -8. ( an epoch pas %) 
 
 lie la\ Sw etc* T* ya»/ti«, two hours after dinner; aV« jcrec 
 thenceforth : aV« rvfa , Jtai £/'c to §£«c, henceforth ; Thus, 
 in dates , the genitive also ; awi Xfifftv, after Christ ; ik fa 
 y/ wa cxra/tcTia aVi Xf^ 7 ^ 1 1600 after Christ; ol-to xz.to£om.c 
 
 noaiiv , fr°™ the foundation of the World ; 9. 
 
 ( time ) cIttq gfctlns , at nightfall 
 
 In composition aW , marks, 1 . [separation, ejection) 
 
 a 7 s!;m a , I throw away , reject ; a*™** ; getting up from 
 his recumbent position , as a Man from a couch or bed, 
 a Hare from her seat, <%e. , — — 2, Privation : ) aVarfip^ec 
 
 inhuman; 3. ( cessation :J sVi^aya?. they have finished 
 
 eatm^; aTtvz?-*-' a Uxxuff/a^ the Mass is finished [ the church 
 has chaunted, the Church service is over, ) 
 
 Aia • this Preposition governs both genitive and accusa- 
 tive • with the Genitive it signifies, ( through, across , by I 
 W irr&iTWfAOL i-r'ifzsn Idlm irehiTziaf, the army passed through 
 the Citv : vhh hd fytfis , h* Ukx-jt.; , he came by Sea, hy 
 L an d-- — _ 2. it indicates the [means) &£%' corefxa &nt S 
 &*« f&, I sent it you, by ( means of) my servant : we may say 
 
 in Greek Id ^ww ; With the Accusative it indicates i. st 
 
 ( the final cause : ) %*p* to Id yf^i u* , do it for my sake; 
 .ATTiUn hi rn* vuTfiloL , he died for his Country ; *yk$§urcc 
 raZra -rx t&idz Id tIt eScxfel fin , I bought these books for 
 mv Brotlier ; Id cropa tv Walfa e\s, *) &afanaxu p in tlie name 
 of your Father ^ for your Father's fame's sake , I intreat 
 you* Tx^hvu , Id d pd% fym yxwmwe , he travels to acquire 
 foreign languages , — — 2. ( the efficient cause h uphdh 
 
n6 
 
 ilvarvx^i , he has become unfortunate through Idleness / 
 ( or Carelessness ) ; al \7ra1yil hx to (p'^ci/u'oy <r* , I commend 
 you for your behaviour* e/^ua/iyyuAV, tyyvtl>y.ai h'avTbv, I pledge 
 
 myself for him ; 3. ( the end: ) ipfotvtrt hd %* U'okiy, 
 
 lie has set out for Constantinople; hot tt* thai olv\o VkctQciGy; 
 whither is this Vessel bound; — — 4- ( the subject) ow 
 upihQvQLv hd Tr'ohiuLoy , they talked of nothing but War ; 1/ eac 
 fcxfvtlcu h olv% ; What think you of this ? 
 
 In composition it signifies, through) thoroughly, distribu- 
 tion ; it implies also intenseness of the simple. 
 
 E/c ( in , into ) requires uniformly the Accusative; kxQouou 
 tk % Kfijbfrain , t keep my bed; vyyaivco s/V to ^^oxuoy , I ant 
 going to School, 
 
 By ellipse of the Accusative , it sometimes appears in 
 immediate contact with the Genitive: wycum tU ™ 'OUovby.* , 
 I am going to OEconomus', to' ctWt/-, house, understood. 
 
 KolIol, governs both genitive and accusative. Witli the 
 Genitive 3 it indicates opposition, contrariety : avTcc uyi'hwi 
 xolJcc cm , he spoke against you; %1'vri 7roh\d Kurd tcov r^aiKar , 
 he said much against, spoke much to the disadvantage of ? 
 the Greeks : With the Accusative , it signifies in , or at r 
 and expresses conformity : tccff \v.iaov %* xaifor , at that time 
 xefldlov TfOTTov. 7K7cv y in tliis manner; xa\d %; vfywc, according^ 
 to the laws; xald %v yvcoym yx % in my opinion ; tafia. (rvyfitfiwk, 
 by accident, accidentally. 
 
 In composition , in addition to the above senses , it 
 augments the force of an adjective : KUTa^n^ , very dry ;-' 
 tf«?'xc7r%0Q , very white. 
 
 Me , with, requires the accusative, and indicates union: 
 irtryaivw f*« aJr«c , I am going with them ; and the name of 
 the instrument or matter, with which any thing is done : 
 yfdyco yX ri xovhJhi, y.1 to fjLihdvi , I write with the Pen r 
 with Ink, 
 
 Mcra, after, requires the'accusative; flat 'ikfy ynd 7fc?«-' vu'ifan f 
 he will come in ( after ) three days. 
 
 In composition it signifies change : to lyndnmva , 
 I- repent it : ( I have changed my mind about It ) : 
 
«*7 
 pi.7 (l$'1kkq , I change ; fjaroi^xivu , I change position, pasf 
 
 from place to place. 
 
 Ea*a, contracted from k$avoi, is used only in composition , 
 .and indicates reiteration ,&s re, in English: jSMsrw I see ; 
 %a.va$\i7T(j) I review, 
 
 ITa^a, than., and also , against , as the inverse of kxtol 
 according to* admits only of the accusative: lh iTiz -ruf iibiti4v 9 
 I have seen no other than him; Trap <pv'<riv, against nature , 
 wtLfd tvc v'oum; , against the laws. 
 
 It is sometimes a conjunction , and always marks dif- 
 ference , aS CLKKOL,, (ACt y but : llV fJM TO U7TtV (plhOQ GM , TTCLfd 
 
 6 dlihfbe fjLM ; it was not your friend, but my, Brother who 
 told ( it) me; Sex dtau crotpfa , cra^a loxw'trotpoc , he is not wise, 
 but thinks himself so; llv rlv hKoracriv Olkkoc , ifdod Hwof , no 
 other than he killed him : here the accusative does not 
 follow rafct, because it is., in this instance, a conjunction (i) 
 and not a preposition. It might without solecism be re- 
 garded as a preposition , and the accusative put after it , 
 
 tiV 70V tOKQTZiCKJtV CLKKOQ 7T3{> 'iXiTyOV blLt tlilS WOuld lead tO 
 
 ambiguity , which ought to be carefully avoided. 
 
 This preposition is oeasionally seen constructed with a 
 genitive , signifying the efficient cause ; j3/£a/w rynaxJliv 
 mtfft 7v relit , a Book composed by such a one. 
 
 It is sometimes purely intensive : iJvm vctod ttokkol \u\bc ;» 
 lie is exceedingly silly , an exceedingly great fool ; and in this 
 case often retracts its accent , and becomes paroxytonon ; 
 era pa 7rohXa ao>ao?. 
 
 In composition it preserves analogous senses of change, 
 opposition , intension : ttjLfaLiofioc , illegal ; TrafaSdiva , 
 / transgress ; to. va.^nhbm , he exaggerates ; avrd ro £/- 
 Qhiov fxl 7rocfAfbu . this book pleases me exceedingly. 
 
 Ufo\ before , since ', requires the genitive ; wp w'mi ypifQr 
 five days since. 
 
 (i) If not a solecism, it does great violence to the plainer princi- 
 ples of grammatical Analysis to consider it a preposition. Habit very 
 naturally , as in our own language , leads to the Offence ; but it 
 certainly is a great offence against precision and perspicuity, wliicll 
 are virtues of the very fin>t rank ; in writing and speaking. 
 
u& 
 
 It has in composition the same sense: TfopQdw, I antici- 
 pate, arrive before, get the start of. 
 
 Tlfk, towards, governs the accusative only ; Ttaydlm tt(oq : 
 xvtov , I am going towards. ( to.) him l£id , nfe t*"Iq&% x&^'oe, 
 on the right, going towards that Village; 
 
 It has the same sense in composition : nfwrxakS' , I invite^ 
 (call towards ); i Yly.rfic o-«c tt^kxm:, your Country invites, 
 you ;- 7rf07Tfixo % 1 run towards , I have recourse to. 
 
 rVsf, governs both genitive and accusative : With the- 
 genitive it signifies, ^c^/or the sake of, in favor of: b kfoc 
 %'oX Q s ciTTtfavi v?nr. Tve woLTftlog , the sacred Band ( Battalion ). 
 died for their Country :. u?ri ttokko. jVep £#«., he spoke much 
 ( said many things.) in my favour; In this sense , it is tfo& 
 inverse of kutcI. 
 
 With the Accusative , it signifies beyond , above: dvrh 
 to' '(coov £# unlf 7vV ^riila. x$'o™t ; r l us animal lives above thirty 
 years ; ^->y>i J/rsp rd Itxz/avjvx he exceeds his limits, he goes: 
 beyond his Sphere ; It preserves in Composition the same 
 significations: ^^aanilpuxai %v F^kkclIoc, they defend Greece; 
 liTnopxird rx oftot ; he exceeds the limits. 
 
 Other Prepositions are , amongst V/riters., in use in 
 Composition of Words , and are sometimes met with, 
 detached; but these all savour of Hellenism , and their 
 senses, and governing influence must be sought in Hellenic- 
 Dictionaries and Grammars, 
 
 CHAPTER XLV. 
 
 Of ADVERBS.. 
 
 i. Many adverbs admit of two modes of construction, ac- 
 cording to the nature of the Words with which they are- 
 united. I.° When they are followed by a substantive, or pro- 
 noun , not monosyllabic , they are connected, by a preposi- 
 tion , governing its usual case : II. ° When followed by the 
 monosyllabic personal pronoun, the pronoun, without pre- 
 position, is in the genitive, and as usual enclitic ; Such 
 
are pxty , with ; noyrd , near ; irxva upon ; vttokxIco , un- 
 der ; oV/<r<» behind; e/^oV, before: Thus ; with the aid of 
 a preposition, we say 0a tray a petty pi %v <p,t\ov pv , I am going, 
 I shall go, with my Friend; h cuthybg ^ nrov ttovrd t/'c ipi* my 
 Brother was near me ; To o-Kctpvl uvea vTrokofia tig ro r^ot-ni^i , 
 the stool is under the Table; otariva. i*i rh w^tm , behind 
 the door ; rh ^hkira iurrfog tig tpivot 7 I see him before me ; 
 with the enclitic , thus ; Qx vrxya petty r« , I shall go with 
 him ; tth*-<pk p* Irov xovroi pv. My brother was near me ; 
 etvTvi yi KC7ri\hcilh tvef K"2ppta.v x*? iv >i7r 0LvQ ty}q this Girl has riot 
 a charm about her ; rh w$w vvroKctra tk , I found him under 
 it ; asr' o'sr/o-fi) r« , behind it ; ph irt^xatg aw tpvrfa pM , do 
 not go in front of me: the two last preserve the preposition, 
 but it precedes the adverb, 
 
 2. Tf/yJfv, or Tpyv^Q around , is, with pronouns, con- 
 structed in the latter mode only ; r$iyvox pv , r$iyv?v p&g ; it 
 may, with Nouns, be constructed with an accusative, pre- 
 ceded by a preposition; Tf*yy$H tig. ro" vttyiti, tig ro dpTrtht p* , 
 around my house , my Vineyard. 
 
 3. E w wf , till , unto, requires the accusative, with a pre- 
 position ; lag tig rh xfcivby , unto Heaven ; though sometimes 
 before Nouns, and invariably before other Adverbs , the 
 preposition is omitted ; "tat <w$ior , till to morrow ; tag r'ort, 
 till then ; "tag vrbri ; till when? 
 
 4- The indicating Adverb vol, there, lo ! behold ! is 
 followed by both Nominative and Accusative ; by the fpr_— 
 mer , when the word is of more than one syllable ; by 
 the latter , when it is the enclitic personal pronoun : v&l 
 b dliKtpbc o-y , there is your Brother ; m rov , there he is. 
 
 Followed by ©■«, it marks astonishment ; p Wx^x-itxKtutg 
 rbtrov, \tl <r ro %a<ro- t o-y ro t$aKot\ vd Try liv ro Q'lhtig TTktov , you have 
 so often begged me to give it you , T have given it you, and 
 now forsooth you no longer wish it. ( will have it. ) 
 
 5. The adverb of time vrort , never ; with what strikes 
 me as singularly happy brevity , and a most graceful 
 energy, assumes the monosyllabic personal pronoun, as an 
 enclitic ; l\v rh ilia wort p* , I never saw him in my life ; 
 
J ox* 
 We arrive , perhaps, at something very near this energetic, 
 turn , by reversing the natural order of the Words « In my 
 life, I never saw him ; and in our impassioned stile , by a 
 beautiful reiteration ; Never , no , Never , shall I see him 
 more. The Greeks would here like ourselves , reiterate ; 
 vot\ 7TC76 {am , lh $d rov tRS. Again , never in their lives did 
 they harm him, lh rh 'Ifihz^av -nonk r«c, the sentence com- 
 pleted would run , as in English , ttotI tk th <W tw? . 
 
 6. The Privative Adverbs x u Vs > $''X?>fi > without; take 
 the Accusative • li^uc vmv , without judgment , x&fii Tre ¥ K 
 without Talent. 
 
 •7. The Interjection oIkkoi^ovov , Alas ! is followed some- 
 times by the preposition tk , and its case: olkkoIuoyov i'k i^ha \ 
 woe is me ! to ye ! bravo ! sometimes by file enclitic personal; 
 pronoun ; wy'i qm\ bravo! well done! bravely! and in the, 
 plural, ilyi TWf ! English the same as in the singular. 
 
 8. Met is used in oaths, and solemn asseverations, and ne- 
 gations ; ju.ee 7vv TriaiLv {am } Um rh fio$m % t ^ Faith, I'll, support 
 ( stand by ) him; /ud rh Gm Ih rh %Bol , On my honor, As, 
 Heaven is my witness, I have not seen him. 
 
 9. a'c is constructed with both the Indicative a.n& Subjunc-. 
 live; with the latter , independent of its imperative import^ 
 it indicates permission , consent to something that has not 
 yet occurred ; with the Indicative , adherence , assent, to, 
 something already effected : thus , when I say , ai rh ndpy , 
 let him do it, I signify that, without being much interested 
 about the matter, I have no objection to it \ but if I say , h 
 to iKCLjUi , let him have done it , be. it so , suppose, him to, 
 have done it, <^c. I imply that I am not against it , I am** 
 not displeased, though I do not approve it; «V , with the* 
 present of the Subjunctive, indicates consent to, the continua- 
 tion of what is taking place at the time we speak: ac rhlii^n 
 let him beat him; ( set about beating him, ) ac toy li^, 
 let him continue beating him. See Chap/ l\i , § 2. 
 
 10. A'V is also optative; «c a&aftS v% rov ^otvmtco f kolI ti&ufc 
 «f cLTroQy'vu ; the optative of the pathetic language of Jacob , 
 on regaining a sight of his Son Joseph. ? let me but se& 
 flint before I ( and immediately ) die x 
 
*i. There are, in Greek, three negations, l\v and 'o\t » t 
 Vulgarly 'cyitKi , and the prohibitive juf, , vulgarly ptiV 
 l\y is always connected with a verb and is never used 
 independently , or alone ; lit fchu , I will not ; cyi on the 
 contrary always, and it answers to our adverb No ; to Biiiit^ 
 do you wish it? 'o\i % No. Ah, is used only with the Indi% 
 cative, and ^ with the Subjunctive and Participle \ )M rh 
 Wyjv<~<;, dont praise him; ySiv ovrat; ^a^aercc, not being accus- 
 tomed. Thus in negative Imperative i. e. Prohibitory Phrases, 
 it is always requisite to use the Subjunctive after /uvi ; 
 ufa T9v xtittcIs, dont beat him i. e. leave off beating him \ 
 Uiv rov kTVTrwrx dont beat him i. e. dont set about beating 
 him. See Chap J 42 , §. 2. 
 
 12. d'yj and { un form Negative Conjunctions , S'r« , yMri, x 
 neither, nor; \h 'ix u * 7e n f° > * T * ^jfi'» I have neither Water- 
 nor bread. In such Phrases as these , where the Negative 
 is conjunctive, Custom is in favor of ^n , even with the 
 Indicative: thus, it is most usual to say, llv i%v nfo r f/.y\n 
 ^uyJ , I have neither water nor bread ; and with a dou- 
 ble negative , thus ; Xh \yv y.v\rt va^'o , juvn -^uyJ' though are 
 would be more correct. With greater reason, in the subjunc-- 
 tive , lh G^'aw voi rh ila , film vx rov o^ihwco , / will neither 
 see , nor speak to him ; and with a double Negative, lit 
 
 $ko , yvirt vol toy ilco , p.hn vd -rov by.iKy,<jo. 
 
 i3. From these Negatives are also formed , *S* and yull, 
 in which the particle os answers to our, even, so much as; 
 lh rh ytto$i£ii , $e rov t^fe, he neither /mows, nor has ever 
 even seen him, ( So much as seen him. J Instead , of, 
 these Intensives , it is very common, however incorrect , 
 to use the conjunctives «h and /uyP,i , particularly the lat- 
 ter : Ih \x°^ y p*> Ti n f° £/ V to ennTi. IFe have not even (wot ) 
 Vv T ater in the House. 
 
 i3. The Affirmative Particles Na/ , Na/Vxs answer to our 
 yes ; 's'^e/c -^uiai ; have you Bread? Na/ , yes. Mcu/o-ra is 
 much in use as an affirmative , particularly intensively. 
 
 1 4- It is considered more elegant to answer by re- 
 peating the Verb in the Question , particularly , if affir- 
 
122 
 
 matively ; thus , t^c/c -^opf ; have you any Bread? e^<y ,' 
 I have ; i%us ro £i2h!ov ; have you the Book ? % ^x Q t 
 I have; ayJhwu; rlc <p/\«f /uac ; did you speak to, or have 
 you conversed with our Friends ? r«c auiKwoi I did , 
 I have; %ft& rh dlih^'ov ^ ; Did you see my Brother? rov 
 tlloL , I did; When the Noun governed is definite , the 
 Article must accompany the Verb in the Answer ; thus : 
 'ix^s '^ol(tI ; Have you any JFine ? ep^o , / have ; tyi* T0 
 Kfuaf ; Have you the JFine ? To lx w > I have. 
 
 lb. "law , perhaps , when referring to a future time , 
 is constructed with the Aorist of the Subjunctive ; 't'troo; 'l\h y 
 perhaps he will come ; /W rov iS»c , perhaps you will 
 see him. 
 
 1 6. The comparative particle cjo-ar , Vulgarly <rdv , like", 
 just like, is followed by the accusative, though preceded 
 
 by a nominative ; ol <p/hoi cry uwi adv tx$ kqkvs , your friends 
 are seemingly ( just like ) fools, 
 
 17. Many Adverbs such as nowd , much , xa,\a , well ; 
 trvyyi, often ; 7TfUTct, first ; wkokcl , easily; Ivmokol , with 
 difficulty , are compounded with Verbs , particularly if 
 employed negatively, lb % cvxvo£hZ7ro, I dont see him often; 
 ctv -lov xxKoyvopilu , I dont know him well ; y.h fd noxv^cL-hilrc 
 dont worry me, pester me, turn my brain, orav rov 7rfa>Toul% 
 when I first saw him ; avrb ro g$y£w« Ivcytohoavofyti , this 
 trunk opens with difficulty, tuxoKoayofyu , opens easily. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVI. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 1. The copulative koli , and, is sometimes substituted 
 
 IOr VOL' TTCuC Yl{A.7T0$U KXl KCif/.CiTCil fit T0<TW l}-(JTY t </ ; llOW Can llQ 
 
 sleep amidst such heat ? aal is here substituted for m , in 
 appearance only ; for it imports much more : since, if vet 
 were used, the Verb would imply merely the possibility of 
 the thing , and would therefore be in the Aorist of the 
 .Subjunctive , ttco; iuTSfil rl mfinftqi instead of which it e.^ 
 
presses , not only the possibility , but the actual or present 
 occurrence, which is its principal force; xu/mi, he sleeps; 
 the possibility , 7tq$ riyyroftT, is but accessory. 
 
 The Particle teal, has a very nearly similar acceptation, 
 in certain elliptical Phrases , demanding an explanation, 
 of something unpleasant ? or questionable : ti wxyx , y.at 
 iluai aifAikm ; what liave I done , that I am ( should be 
 called ) idle ? rt kolkov ry.xy.iv h UtfixKyc , koli hrov tv^xwoi; ; 
 What harm did Pericles do , that he was ( should be 
 deemed \ a Tyrant ? 
 
 This Particle is also employed as the correlative of 
 y'ohiQ , hardly , scarcely, when the Phrase indicates two 
 immediately consecutive events ; y'oxi; tov tTlxv vM toy 
 izTixvzv. They hardly caught sight of him before they 
 seized him, 
 
 2. Mlv , and ll , mark opposition between two Phrases, 
 two Ideas , as our indeed , it is true , / grant , 8$e. , 
 followed by but , but surely , fyc. ; yixfov yh , x*? hv ^ ■> 
 small indeed , but lovely. 
 
 3. a'V , if; or™, when; gtotolv , whenever ; «V I , as soon 
 as , from the moment 8$c. : See Page 109 , § 5. 
 
 4- A/or/ , because , compounded of Irx and v,n , an4 
 kwnlyi , whereas , since , inasmuch as , are causatives ; 
 rov ayot.7rc0 h'on tivxi kslkoc , I love him because he is good * 
 to Ukq &-arul)i jx cLpiu I wish it, or / will have it because > 
 ( since , inasmuch as ) it pleases me. 
 
 tfift&H , answers also to our for ( french , car ) which 
 is a stronger expression than the former, and implies a 
 1 md of appeal Xlv tov yvuffid, e^eiSw Ih tov uIol srore^ I know 
 him not, ( how should I ) for I never saw him. 
 
 On and vac both mean that ; but the first is simply 
 l\ trrative , or affirmative ; whereas vx must be used , 
 whenever any influence of one action upon another is to be 
 indicated; xtyn on l phos yxs iTrviyn, he says that our Friend 
 Las been drowned ; Ktyii oti to Uku , he says that he wishes 
 it ; vo. could not be used in either of the above Phrases : 
 but , I fished that he should see it , I ordered lnai not 
 
is*4 
 
 to come ; lie did all in his power to arrive in time ■ are 
 Phrases that must he all translated with vd : n^Ka. va. to ilH, 
 
 tcuTo; , izor^oara^cc va /xhv USr, Ixxy.i to Ivvxtov vol <p(ix'<7)7 t/'c kik^, 
 
 Instead of in the Vulgar very commonly use ttjq- kiyu 
 htJc thai x.*hQs , he says that you are good. 
 
 6. After Verhs signifying fear , ^, and yn^ru; are sub- 
 stituted for on , with the Indicative , if referring to any 
 thing present or past ; with the Subjunctive , if to any 
 thing future ; yofrurai fwvus x^V 7 *f 7r*fdltc , he is afraid 
 of losing ( lest he should, that he may lose ) his Money ; 
 fop>t7Txi y.YiTTQQ b Qihoc; ts \h 'tkh he is afraid that his Friend 
 rnay not come ; <pcfiuTai (ifa^ ?wc lx u!Ji > he is afraid that 
 he has ( may have ) lost them. 
 
 7. Thence it is , that ymwQQ , at the commencement of 
 Phrases , is expressive of fear, approbation , conjecture; 
 fxy.woc lh ifJ.ya.7ra, perhaps ( I fear ) he does not love me ; 
 &fimw da; iwiifa^ci, perhaps, ( I fear ) / have disturbed, mo- 
 lested you. 
 
 Instead of py-rcds, the Vulgar say ^<£c kui ; ttu; v.a\ Xh to 
 foV ; Would you not wish it? perhaps you would not 
 wish it, 
 
 8. The particle art forms a remarkable Idiotism (1), when 
 prefixed to a Verb in an independent Phrase; for it in- 
 dicates , that the action expressed by the verb has just 
 occurred at the instant of speaking ; on fann^M , I have 
 this instant risen ; on 'iyvyi , he is but this instant gone out. 
 
 In analogy with the above sense , it has that of phm? , 
 hardly , scarcely , and answers to the same correlative 
 *ai* oTi tldi rev £^9^or r« , kou t^JQjf t7rclvQ % , he scarcely 
 saw his enemy , before , he rushed upon him<> similar to 
 the AncientPhras.es utvidi, ut peril \ dg tllov , os/tppm. 
 
 (1) I fear this Word may appear pedantic ; but Idiom and Idiotism, 
 m speaking of languages, are of such very different extent in their 
 Import , that they never ought to be confounded. The idiom of a 
 language is its general distinctive character : an Idiotism is a sin-, 
 gular exception, a departure from that character, either partial ? g* 
 originating with the Vulgar. 
 
h5 
 
 C). Aid rot ( lid indicating the final cause ) signifies td 
 the intent that . for the purpose of : See page 1 1 5 $ 
 
 iqrijyt t/f rm TclXKixv bid vl ux^v ifa icttotiLW , he IS gone tO 
 
 France to study Medicine. 
 
 10. Ml to id , by means of, is very little in use ; it ig 
 belter to form the Phrase either with the participle, or with 
 the particles hon, fjre/Sw ; thus instead of /ul to yd u(xxi a^«fff#c 
 lit lyu bftZir f heing indisposed I have no appetite, it is 
 better to say , oVtclc a p fez tot , or kTruw , hhi upon kwu- 
 
 vtqs , x. T. K. 
 
 ii. Independent of its other meanings, the particle yd 
 constructed with the Imperfect of the Indicative is expres- 
 sive of desire, or regret of something wanting ; rx Jtw %i: 
 rvto to ttotfsohi yJx KaBotfd £fu'<wc, that there were a clear spring 
 in this Garden ; vx r,rov v\ E\aj«c §Aeu9loot, 7/ ey aoopof 'ct^ if8f*t 
 
 ytvv. What a beautiful place ( Country ) would Greece 
 become were it but free ! This Phrase shews its close 
 analogy with ay. 
 
 12. This Particle forms with the verb 'i%a , joined to 
 iSouns of number, and of time , a very peculiar Idiotism; 
 *X W T f e?c *f**t«K '& rh ila , it is three days since I saw 
 him , or I have not seen him these three days ; t%ii 
 T^7f tCbo/idltz yd ea-0h , he has not been these three Weeks. 
 For such phrases , the following turn , with dp I and the 
 negative Sir , is preferable ; thou TftTc y\A^xir dy y lly toy ulx. 
 
 1 3. fi'ati ( to the degree ) that) is a correlative ttf th-3 
 adverbs 1mm , to such a degree; xtco , So; and the pro- 
 noun TOMTOC > SUcli; thoU TC70V XTXlliVTOC , UTTi o£K V%tV PU flYl i 
 
 yd Six^m , he is so illiterate that he knows not even how 
 to read. 
 
 i4- The Vulgar use b-arv instead of 2«t*. As to /ay) , Sea 
 the preceding Chapter § 11. 
 
 1 5. A"»a, Ac/Tor , then , and the latter with the Article, ' 
 to koivov , o6t> (therefore , wherefore , whence, on that or 
 on which account, ) are conclusive particles ; dtxnmi , «fa Jy , 
 he breathes , he therefore is alive ; tL*irri{v , olohl v. xUi 
 it smokes, it $ therefore , burns : Komh is more in use it* 
 
\a6 
 
 longer Phrases ; q KXifa tTvai ttok-Atiucv vr^dyixi %h TfsVo \oirh 
 vd rh x^ VC0 H iU Time is precious we ought not therefore 
 to waste it. 
 
 1 6. A'yzuhd is used in resuming discourse , and in mo- 
 difying what has been said ; kxkx nd^yuz kol) puyftdnig y.i-xv 
 rtytwr , dyKcchd lit art xgu&fyroit , faii^i WtKiig '£%ii yd (wm , VOU 
 are right in learning a Trade , or Art , though, indeed 
 ( rigorously speaking ) you need not, since you will have 
 wherewith to live. 
 
 in', M' okov on , /uoKoy hm , although , is an Italicism $ 
 contuttociocche ; \h (2 dfttr'tt y okov o7tm iTthu ivuoopis , lie 
 does not please me , though handsome ; dv kal although ; 
 (A aV'ffe/, clv nil curxHfLos ; he pleases me, though ordinary ^ 
 Or plain. The Verb may be used* pafto-u , %» kx! uvol-. *fx*ifMc* 
 though the former turn is more concise and elegant ; 
 P okov ry to , vet , notwithstanding , however , in spite of 
 all that ; tlrcu &k&&iqg , (/.l okov %to llv (Hkco vd Toy ftdm ; he is 
 rich ; but yet I will not have him ; we may also say ( ul 
 'Skol tx Id h-kxtyi lb Ssku yd Toy vrdyoo, notwithstanding, or in 
 spite of ( or with ) all his riches , I will not have him. 
 
 18 KaV , rx\dxi?Tov , at least; yfd^i rov y.dv y.fx ypfitp/r^ 
 write him, at leasts a short letter ; kxv is peculiarly ap- 
 propriate , after the conjunction »• tt^ttu td rev b/uiKwrg , 
 ri vJly yd rov yfd-^rig , jou must speak to him, or at least ( at 
 any rate ) write to him. 
 
 19. u Oao>c, But , however , often commences, butj more 
 elegantly, closes a Phrase ; iTvxt clvtiIoq oycog lly ul ytd/xvn vd 
 yiKa , he is smart, ( sprightly , quick at repartee , ) 
 but yet he does not make me laugh ; also, l(v y\ adyvu vd: 
 
 ytKoJ ou'jjc. 
 
 20. AKKa, TtKiu , but * tTvoii ibfiop<p6C~j d\hd llv 'i%it Grtgvjud, 
 
 he is handsome , but he has no talent ; yl dyx-n-d ? 7tkv\y lit 
 
 QihuVov vdftt, he loves me, but I will not have ( marry ) him. 
 
 •21. TTf/V , 7rfo rx vd , before, till, require the A 'oris t of 
 
 the Subjunctive', %h QtKco yd rh oyiKwu, Trfiv hx&daa to fitp>K(ov tk, 
 
 or &fi rJ vd haficiea k. t. k. I will not speak to him before, 
 ( till ) I have read his Book, 
 
*li. eV « , tk xcLtfbv ot*-, cVra; , while, whilst, meanwhile, 
 meantime , are both conjunctions and adverbs of time ; 
 Ah f/dydTTxc h u d kglt fives + you do not love me , whilst 
 I adore you ; the two other conjunctions are considered 
 less elegant ; ih xoujor ecr* hro? tlr T o •GrtpiQohi ry , i^moty ot 
 xteflou , no.} cthtzo-oiY to (TTYjn , Thieves entered , while he 
 was in his Garden , and stript the house ; oyrae It€^4^5w 
 vs t° yu&& i wA0e to K*t?xGi tv , whilst he was walking along 
 the beach , or shore, his vessel arrived. It is unnecessary i 
 I presume , to notice that otrac is the undeclinable participle 
 of the Verb Substantive. This being known, the Reader 
 will , by referring to page Ii3, § 2, see this turn of 
 Phraseology explained , and the principles on which the 
 participle otr-xs is substituted for a conjunction* 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 SECTION r. 
 
 What in the following remarks, particularly on accent, may to 
 fiie learned appear superfluous or trifling , will, I an (old, be 
 very acceptable to those who know nothing of Ancient Greek, ani 
 study the Modern for practical purposes only. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 -As some of the forms of Letters in use are, in the Alphabet, 
 emitted , it will be necessary, as far as the means of printing .will 
 allow, to add them. 
 
 After l read another form £ , after , 3- after 77 , <& , after ? , p. 
 
 The Letters and o> have no exactly equivalent representatives in 
 English : they have both one sound, between the o in bond and bone 
 English •, and as nearly as I can represent it , that of o in bonnet 
 French, or bonnie Scotch. 
 
 SYLLABICATION, s 
 
 As the Nouns and Verbs declined and conjugated are divided with a 
 view of* distinctly marking the variable part of the Word , and the 
 accented Vowel, the-Ruies for distributing the Consonants have not 
 hztu there observed : they are the following. 
 
 A Single Consonant is to be written with the following Vowel 5 
 as cps-fto, Xo'-j'OSj a-vc-ixo;. 
 
 Doubled consonants are to be divided between the preceding and 
 following Vowels, thus, 3x-Xoi ^Xwc-ca. 
 
 Compounds when, divided, are to be divided into their component 
 parts, thus, ££~flX6ov> cuv-s»-^svo{iai , Kuvo'o-oupot , Trpo-s-Tarra, »£-re. 
 
 All combinations of letters found at the beginning of Words ori- 
 ginally Greek (1) when in the middle , are to be written with the 
 following Vowel , as M-r.tu £-t$cp.o?. 
 
 All other combinations are divided between the preceding and 
 subsequent Vowels, as 07-^00; ? ai^-ao?, eVto; 3 wcp6-»os. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 As some idea of the Ancient quantity of Vowels is necessary for 
 readily determining the change and movement of the Accent, I sliail 
 subjoin the Ancient Distribution of the Letters. 
 
 (l) o£ cX 'Zi 7X 7? S[j. oi 3~o 6>, 6v 6p *X m y.s xr {iv tz\ izv tcj ttt co 
 t3 ns. <s>.\ V'j, ott s~X <s~ era co citf cy^ tX tii. Tp <j-3 <?X op yQ •/}, m £i x,P» 
 
 9 
 
VOWEIS \1S*D DIPHTHONG.*?, $OUSONAS$£ 
 
 Loilg Y! W (J ( Soft * * 
 
 Short s o 
 Doubtful a i u 
 Diphthongs long (i) 
 
 9 Mute I Middle p 
 
 ( Aspirated <p ^ 6 
 4 Liquid X pt v ' f 
 3 Double £ ^ V 4s 
 i Called Solitary § 
 The Accent should always be placed over the iast Vowel of a 
 Diphthong. 
 
 There is an error of the press , page 6 , 6 £a(3o$ instead of 6 Xfl$'<k 
 which affords a fair opportunity of explaining more distinctly the 
 circumstances in which alone the grave accent is to be used. All syl- 
 lables are accounted grave that have no mark of Accent ; but the 
 sign of the grave accent is never used ? unless as a substitute for the 
 aeiite , when acuted Monosyllables , or Words acuted on their last 
 syllable , are followed by other Words (2) in the course of a Period: 
 a^£}/po'ij p.vj £sv ef^ev tov dd'eXtfov too Kupioo (3 , aXXa tov tou Koptoo A 
 athXaov , My Brother did not see M> B's but M. r D's Brother -J- 
 iififi to [3i[3Xw ; Who took the Book ? T ( el^e ; What did he say ? 
 In the first instance achX^o? retains its primitive sign of acute accent, 
 being followed by an enclitic ; in the second it assumes the sign of 
 the grave , being in the midst of a period , and not followed by an 
 enclitic ; in the third it resumes its primitive ■ sign , being at the 
 close of a period! 
 
 GENERAL RULES FOR ACCENTING HOUNS. (3) 
 
 r. a OXYTONA Isosyllahic become Perispomena in the Gen. S. and 
 
 PL /see T.ii.i p. 16, and in all cases ending in vj of the" 3. d Declension.' 
 
 See euXa^T,?. 
 
 2V Imparisjilabic of more than one syllable (4) become paroxytona 
 m all increasing cases. (5) See -r^u-piv, and perispomena in all cases' 
 ending in %\- and ey. See BaatXeu? p. 24. 
 
 (1) Except a.: and 6 i final, and, in the Fulgar Form of the Imperfect 
 Tense Passive go, as e^pcfyou-jAouv , coov , etc. 
 
 (2) The Interrogatives T t? ti, and acuted finals followed by Enclitics 
 are the only exceptions. The above Rule , and the exceptions prove 
 most clearly that the variations of tone must have been very nicely; 
 observed by the Ancients. 
 
 (3) See page 8 , line 6. 
 
 (4) For Monosyllables increasing. See page 28, §. r. 
 
 (5) Except "-yuvvi irregular. See p. 1 35, and Nouns having their final 
 long, which, in all cases, circumflex a long penult before a short finaL 
 See creorrip page 23 , §• 2. 
 
3. PARQXYTONA Isosyllabic become Perispbmcna in the Gea. 5. 
 and PL if contracted by synezesis , as <pa£-icu-'.6»v in the G. S. of 
 p.«t (Bta?,and in the G. PI. i.st(i) aad 3. d Declensions, 
 
 4. Imparls yllabic (except of the a.a Declension which never move, 
 nor change their Accent ) advance their Accent one syllable in th: 
 Genitive Plural. See Sppts, •$$*». P. 24. 22. 
 
 5. PROPAROXYTOKA Isosyllabic become Taroxytona in all cases 
 where the final is long. See avOjxoxo? P- *7 > unless that final be con- 
 tracted by synezesis, when it must be circumnexed. See >. w xo*ai^o, p 17. 
 
 6. Imparls yllabic advance their accent one syllable in all cases 
 increasing, or ending in « § , except the G. PI. of the i.st Declension, 
 where they advance it two. See cubist;, odpe^a p. i5. 22. 
 
 7. PEPJSPOMENA Isosyllabic undergo no change (2). 
 
 h. PROPERI3POMENA Isosyllabic become Paroxytona in all cases 
 ending with a long syllable, n , y$, ou; , a*, <x- ? except in the Gen. 
 PI. i.st and 3. d Declensions, -where the final is always elrciraiffexed. 
 See Mcuca teIx«s P- id> . 20, 
 
 9. Imparlsyilablc become proparoxytona in all increasing cases, 
 except the G. P. of the i.st Declension, where, as well as in all case^ 
 endiiig in £ -. ? , they become paroxytona. See «p«f t a«, ^»u9^p. 22, ?.5. 
 
 ACCENTUATION OF VERBS, 
 
 In addition to what is said page 71? it is necessary alone to add 
 that the participle past passive, in the Masculine and Neuter, is aeuted 
 on the penult, and that in Dissyllables, an incipient Vowel ©r Diphthong. 
 preceding a short final Syllable, is, on general principles , circmn- 
 tiexed. See ii y a p. 47 , and £ Tu. a . fao p. 71. 
 
 I.St DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC. 
 
 The Vulgar mode of declining has here nothing peculiar, either 
 as to Accent or Termination, beyond what is noticed, p. iG and r- 
 except with respect to Nouns in tyi ? , which, whether oxytona, or 
 paroxytona? are, in the plural, accented and declined like oet-yac p. 26, 
 li ? [<-y, ;> a Builder, M%Hrr^ a PupiL 
 
 (1) In the 1 .st Declension, if the penult of the N. PL be long 
 a:- a' owolai from ^ 67701a 3 it is circumflex ed. 
 
 (2) Ileterociites becoming Imparisyilabic in the plural ■> according 
 *jj the Vulgar mode of declining, can hardly be called exceptions 
 to the above: However written the penult of their plural is always 
 ■ euted S?* p. 2 6 , 7.7. 
 
. 1 I 
 
 F. 
 Kr/crr-aoa/c MfJ 
 
 dloctc 
 
 cihaic 
 
 a.d DECLENSION XSOSYELABIC. 
 
 In ordinary language some Masculine Nouns which are, in .lie 
 singular, declined after the first Declension, are, in the plural, declined 
 after the second, as ^aoTopvi; a master work man , chief Artl&eer , 
 xopcupa; *- a crab or oray fish. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 Maa-Too-j-.'r . — • £2 01 
 
 • ' jj or M(X77C$\i ' — v ' &jk 
 
 . — ' - — ^ or w - — — ' ov; 
 
 
 SL 
 
 
 1 . 
 
 K-r/crr- wc 
 
 (0 
 
 G* 
 
 8 
 
 or v 
 
 A; 
 
 VI 
 
 
 V, 
 
 n 
 
 
 N. 
 
 M*(&fT-»K 
 
 
 G. 
 
 n 
 
 or 5 
 
 A. 
 
 n 
 
 
 V. 
 
 n 
 
 
 Ka&ci/p-ac 
 
 a> 
 
 a or on - — — ' cv$ 
 
 Nonris of two terminations are, by the Vulgar , dec'ined with 
 tl.rete, and often accented on the syllable marked with double lines. 
 
 M. 
 
 tfos£ oz 
 
 SINGULAR,, 
 
 F. 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 ■ — — OV 
 
 ■ — — - ii or w 
 
 )l 
 
 (i) As' 7i t u et ci are all pronounced alike, «. and e alike, and • 
 and 6> alike , and the three accents have precisely the same force 
 in enunciation, they in letters, and in other writings of the Vulgar, 
 are indiscriminately interchanged, as xi; for tq, and rr^ i$» uq? ei$, for 
 each ether. 
 
ro3 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 F. • 
 
 (/} 
 
 jj 
 
 Cttf 
 
 tv 
 
 ss 
 
 < 01 C 
 
 eve 
 
 >/ 
 
 — cue 
 
 01 
 
 — i' 
 
 — ■ ate 
 
 M, N. 
 
 The following Hetcrc elites belong to this declension : 6 Xo'^o; the 
 Word or Discourse., T « Xo'^ta ; • puaXo'g the Brain, T a p^aXa, o ttacutc? 
 Xiches , rat frXoutvf 6x?-' v0 ?j ^ e y ea! *j T # j^po'via. G. twv -/^q'vcov- to aXo-yov 
 the Horse ?a aXo-p, or aXo'^ara' to irpocttrcov, the face, ra Tcpwxairx CL 
 Tr^aiOTTaTa" froovfeipev* the dream, ra Sveiaa, or ovsioaTa- 
 
 3,d DECLENSION IS0SYLLABXC. 
 
 Nouns of this Declension are very little in use among the Vulgar, 
 They, in a few instances,, form a feminine of adjectives such as thkx^r,;, 
 by substituting 5Wst for the final $, euXaovi<SWa , and decline it after 
 the i .st Declension of Nouns in a, pure. 
 
 I.St DECLENSION IlgPA&XSYLXABXC 
 
 In ordinary Language, Masculines and Feminines of this declension 
 become Isosyllabio, by substituting the Accusative Singular unaltered 
 for the Nominative of Feminines, and the same case with ? added 
 for the Nominative of Masculines. They are, except as to Accent,, de- 
 clined like Nouns of the i.st Declension Isosyllabic , thus. 
 S. P. 
 
 Ni 
 
 V.f 
 
 OVT 
 
 CLQ 
 
 €?.. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 cc 
 
 V. 
 
 s. 
 
 
 « 
 
 y. 
 
 r r 
 
 ■yoy ^ 
 
 a 
 
 G". 
 
 — . 
 
 ' 
 
 cue. 
 
 A. 
 
 — . 
 
 ' 
 
 a 
 
 v. 
 
 S. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 >:. 
 
 
 <pKoy 
 
 a 
 
 G. 
 
 
 ' 
 
 CLC 
 
 A. 
 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 Ci 
 
 V, 
 
 
 - --' 
 
 a 
 
 yift 
 
 u; or cue 
 
 , - — cjj' 
 
 — — ■ ac OF cue 
 
 , ' — t; Of atf 
 
 P. 
 
 Tfvy'ov ec or a/£ 
 
 fhoy 
 
 «C 
 
 or 
 
 a i 
 
 H 
 
 cr 
 
 C'.i 
 
 
 or 
 
 ait 
 
 ac 
 
 or 
 
 C'.i 
 
 f .r 
 
 ■or 
 
 «.' 
 
a.<] PECLENSIOU X?IPA1».IS\*1IABIC. 
 
 In the language of the Vulgar, Nouns of this Declension are tei,.y 
 variously declined and spelt. The following examples will suffice, to 
 indicate the pronunciation. 
 
 S._ P. 
 
 K. yyvc K Or # yvaxr t( 
 
 q. --— u^ i — t - cov 
 
 Ac — " * or iv • — " €<• 
 
 V. i — - I ' if 
 
 $onie in eu; as AyOXsu; i I?peu; thus. 
 
 S. * t. 
 
 G. £-« * - QV 
 
 A, i'X or m tic 
 
 v. «■■?* *~c 
 Mere by Syndesis, thus, as Sac^odfe* $efcu£c > ex&x$rti4$ f SawtXeist.; , 
 *Or Saaeus ccveu; cxix^ei? £aciXeu$. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 jf. /Sap €'/a'c /3<*p c/ada/f 
 
 6 V net t tailor 
 
 A. if2 Or €/a/ uaociii 
 
 \r. eta tia.acc.se 
 Adjectives in uq tla. u thus. , 
 
 SINGULAE, 
 
 3U 
 
 
 F. 
 
 f* 
 
 
 N. £aG 
 
 UC 
 
 Ca0 
 
 1 
 
 ux 
 
 e*e 
 
 V 
 
 G. 
 
 e/7 
 
 
 t/itC 
 
 
 n* 
 
 
 ►— « 
 
 
 »-•« 
 
 # 
 
 7"* 
 
 A. 
 
 y OF vv 
 
 
 11% 
 
 or e.w 
 
 tt 
 
 * 
 
 V. 
 
 V 
 
 
 act. 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 SN £a9 
 
 not 
 
 fre 
 
 nous 
 
 6rf 
 
 ill 
 
 
 *-~ 
 
 
 T* 
 
 
 ~*a 
 
 G.- 
 
 imv 
 
 
 flUV 
 
 
 ttu* 
 
 
 *~~* / 
 
 
 f~l 
 
 
 *""""/ 
 
 A. 
 
 licit 
 
 
 tl'Mf 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 not 
 
 
 aa?$ 
 
 
 ita. 
 
1 XJ 
 
 Anomalies. 
 
 P. 
 
 N 7 or f yvvciiK 
 
 W 
 
 s.. 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 jvyolTk 
 
 a 
 
 yvfccix. 
 
 Of 
 
 or 
 
 
 yVYOUK 
 
 ^ 
 
 yVYOtTx 
 
 e 
 
 yvvcLi 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 yvvoitK ay 
 yvicux. $£ 
 yyvotHx. H 
 
 ywoux. * 
 
 
 
 singular: 
 
 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 N* 7T0K 
 
 i 
 
 5FOA *.» 
 
 
 ETOA 
 
 t/ 
 
 
 G. 
 
 Ay 
 
 A>& 
 
 
 
 A* 
 i 
 
 
 A. 
 
 vy 
 
 plural; 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 5 
 
 N". ffoA 
 
 KOI 
 
 •ETC A. A£* 
 
 or 
 
 A*7f 
 
 7TQK 
 
 JU* 
 
 G, 
 
 K'jOY 
 
 AW/ 
 
 
 
 
 AUV 
 
 A* 
 
 fcofcC 
 
 kco; 
 
 or 
 
 Aa£ 
 
 
 h& 
 
i36 
 
 SECTION II 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 $£ the two English Modes of translating this Tense , the first has 
 
 reference only- to Action, Passion, or State of Being , indefinitely, 
 
 as a habit , without regard to Time; thus, he writes yv ell , ht 
 
 reads badly, he laughs heartily, indicating habit, may be said of 
 
 persons whom we have not seen write , nor heard read or langh for 
 
 Months. I am writing , the second form , is necessary (i) whenever 
 
 we would express present action ; and it is an error to say , as a 
 
 Foreigner very frequently does , I write ( instead of I am 'writing ) 
 
 to your Brother, have you anything to say. I sleep goundly indicating 
 
 habit is a very correct expression j but I am steeping soundly would 
 
 be ridiculous. 
 
 i XJSIPERFECT TENSE. (2) 
 
 1 have added to what many Grammarians give as peculiarly the 
 
 (1) Except in cases where, though in actual exercise, the act is con- 
 sidered as always equally complete , I hate , I believe, never 1 am 
 hating, I am believing. 
 
 (2) If a Name should designate what is named, our Verb has, in se- 
 veral instances, beetroften very unhappily managed, as must be evident 
 en comparing the force of our forms of Tenses with the Names 
 attached to them. I have been writing all day , though it seems to 
 have the form of our perfect , may be , and very often is said , while 
 the act of writing is still in progress, and must be translated with the 
 Modern Greek Imperfect as above , or with the present -pa'epw. I have 
 written to him this Week, indicates indeed a completed Action , but in 
 an unexpired , and therefore still present period of time , and yet have 
 written is given as the peculiar expression of what is called the Perfect 
 Tense. I wrote to him last Week indicates a perfectly past action in a 
 perfectly past period of time , and yet most grammarians give wrote as 
 the peculiar expression of what they call the Imperject Tense. Another 
 error very perplexing to Foreigners, studying our Language, is that did 
 is very commonly in Grammars of Foreign Languages peculiarly an- 
 nexed as a translation to their Imperfect Tense only ; whereas it 
 is equally applicable as a translation of their preterite, and is used by 
 us merely for emphasis , or to obviate an awkward arrangement iu 
 negative and interrogative Phrases, in the same manner as do in the 
 present Tense. While in the treatment of our Verb such confusion 
 prevails , our Language must needs be difficult to Foreigners , and 
 their Languages much more difficult to us than they otherwise 
 would be. See page io5, line z<> 
 

 .. l3 7 
 
 form of our Imperfect, I wrote, a second form , 1 was writing, whick 
 rJone gives a distinct Idea of the force of this Tense in Modern 
 Greek, and in all the Languages of Europe derived from the Latin , 
 that of continuation , admirably expressed in the Greek Name 
 or Definition of this Tense irapaTaTixo;. Modification of Action and 
 not of Time is its main scope : it always implies habit , or con- 
 tinuation of action , whether the time be perfectly or imperfectly 
 past; thus, I have written or been writing all day, and have not 
 finished, must be translated with the Greek Imperfect , cr Conti- 
 nuative i^pa^a oXyiv rfc "naspav , xai <^£v IrsXeccdca. So , Cesar wrote, 
 elegantly o Kalcrao £yp»5s xaX&£. Alexander conquered wherever lie 
 appeared, 6 AX^av^c; oww&tonn e^atvsTi, evtxodris ; My Brother wrote 
 while I read, ev £ &ux$a&L fy«?8 6 K<hXcp©',- pew. 
 
 AOtUST. 
 
 To express distinct , completed actions , however numerous , un- 
 der precisely the same modifications of Time as above , it is neces- 
 sary to employ uniformly the Greek Aorist , I have written one , 
 two, three letters to day , f<yp«,<J>a ev<z •> M»* Tfta 'YpaujjwiTa or'p.spov. 
 Cesar wrote the History of his own Campaigns , 6 Kaiaa? Bypass Tr,v 
 fccpiav twv sx^eiTetwv tcu. Alexander conquered Darius , 6 a'a;;*^-:; 
 evixrae riv Aap;Iov. He killed him in his flight rbv ecpo'veucEM £'v w Eipeu-ys. 
 This last example in which both the Imperfect and Aorist are used 
 is a striking illustration of the very different force of the two tenses. 
 As to Modification of Time , we have an advantage i ) in not con- 
 founding a period of Time perfectly past with a period of Time yet 
 unexpired , as last year , with this year , I wrote last year , I have 
 written this year; but our advantage is of very inferior moment , 
 compared with the admirable Modern Greek distinction of continued 
 from uncontinued , completed action, in future , as v. ell as past 
 time, in the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods ? as well as the In- 
 dicative. (2) 
 
 (1) It is singular that though, like ours, the French and Italian Lan- 
 guages have separate forms of expression for these distinctions of 
 time , they are in numerous instances confounded ; thus , je lui ai 
 parle hier , gli ho parlato ieri , though not correct are common 
 expressions , yet I have spoken to him yesterday, a literal translation , 
 is inadmissible in English. 
 
 (2) As specimens of this extreme nicety of distinction the follow- 
 ing examples may be useful for exercising the Mind of a foreigner 
 on a subject, which, however abstruse and recondite it may appear 
 to him, is comparatively familiar even to the Vulgar among the 
 Modern ^Sxeeks Verb? that intrinsically include the idea of ccnii- 
 
i38 
 
 PLUPE&FECT* 
 
 This Tense, -when used, which is but rarely , exactly answers 
 to ours of the same Name; the Aorist is much more usual even iij. 
 an anterior , or relatively perfect sense ; as I had closed my letter 
 before he came in, eccppa^tcia to «ypau.|xa (iou Trplv oQacrr. /fe had gained 
 the fort before his Enemy arrived, exupuuos x6 eppooptov rcplv (pOacryj 
 o exSpo'c tcu. This confusion in Modern Greek is certainly a defect , 
 because the distinction is occasionally important. Thus , partly 
 through the defect of our own Verb, and partly through that of 
 the Modern Greek, the Aorist is to be translated, according to cir- 
 cumstances, sometimes with what is called our Imperfect, sometimes 
 with our Perfect , and sometimes with our Pluperfect. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Declarative^ 
 
 Interrogative 
 
 I shall 
 
 Shall I ? 
 
 Thou wilt 
 
 Shalt thou ? 
 
 He will 
 
 Will he ? 
 
 We shall 
 
 Shall we ? 
 
 Ye will 
 
 Shall ye ? 
 
 They will 
 
 Will they ? 
 
 The English Language , as it is universally spoken and written in the 
 South of Britain, has a decided advantage ©ver all the Languages ai the 
 South of Europe , both Ancient and Modern, in its expression of 
 simple futurity, (i) A little attention to the original meaning of the 
 Words « shall and will » will afford an easy solution of all the dif- 
 ficulties about their appropriate use ? as auxiliaries , as wen m inter- 
 
 muation,, such as £5 , £taTpt3&> are exceptions , and are used in the Aorist 
 when continuation is intended to be expressed : thus tuTb? avOpwTro? Qa 
 liar> 7toXXou? xp°' vou ^ &* s Man will live many years, Q a ^larpt^w £6ca xpo'voug 
 tic, TaXXtav , I shall spend two years in France. 0a jokimo ^s'xa xP 0V0U S 
 rpotTuoTvn;, I shall serve ten years as a Soldier and not 8a £rj , ^laTptSw,, 
 x&p.vu. Verbs implying commencement, continuation, cessation, and 
 phrases implying habit naturally require Verbs dependent on, or 
 qualified by them to be in the continuative form, as apx,i£st, axo- 
 aouQeIj wauei va ^pacpyj he is beginning , continuing, ceasing to write, 
 and not va -ypa^Tfi', 7Tp£7T£i eva i-upacpt va xo'tttvi xaXa. A Razor should 
 cut well 1 and not v « xo'^. For further illustration of this very curious 
 subject , see David's Parallel of the Ancient and Modern Greek Lan- 
 guages. P. 92 — 99. 
 
 (j) See Mitford on Harmony in Language, 
 
i'^gative as in declarative Phrases, TVill originally was , and , when s 
 used as an independent Verb , still is expressive of volition; shall ? 
 no longer an independent verb , vyas expressive of obligation or 
 necessity, and indicated a duty, wish, or intention to compel, (i) As 
 no man can be supposed to force his own will , when speaking, or 
 writing of himself , shall therefore , as an auxiliary, can have no 
 ambiguity, but must have a simply future sense : as again no one 
 can exercise volition for another «, will , when used as an auxiliary f 
 is free from ambiguity , and has merely a predictive sense, The 
 reason for the use of shall in the 2. d Person in interrogative Phrases 
 is plain , for , without emphasis , the very act of asking a question 
 is inconsistent with the idea of an intention to compel the person 
 questioned , though not with that of an intention to compel a third 
 person, therefore shall thou 7 shall you? are questions about simple 
 futurity , whereas shall he ? shall they ? are questions implying an 
 intention to compel. (2) 
 
 The Modern Greek has no anterior , relative , or compound future 
 in general use , which is certainly another great defect. The Greeks 
 sometimes indeed form one compounded of the future of g^a and the 
 Aorist Subjunctive of the conjugated verb: See page no, § 6 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 As this Mood necessarily implies futurity , without considering 
 the Modifications of continued and uncontinued Action, it is impos- 
 sible to understand the appropriate use of the two Greek Tenses, 
 particularly referring them to the Tenses similarly named in the 
 Indicative Mood: The Present is confined to action etc. , to be con- 
 tinued , the Aorist to action etc. , not to be continued^ 
 
 (1) Whenever Volition on the part of the Speaker, or his intention to 
 compel the Person or Persons spoken to or of is included in the Mo- 
 dern Greek or other Foreign Form of the Future, instead of the i.st 
 English, or Simple - future Form, the 2.d English Form page 47 , 
 must be used. This is equivalent to, Sing, i.st lam determined as 
 to my writing , 2.d I am or we are determined as to thy writing 
 3.d , as to his or her writing - Plur. i.st as to our writing 2,d as to 
 your writing 3.d as to their writing. 
 
 (2) Will I ? Will we ? are preposterous Solecisms , because it is 
 absurd to ask others about our own volition. Wilt thou ? Will ve? are 
 questions about the willingness of the person spoken to. When , 
 without emphasis , as in writing , we ask about a third person's 
 willingness, we either by some adjunct , or by resolving the verb p 
 make it clear that will is not used as an auxiliary , but as an independ- 
 ent Verb; is he willing ? will he bo willing? etc, 
 
i4o 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 
 Considering that relative futurity, under some modification or otheF ? 
 is also always necessarily implied in this Mood , the limitation of the 
 Tenses in Modern Greek to two is easily accounted for , precision as 
 to the Modification of Action being, under such circumstances , by far 
 the most material. When hypothesis is referred to past time , the 
 indicative answers every valuable purpose ; as indeed it seems to do 
 with us ; for we have nothing to distinguish our pluperfect Indicative 
 from the more general form of our relative, or anterior perfect 
 Subjunctive , « though 1 had been possessed » equivalent to should 
 have been possessed , See Note to page 107. Even when referred to 
 future time , we may substitute the future Indicative for the present 
 or perfect Subjunctive, both having a future sense ; thus , for 
 « if he come » « if he shall come »for « if he have supped before ten» 
 « if he shall have supped before ten, i> 
 
 SIGNS OF HYPOTHESIS. 
 
 I have given may and should only as auxiliary signs iu this Mood ; 
 for, after a close examination, it appears to me, that , in hypothetic 
 phrases, all the others given as signs , when purely signs t distinguished 
 from independent verbs, are resolvable into should. Even may when 
 purely a sign of hypothesis is always resolvable into shall or should. 
 Tills seems to me for an Englishman translating into other languages 
 the readiest mode of detecting a sign , or intrinsic part of the con- 
 jugated Verb , ( i. e. ) its being always reducible into shall or should. 
 Iu hypothetic Phrases, when not so resolvable, the others indicate the 
 hypothesis as merely possible or prob.tble , and if translated generally 
 require some adverb equivalent to perhaps , or some independent 
 verb, as it is possible or probable that I shall etc. , that I should ete. 
 In this restriction I , of course limit, myself to the hypothetic part of 
 the conditional Phrase , whether it be placed first or last. Where 
 nothing of the hypothetic or contingent character appears , it requires 
 not a thought , to translate may or might as independent Verbs , 
 expressive of ability, permission, inclination , etc. Should, whenever 
 it includes the idea of duty , is an independent Verb., equivalent to 
 « ought to y » and must be so translated. 
 
 CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 
 
 Declarative Interrogative 
 
 I should Should I 
 
 Thou wouldst Shouldst thou 
 
 He would Would he 
 
 We should Should we 
 
 Ye would Should ye 
 
 They would Would they 
 
t4* 
 
 The above' is , in all respects , analogous with the simple future , 
 and is the correct form for expressing necessary consequence , 
 whenever the hypothesis is expressed with a past tense. Might 
 if not resolvable into should . implies that the consequence is 
 merely possibb or probable. Could, when properly a sign, and. 
 not a catachresis , or abuse of Idiom, is optative. Can, in correct lan- 
 guage, is never a mere sign of Tense, but is always equivalent to a m, 
 or should be able, etc, 
 
 COMPOUND CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 
 
 English is formed by adding have , to the above , as I should 
 have, etc. The want of distinct forms for the sense of this expres- 
 sion and of shall have is perhaps the greatest defect in the Modern 
 Greek Verb, (i) See P. 107, § 6, and note: also P. in, § 7, 
 and note 2. The last line of the Note refers to the Paragraph 10 
 lines above Rule 6 , beginning « When &tov « , the figure 6 being mis 
 placed. 
 
 (1) Except the loss of the Ancient Infinitive and Participles, so 
 singularly precise with respect to Modification of Time and Action, 
 and so commodiously , and so gracefully blending themselves in 
 substantive and adjective forms with the current of the most har- 
 monious Periods. 
 
*4« 
 
 s^z^ts^x^ss^&s^tstssi 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 A I A A or 01. 
 
 A. 
 
 JJo you speak Greek ? 
 
 A little (i) , very little. 
 
 How long (is it) since you began,, 
 
 pearly six Months. 
 
 "Who's (2) your Master ? 
 
 One of the Deacons of the Public 
 School. 
 
 Is he a good Scholar ? 
 
 I think so, fcvut I'm not a compe- 
 tent judge. 
 
 Does he know Hellenic ? 
 
 They say so : he is one of O^eono- 
 mus'(3) Pupils ; and, being a 
 Man of application, and of good 
 intellect , he must have made 
 considerable progress. 
 
 What is OEconomus' Opinion of 
 him? 
 
 He speaks highly of him , and 
 recommended him to me. 
 
 How do you think I speak ? 
 
 Tolerably well for the time; butyou 
 still with difficulty pronounce 
 the aspirated consonants, and 
 
 O 
 
 MIAEITE pwpaTxa ; ( ^yuanx) ; 
 OXt'yov, xcp.aart , xop.,u,aTa>a . 
 'Awb tco'te toc apyj. aere ; 
 
 Eivai 7T£pt Ttou e£ u.viv£$. 
 nolo; elvai ^ic^aarjcaXo's aa;; 
 "Eva? ^taacovo; «t:o rd ayO-zic>, 
 
 Eivat 7:po/.oti.{x£vci; ; 
 
 Eroxafr/^at , £ev el 4 aai ap? isca~ 
 vo? va xpivtt). 
 
 H^supEt. sXXvjvtxa; 
 
 As'^'ouv on ra v)|s»pet" eivai w.aflvr 
 tvj^ tou Otscova'v.ou, xai e-jv£i<5*ri efva* 
 ETCtjarsX'fl?, acal e^et xotXd xa^xX;, nae- 
 irei va ercooV.o^e icaXa. 
 
 Tt Xe'^ei Oijcovou.cs nzfl aurcvj 
 
 Tov E-^aiveT, xat jjls rev IcrSg-Yiffe. 
 
 Il&s oas epatvetat va SfuXw ; 
 
 Slq Tkpo; tov xatp,iv> dpy.&Ta' wXr ( v 
 ^uaxoXeusaSe axo'p.Y) va tcog^eosts t« 
 ^acs'a ou^wva, xai gcpaXX&Ti au^vi 
 
 (1) See Note Page 4. Type confines me to one Accent for the 
 English , but that will answer my object , indicating to a Foreigner 
 the obligatory position of the English Accent generally, without any 
 reference to its nicer modifications in refined elocution. The lev; 
 slight liberties I have taken in the Translation for the purpose of 
 making the Phrases tolerably idiomatic will very little interfere wi*h 
 a due appreciation of the Greek Words severally. 
 
 (a) See Note Page 10. 
 
 (3) Pronounced, OEconomusis. 
 
&M often wrong m accent : you 
 paroxytonise, (i) as the Vulgar 
 say. ( i. e. you throw the ac« 
 cent on the penult. ) 
 AH that will correct itself with time. 
 I ought for the moment to be 
 satisfied withbeingable to speak 
 so as to be understood. I wish 
 no more. 
 
 II. 
 
 Good Day. 
 Good Day to you. 
 How do you do my Friend ? How 
 is your Health ? how are you ? 
 Very well thank God. God be 
 
 praised. 
 Where ( whither ) are you going. 
 Into the Cottntry. 
 What business have you ( what 
 
 have you to do ) there ? 
 I mean to pass a few days there, 
 
 as I have now nothing to do , 
 
 and wish a little recreation after 
 
 my late close application to 
 
 Business ? 
 Is there any Society ? 
 There are several Friends of mine, 
 
 with whom , I walk out during 
 
 the day; and in the evening we 
 
 play at Cards. 
 How can you walk during the 
 
 day , hot as it is. 
 It is not so very hot : indeed the 
 
 day before yesterday it was 
 
 cool. 
 Have you then a different climate 
 
 there from what we have here. 
 
 We are suffocated with the heat 
 
 here in Town ; how can it be 
 
 cool there ? 
 
 143 
 
 OXa Taura <hop0o'vovTat p.s i tov 
 xatjftv 5 x.ara to frapov rcpe'ikSl va 
 euxaptrnGw, av vijjKXt' kkXo? va c[juX'3> 
 
 V6uv. A 67 Znroi alle, 
 
 B. 
 
 KaX f.'jJocf, c&q, 
 
 KaXs qol; •fyxepa-. 
 
 Ti jcauveis <p(Xe; itm; e^ecs ei's ttqv 
 u^eiav cou ; 7ra? ey.eic ; 
 
 Kc.Xa , £o'|« sot OsoV 6 0;dj 
 va e'x,T(l ^oljav. 
 
 IloCi wYiYatveis - 
 
 Et? to x&>pio. 
 
 Ti va xap.YK IjcsI ; 
 
 Ey^ci) ar>to i-bv va irepa^w (xepixx^- 
 
 Xe(«t;, xat 6£aw va £sy.cupaa3S KOfi- 
 p-aTt cb;o reus aitep!xap.£VG'j; jco'ttou;. 
 
 Eivat auvTpocpia, EJcet ; 
 
 Eivai ttaptjeos <jnX?t, (i.e tou; -otto''- 
 o'j^ "jrspiTkaTw tyiv Tnp,;'pav , }C3t.'. T3 
 (3pa£u ^a-'^oaev yjxpTta. 
 
 n5>; rarropElre xae Trepi7raTcTT£ tviv 
 r.fAi'pav ui TOfftfv fcVtfv ; 
 
 'Aae S'vt elvai woXXvi fc'cn » p-aXt- 
 <ra Trpcr/9s; Yrrev Jtxl ^poaca. 
 
 ' AXXo etvai Taxa to xXip.05 exei na< 
 d'XXo erSo> j et£ tyiv ywpav ^viYo'[i.j9x 
 arco tt.v xauaiv, ttw; •va wai ^poatx 
 
 (1) Where Words of more than one syllable are not accented the 
 aceent is eitbet on the Capital Letter or the letter y. 
 
1 44 
 
 So it is ; corne and see ; you will 
 pass your time agreeably : you 
 will meet with real friends, who 
 lore you with ail their souls. 
 
 My Friend , I like Men's Society 
 very well ; but that alone will 
 not do; I should like to have , 
 a few Ladies among them 5 or 
 the Country is to me a Desert. 
 
 Dont be alarmed : you'll meet with 
 Ladies : Do you think we are 
 so many Monks , and live in 
 solitude. We have , among the 
 rest , a Lady of Constantinople, 
 (1) a late arrival, who is the ad- 
 miration of us all, for her ta- 
 lents , excellent education, and 
 graceful manners. 
 
 Is she handsome? 
 
 Not very; She's little famed in 
 that respect : Beauty is not her 
 charm ; but she's not plain ; her 
 countenance is rather pleasing. 
 That's not enough for me , my 
 Friend. A Woman to be per- 
 fect must have Wit and Beauty 
 united : in my opinion , this 
 latter is the essential ( the chief 
 excellence ) of the Sex, 
 
 Ton talk at random, like a hare- 
 brained boy: however come with 
 nie , and , after you have seen 
 her , you may judge. ( for 
 yourself ) Grace of expression 
 emanating from an amiable 
 cast of disposition, and a highly 
 cultivated Mind often throw a 
 charm over the Person. 
 
 Fivxt oixw; , sax vi 10 r t ; , S •'/<;:; 
 w'spasst -nroXXa xaXa' QiXzi; aupet cpi~ 
 lo'j; etXtfcp'tvstg , ot orroTot a' dqanrouv 
 
 $tXs 
 
 tgus cpsXou? rw-; i'yj* 
 
 fltoXXv.v uwoXrj'l'iv , irXr,v S'h \jA odd- 
 vcjv , »al aYX7v5> va cruvsupiflouv xat 
 oXtyats '<ptXat?' ti $k 4 avj ?) ifyxh jw 
 ©flfctVcTai taaav epviiua. 
 
 ' Evvotx coo, Qs'Xct; svpei xiat yyto~r 
 x=;. Sappst; w£>; &tue&3 JtaXo'^c-pot ^ 
 xct- £oujxev ei; rnv y.ova£''av , avoy.-M 
 xt' 6'Xa; jxiav ■jvoX'/rttfoav.. si vat ve'ocpep- 
 p.s'vyj Y.cr\ tt,v Go?jy.oc£op.£v oXot cXitx, to 
 ■77v.tiju.3c-r,;, TTJv xaXr.v ttg; avaTpocp/jv, 
 
 Elvat xcfl wpai'a ; 
 
 "Ojk to<tov , x«,-a tout© £iv vj- 
 froxipzl' 'h MpatOTY]; ^sv si-vat to itpo- 
 TspYiaa ty!; 3 irXviv <^sv stvat aa^r/iaV 
 to -nrpc'soirov txs utaXt^a stvat euaps<rcv. 
 
 Auto <^sv \j.z <p8avsij a^eX©£. Trpi- 
 irst p,t-a •pvatxa , <^ta va vrm svts- 
 Xr,; , va evo'v'/j xai to •jcvsVju.x xal ty;v 
 siaopcpixv' e^st^ri et; touto to teX'su- 
 ratov TipoTspYij/.a, <ruvi'caT«i xaTa tvv 
 ■vvwar.v y.ou, oXn r, custa tou JUnXuxoi 
 -yayou?; 
 
 Asv ojAtXet; cb; cppovtw.ee, rap a &>$ 
 vie;. eXaopop.uaXo?' 6>; toVov £Xa y,a£u, 
 x.a»! enrav txv 1$y& Ss'Xs-ts xptvai. H 
 /apt? t5)v Xo'^tov iro^-a^coax arrb ty,v 
 xaXoauvYiV tv}* $ux*i?"» &** TW[ xeXait 
 TviTa toO voo; * ^tv&Txt cFU^va 50X10" 
 p.o; tou Gtop.aTO;. 
 
 (1) Long Words in English , as in Greek , have necessarily two 
 strongly accented Syllables. I shall , as in Greek , mark only the 
 more prominent of the ty/o. 
 
i45 
 
 in. 
 
 Heartily welcome , Friend : pray 
 walk in. 
 
 1 salute you. ( the English never 
 use such an expression , but , 
 always, instead, employ some 
 specific salutation ; as, Good 
 day , I'm glad to see you , 
 I hope I see you well. ) 
 
 Sit down. Boy , bring the Gentle- 
 man a pipe, and tell your Mis- 
 tress to send in cakes and Coffee. 
 
 1 am delighted to see you. I've 
 not exchang'd a word with 
 you for several days. 
 
 Do you bring us any News ? 
 
 Shocking , a dreadful Business, 
 
 r. 
 
 What now 
 
 r"> 
 
 IV, 
 
 Have you made the Bed, 
 
 I have made it. ( Yes , Sir ). See 
 Page 121 , § i4. 
 
 Give me my Tobacco Bag , and 
 bring me a light. 
 
 With pleasure. 
 
 This Tobacco's very strong 9 
 where did you get ( buy ) it. 
 
 Where I always get it. Is n't it 
 good? 
 
 It's good ; but I'm afraid'? will 
 affect my head. 
 
 And suppose it does ( should ) 
 a little, that will do you no 
 harm , as you are going im- 
 mediately to bed. 
 
 Bring me. a cup (glass) of water. 
 
 Will you have wine also ( with it,) 
 
 Ko : bring me rather a glass of 
 spirits to mix with the water. 
 
 As you please. 
 
 Have you been to the Tailor. 
 
 I have C Yes > Sir)- 
 
 Has he finish' d my Goat? 
 
 K«X<d? CipiSETS , <pl)« > KOTClflCffSTS 
 
 2a? jratper*. 
 
 KatKffETe. ITai^ta , (pspeti tt; vj-- 
 •yevEia; tou i'va t£ijjhm6j« 3 ka\ £?7T:re 
 ty5; y»upa$ va <rs''Xv) to rXuxo >cal rev 
 xa^cpe. 
 
 Xa:pou,ac va c«? t^ai, v/u to'exi? 
 ■yip-jpsct; ao ou osv aa; couur.cra. 
 
 Ma; we'cete tiitcte ( x^ve'va ) v3ov; 
 Tpcffcepi /.cd cpptxra repa"yjfc*T'a. 
 Ti rcaXiv ; 
 
 A. 
 "E$-pto<s*s to xps££au ; 
 To ^pcii«?a. 
 
 Awes p.cu to xairvoi?c'j'YY l » xa ^ 
 ^>spe u.(a (pcotia. 
 
 MsTa x,apas. 
 
 Aut«5 6 y.aTrv&s eivat wcXXoe a<J>u?* 
 ttou Tsv £7fVipe; ; 
 
 "otto'j Tiv Tce'pvoi iravra" eHv eIW. 
 xaXo; ^ 
 
 K«ao; eivai, «Xwi <po(3e3aca ftKjitwf 
 pi £aXiT{h 
 
 "A; aa<; £aXttfri y.cfmaraxt* ds« 
 ca; x.a|i.v£i y.7.)cov) e'ttekJ'ti SeXets we~ 
 cei ( irXa^iacjci ) dp.E'ato;. 
 
 <J>E'pE UAOL KCXiTZO. VEpO. 
 
 Opt^ETE xat xpacri j 
 
 Ox,'-" xaXXnjTEpa va jae (jJEpif; sva, 
 -7TcTr ( pa!<.t pawcl, va to aia^artocra) u.e 
 to vepo* 
 
 "(>,Tt d-yarrixTE. 
 
 'Eik^'ii et? toy pa^TYiv ; 
 
 'E<TTi-i'a. 
 
 'ivreXsicotfE to pouy^o p.ou; 
 
Not yet ; but lie says he'il bring 
 
 it to morrow at noon. 
 
 Bid you see it ? What does it want. 
 
 He has not yet put on the buttons, 
 
 nor are the button holes made. 
 
 (There's no believing the. fellow ). 
 
 The fellow's all falsehood. He 
 
 had promis'd to finish it in 
 
 three days , and a week has 
 
 pass'd without his having yet 
 
 brought ( come to bring ) it 
 
 mc. What excuse did he make. 
 
 He says , as usual, ( the old story ) 
 that lie has not had time; there 
 have been two festivals , and he 
 has not been able to work con- 
 stantly. 
 
 Be it so ( Well , well ). Tell me : 
 has the person [we were speak- 
 ing of been ? 
 J V horn do you mean. That Jew 
 to whom you. owe Money. 
 
 The same, to be sure. What other? 
 
 Yes ; he has; and he waited some 
 time f he went away out of 
 humour, 
 
 Burn him : hang Turn : so much 
 as he has robb'd me of 
 (made by me J with his exor- 
 bitant usury ; but however , 
 having once agreed ( passed 
 my word J FIE give you the 
 money to morrow , and you 
 shall go and pay him. 
 
 You'll do well. 
 
 'Tis time I shou'd go to bed : light 
 the night lamp, and take away 
 the Candle. 
 
 Good Night, (r) 
 
 To elth; ; f{ Xs'iim''; 
 
 xa.'. at QnlzioJi; Sh alvai )caawp.$vai..,v 
 Auto? 6 dsvflpwicc-; 6'Xov 4 r£ ^^ £Tai "' 
 
 Tfc't; r.uipai? , dhc/paun pfa'Jf&tfLx-' 
 <^a ,~ x,%\ a»o'[xvj ^sv $X6e va pi to 
 ^pe'pip. Tc irpo'jpaaiv co r J ^uxs ^ 
 
 A'yct to cjv£^(}tC[xevov , ttcu; £sy 
 ctjrs xatpov* *^rav xal <5uo crx,o'Xat? f 
 xxl ^ev' ^jjtrb'pso'e iravfa va iSVjXsot*. 
 
 As' £vax. nV; {j.ou ,- r*X9e:v 5 Xs'^x* 
 p.tvc; 5 
 
 IIoTov Xete j txslvov tov *£$p!iTc;v 
 ei; tov orcTov xps^celTe Trapa^e;. 
 
 Au-ov , j3iSatx* d'xl woTov aXXov , 
 
 MaXt^-a yJAQs , jtal ca? srrjoffixEive 
 Jcaftwo'<r^li eop'av" e^u^s j&sGKdStt£«p'i£Yi > 
 p.e'vc ?. 
 
 <£ama va tov xxy'f &i ttayip vi 
 xv/ifxvtG^/i' To<ya pi ex-Xs^e p.s tH 
 ^tacpspsv tou to U7?sp£oXuoV £7rei<H 
 cp,co> eVjfiipuvYiaa p.td ^opa , aup'.cV 
 ecu £t^u itapa<hc Hal &a m^ftif va 
 T&tf TrXripuur.;. 
 
 ©& jcaasTe' xaXa. 
 Twpx TrpsK-et va rXa^iaorw* faxfyi 
 tb JcavT-Xi , xzl Traps. t6 ^oj; Sf©S 
 
 KacXr, v'JKra ca;, 
 
 (i) I here relinquish Mons. r David's Dialogues for several reasons^ 
 and , among others , because the* Phrases are generally too long, too 
 political, and too marked with National prejudices and Antipathies r 
 to be suited to an elementary Work like this, His Anti-Angiacaitf 
 
1 Mr Lady. 
 
 P. What is it? (What's the matter.) 
 
 L A Visit. 
 
 P. Fresh congratulations ? 
 
 I. Yes , My Lady. 
 
 P. Did n' t ( i ) I tell you, I wou'd n't 
 see any one to day. 
 
 I. Six are gorie away , but the 
 seventh wont go. 
 
 P. And who may he be ? 
 
 I." Sir W. Arnold, 
 
 P, Precisely the Man that annoys 
 me beyond every other : beg 
 him to excuse me , as I'm 
 engaged , and cant see tym 
 to day. 
 
 I. Yes my Lady, 
 
 PHRASES FRO^ PAMELA"? 
 
 PAMELA AttD ISAAC, 
 
 I. MtXe<W: 
 
 *4? 
 
 II. Tt eivai J 
 
 I. Mia iisia-AvUq} 
 
 II. IfxXiv x at ? £ ' rtQr f' c ^ 5 
 
 I. Nat. Mt/.e^i 
 
 II. Ac'v cot (a) eirca on <Piu,jp&v (H\) 
 fls'Xw va &v/Qo> xxve'va ; 
 
 I. "E£yj ga-u-j-avj 6 e'Sd'0^05 <?sv (SeXs; v« 
 
 avax^P^^?* 
 
 II. Kai 74's eivai aura's ; 
 
 I. 'O I1T7V6U5 E?V0X<?, 
 
 II. Exitvo? jxaXt^a , ottou p, evoxXst 
 urrsp >:a8e aXXcv. Eirts tou va as 
 cufATraOricri , <^taTi i'xw CwHiJlaiii 
 tTveO a' c'u.tc &<%Et . xai a?3|6spov ^i» 
 
 r,j}/r?G(>S va tqv (jTJs^exOco, 
 
 IOED B. AND SIR. W. A, 
 
 W. Well met. 
 
 B. Stay, , 
 
 W- Eh ! let me go : L:d Arthur 
 
 does not alarm me. 
 15. Tell me plainly. 
 W. I neither want courage spirit 
 
 nor dexterity. » 
 
 B; Answer. 
 
 E: KaXri avrauoats. 
 
 B. Sraorea. 
 
 E. E ? a<|e? as va u^a^to. *Q 'Aprolijj 
 
 ^ev pis gq(3i£s«, 
 B. EtTTs [xou eiXtxpivcos i . ', . . 
 E„ Asv p.ou XtiTrei p.r,T3 xap^ix, Orifts 
 
 B, *Ai?Gscp(Qr,Ti; 
 
 Spleen could be very advantageously answered, if it were at all 
 worthy oLan Answer. I have much too high an opinion of the 
 Author to think he would in a second Edition repeat it. He wrot* 
 in haste , and seemingly in anger , and he wrote in Greece s at 
 a very critical moment , though he published in Paris. This may 
 excuse him ; but would not excuse my re-echo , whieh could do 
 him no honor. Even if competent instead of attempting additional 
 Dialogues of my own, I should prefer offering, as I shall, the" Greek 
 Language of Greeks , short Phrases from two Comedies, the last, 
 Ivloliere's Avare translated by OEconomiis. The few Phrases of a Ser- 
 vant , at the close , I have selected for the purpose of giving some 
 Idea of the great irregularity of the Vulgar in spelling. 
 
 (1) Pronounced didunt, woudunt, 
 
 [a) The Genitive would he more in conformity with present usage. 
 
i48 
 
 "VT. I who have travelled. 
 B. Answer me. 
 
 B. Awcxgt8v5Tt jiei. 
 W. What would you wish me to E. Etc tJ 8 £ 'Xec? va cc\ **ox«te.s 
 
 answer ? 
 What I asked. 
 
 B. Etc o, ti ae epcaTr'aw. 
 
 LORD B. AND HIS SISTER. 
 
 B. I had better speak to Lady B: 
 she will communicate to Sir W; 
 in my Name what I intended 
 to say to him. 
 
 M. My Lord , may I come in ? 
 B. Walk in. 
 
 M. Are you willing we should have 
 
 a little conversation to day ? 
 
 B. Yes ; indeed , I want to have 
 
 some talk with you. 
 M. You seem discomposed. 
 B. With reason. 
 M. I feel for you( I enter into your 
 feelings ) Pamela seems, from 
 the moment she changed situa- 
 tion , inclined to change her 
 manner also. 
 B. What reason have you to speak 
 
 to her disadvantage ? 
 M. Sir W has made me acquainted 
 
 with every thing. 
 B. Sir W is a blockhead. 
 ST. My Nephew is not to be thus 
 
 contemptuously treated. 
 B. My Wife must be treated more 
 
 respectfully. 
 M, If you do not keep her within 
 prgper bounds , you'll find 
 her a Woman like the rest 
 of us. 
 B. Her conduct is in no way 
 
 blarnable. 
 M. Pru lent Women allow no room 
 
 for suspicion, 
 B, What suspicion can any one 
 have of her? 
 
 B. itaXXwepx vec cuiXraju pk tw 
 MtXe^ri Aaiipro/. Aut^ fle'Xet ' Aver 
 9=pip e£ evo^aTc'? p,cu tiq ifo 
 KapaXtc'fvjv ra caa dyjx. •popm 
 va ?£> ei7ra) e-v^* 
 
 M. MtXop^e, ^a) rr ( v a'thiav va &ta> r 
 
 B. 'liXOe. 
 
 M. 'A-yaira; cvifxepsv va auvejxiX^ffu- 
 
 B. Nat , paXi?a ty® xpeiav va fyr 
 
 Xrlffto p.a^Yj (joy. 
 
 M. MoO ^aivecrai' ffUYXUffftevOf. 
 
 E. Me £i'xatov. 
 
 M. 2e ffUfAwaes. H ? Hap.&« , a/ 
 oo r'XXai-g xaraVaaiv , ^aiverai 
 6'tc 0eXet / aXXa^ xat to yM;: 
 
 B. Xlo'av atTtav e%£is £ia vie trW 
 «fca0aXv>« ; 
 
 M. O Ka|5aXu'pvj; {/ ewXvipo^opvjcsV 
 
 ei; ra ivavta. 
 B. O KejjaXis'pvji; eTvai p.fc>po'$. 
 M. O eve<|i:o$ jaou £ev wpfe'wit va 
 
 xaTacppovrirat cutwij. 
 B. Ttjv pvaixa'^ou Kpixzi v« ttjv 
 
 TtfAOTS. 
 
 M Av <5*£v tav xpannGr); ei£ ri xa- 
 e^xov , etvat. xat auryj -pv?) xar 
 6cb; xa) aX Xoiuac, 
 
 B. H ^la-yo'p tios ^ev cftcu &\<mm* 
 
 tvi'YopstiSj. 
 M. At cpso'vtp,o; ^watxe; «Jej» <ft£doj>. 
 
 atTtav Qtto$ia$. 
 B. Ilofav Oira^iav viiiwcpsl Tiva; \fs 
 
$t She is too intimate witli Lord M. 
 
 Arthur. 
 8. Lord Arthur's my Friend. B. 
 
 M. Ah ! in such matters Friends M. 
 have more in their power than 
 Enemies. 
 
 B. I know his Character, B. 
 
 M. And might he not deceive you? M, 
 
 B. You wish to rob me of my p«&ce B> 
 of Mind. 
 
 M. I am jealous of your honour. M. 
 
 B. Have you any good reason to B. 
 make me feel alarmed about 
 my honor, 
 
 M. Sir W told me. M. 
 
 JBo Don*£ speak to me of Sir W. B. 
 I have no opinion of bis pru- 
 dence, nor d® I believe what 
 lie says. 
 
 M. Allow me to communicate an M. 
 idea of my ov/n. 
 
 B. Well! let's have it. B. 
 
 M, Do you remember with what M< 
 zeal and earnestness Lord 
 Arthur dissuaded you from 
 marrying Pamela. 
 
 B. I do ; but what would you infer B. 
 from the dissuasions of my 
 excellent Friend. Were they 
 not well founded. 
 
 M. Brother, Lord Arthur 's Arga- ivl. 
 ments might have done very well 
 elsewhere. But in London a 
 ISobleman loses nothing hj 
 marrying a pennyless Girl, if 
 oi reputable character. I was 
 not incensed against her , on 
 account of her supposed mean- 
 ness of condition ; but was 
 displeased solely with that 
 lurking ambition, which I fancy 
 I see in her. Lord Arthur , 
 not being related to us, could 
 
 149 
 
 "E/ji -jrctpi ttgXu Sacpo? pi tq^ 
 
 JVUXo'p^ov Aproup. 
 C MtXcp^-c; 'Aprcup eivat (ptXog 
 
 fxoy. 
 
 E, ei? *apou.ota -rcpa^para q! 
 
 <piXot ^livavrai rcsptaffo'teppv <xt:6 
 
 toa>$ i^Spou?. 
 TvoptCco tgv ^apsoir^pa TOU. 
 
 Asv >5u.7ropcua=c va a.-na-^f,; ; 
 2u £*ite!$ va pi xapv/is va yjia& 
 
 ttiv Y,a'jyjav p.co. 
 
 IMe tcovsi <5\a tyiv Ttp-Tflv ffou. 
 'E^ei; )cav£va inQavov Xo'-ycv <^ta 
 
 vi [is xap.vis va c^cpri8a> tS'ta tt ( v 
 
 TIU.W p.OU J 
 
 O Ka^aXisp7)c p°3 eiotsv . . .-♦-. 
 
 M'fl pou avacpe'pvi; riv KaSaXts* 
 pvjv" <5"£v eya> et; xap,p.tav uwo- 
 Xr,ytv t« eppovr'aara tcu, x.ai ^ev 
 Tbt^cuo e-i? tcu; Xc'-ycu; tcj. 
 Na coy Etirtb sva g-o/aap,dv, ©ttou 
 
 Nal, EiTcs acu tov. 
 
 'Ev6yp,siaat pi Tro'cr.v (T^cy^riv , 
 /.at pi 7to'g7,v £uvap.tv 6 MtXo'p- 
 (S'o? 'Aprcup <Ji E-rrapa/.tvEt va art 
 vum.^su8t[)5 TTiv liajteXav ; 
 
 Nai to Ev6yp.cyp.ai. AXXa rt <jyp.- 
 weoatvsis a.7ro tou; dwveTpEMTtxoys 
 Xo'you; too KaX.au p.ou oiXcu ; Asv 
 ri<>av dpa ^e OipsXiwas'voi sis to 
 otxaiov ; 
 
 'AeSVA'js pou, ol Xc'vct tou 'Aprcip 
 ■ripiropoyeav va rvat ^p-nctpci ei; 
 aXXov ts'ttov. Ec; TW Aov^pav 
 eva; KapaXu'sr,; <5iv yjhti t:~c- 
 te; , av vjixcpsuOy; piav 'Kxiayr^ , 
 aXXa Ttar ( i/.svviv >co'pr,v. Eyco ^ev 
 •ftyavaKTOUv y.ar' aurru <^ia ttiv 
 6-iPOTt9ep.svviv eyjiXstav rfi; tux*)? 
 tyi? , ap/r) eXowoufMiv iv.ovcv cJ'ia 
 exewiav T'/iv *pu77Tinv Jtsvo^c^tav , 
 d-rrcD p.ol e^aivsw) va (BXetvo)- Etc 
 auTW. O' Il'Ao'p^o; 'Aprcyp, w? 
 U.Y1 ^x fJN ' xap.p.tav ou'Y'Yevsiav ps 
 
i5<* 
 
 not enter into tliis. Indeed if 
 we reflect on his earnestness 
 then, and his intimacy now , 
 we may believe that he per- 
 suaded you to relinquish her 
 from his desire to make her 
 his own. 
 
 B. You are exceedingly acute. 
 
 M. Believe me I'm very seldom 
 out ( mistaken. ). 
 
 B. I hope for once you are. 
 
 M. I hope I may be ; but I think 
 Pm not. 
 
 ^iaa;, £h i^uvaro va QWS'fSfi ri 
 toioutcv" p.acX'.ra ccv cc-ict.oQuu.lv 
 rov rite Troflcv-TOU - , xai to -rrapov 
 Gappo- , ry.Topvju.Z'j va Tcf^e-uoaw 
 p.ev ou as erit&e va tyiv a^aTj?, 
 <ha T/iv £"7rt8utjt,iav too va tyiv 
 aTjoxrir.ar, afrro?, 
 
 B„ O voi>5 ecu sfvat irapa ttoXu offlijj 
 
 M. U\ri\ja£ p>ou 6- 1 cX/yai? (fopaTs 
 a<pxXXw. 
 
 B. 'Eatti^co on Teutvjv tyiv cpopav a- 
 wara^ai. 
 
 M. Tb eTTtOyixw, aXXa ^£y to TEt^eu©^ 
 
 P. My Lord I am here at your n. 
 
 command. 
 B. A Style like this no longer suits B. 
 
 the lips of a Wife. | 
 P. Well then, my dear Husband, H. 
 
 what are your Commands ? 
 B. I have, determined on gratifying B. 
 
 you. 
 1*. Your whole study is to load me EL 
 
 with favours and kindness. In 
 
 what way are you now think- 
 ing to afford me pleasure ? 
 B. We will in two hours, set out B. 
 
 for Lincolnshire. 
 P. In two hours ! II. 
 
 B. Yes, get every thing ready that B. 
 
 you yourself may want , and 
 
 leave the rest to Mad. e Jevre. 
 P. Alas ! he thinks no longeF of IL 
 
 my Father. ( Aside ) 
 B. She is confused ; it seems to B. 
 
 displease her. ( she does not 
 
 seem pleased. ) ( Aside ) 
 P. Mv/ Lord. ' XL 
 
 B. You have changed your Mind B. 
 
 about leaving Town 
 P. I shall always do whatever II. 
 
 you direct, (as you please. J 
 B. She awakens my suspicions. B. 
 P. I have n't courage to give H. 
 
 him uneasiness 
 
 Kuf :e , l£ob eijiai ibta tig rh$ 
 7rpot.rTa'va< ecu. 
 
 Autos OTpcnro: $h apu.o'£st ttXe'ov 
 ei; roc yj.ily\ jxta; au^u^ou. 
 Nat a^a-moTs k acu avep , ti $k 
 icptic&iiq ; 
 'AT?e^aai<ra' va at ey^apKptau. 
 
 '(■OXyi cou •& ^povTij £ivat vx p.e 
 
 i-nvop^-cV^cq oltzo eOep^soia; , xal 
 
 ^apira;. Et; ri ^oyjx(z<ta.\ TMpa, 
 
 va, p.£ t\>xoL^cr,cr,q' ; 
 Msta (Jyo &pa- 6iXo.fjt.av Vjuiaeuait 
 
 <5\a ttov KovTe'av rou AivxoXv* 
 Met a £uo wpac; 
 Nat, £Toip.acrov ra -rrpbc x?"^ a: ' v ^'-^ 
 
 <ha c^e Ta Xotrca , cppcvTi£st -h Kupx 
 
 Te'Ppvi. 
 
 ( Otp.ot I $£v evOuasTTat ttX^'cv tov 
 
 •rraTspa p,ou. ) 
 
 ( li/pa^TOi* 9^ v£ "*& oti ?^V 
 
 £ucaps<r?.L ) 
 
 Kupi£ . . „ o " 
 Ficat ^.ETavonafvw va d^ap; tt,y 
 fto'Xiv ; 
 
 ©saw y.ap.-j) fravTOTE £, ti xatl 
 av pi 7rpo<ra^T,c. 
 ( Me {S&Xe* ei; UTrc^'tav. ) 
 ( Ai'* -r&Xp.w vd tov papuy<i). } 
 
& Wtiat means this change. A 
 few days back London dis- 
 pleased you; and now yon have 
 n't heart to leave it 
 
 P. As you wish it should be so, 
 let's go. 
 
 B. I have no wish to go, unless 
 merely to please you 
 
 P. I am obiig'd to you for your 
 kindness. 
 
 B. I am quite perplexed at this 
 coldness of yours 
 
 P. Excuse me , my heart is ill at 
 ease 
 
 B. And why my Lady 
 
 P. On my Father's account 
 
 B. On your Father's account; Ay? 
 
 P. Yes my Lord it would dis- 
 tress me to leave him 
 
 B, What can be wanting in my 
 house that your Father can 
 require 
 
 P. While deprived of liberty , 
 he feels he wants the best of 
 tilings. 
 
 B. His liberty is deferred for the 
 moment. 
 
 p. I know it very well. 
 
 13. Who told you 
 
 P. Lord Arthur 
 
 B. Have you been talking with 
 Lord Arthur ? 
 
 P. Yes my Lord 
 
 B. Who was present 
 
 P. ]Vo one. 
 
 B. No one ? 
 
 y. On the subject of my Father, 
 it was requisite that our con- 
 versation should be private. 
 
 B, ( She's right ) aside 
 
 i5i 
 
 B. TlZJ.lkQ,, Tl X9UV3V stvsMi touto ; 
 
 e^uo;*f€5ou<i£, T<6pa (?£y as £a" 
 
 era -h x%?&ix v« t/jv &ipriGr,<; ° 3 
 
 !J. Eirstff^ depsaxat apt ( crcj , sa; (cc) 
 
 ps; u,o'vov (J'ta vk <r£ su^apt^cca, 
 II, Eiuxt UTTo'xp.sco; 545 t/iv /.aXoo6* 
 viQv crou. 
 
 acv. 
 II. SuLtTcafeiae p.s l^o rw xxp<ftav 
 
 jxci c«vox«pv;u.svy3v. 
 £. Atari MtXe<% j 
 IT. 'E£ at'tia; tou xaTpo's uoy, 
 B. Ata tov ftatipa sou « ; 
 IJ. Nat, MiXo'p^?" , jjflsXs ^ou »caxa» 
 
 cpavT] va tov aepvicu. 
 $. Ti %«-rrcpsT vx Xst'^ri ei's t3v ousm 
 
 jaou £ia T* ^oetoj^Ti Toy -rra- 
 
 too'; ff&y j 
 IT. Tcu Xci7Tii t$ xaXfiTspov , et<p' cw 
 
 to'u Xeiwst ii sXsuGea.'x. 
 
 B. H eXeuQspta tou &ik t^v iao« 
 
 dva.SocXXsrat. 
 H. To r,yeupo> iteXXa xxXx. 
 B. IloTo; <yoi to £ir:jN ; 
 n. 'O MiXbg^o; 'aotouo. 
 B, 'ftjAl'XlQCSS pi tov MiXo^ov 'Ap~ 
 
 to'jo ; 
 II. Nat, Kupte. 
 B. nolo? tjtov Tvacvv j 
 If. Kavs'va? ; 
 B. Kavs'va? ; 
 IL Ata TTiv uwo'ScCTtv T?3 srarpo's y.oii ? 
 
 itpeirgi va "^iVcTat oiuXia {avci/.w^. 
 
 B ("E^ai ^«cy, ) 
 
 (a) Sou , ck; before the Verb more vernacular, and y I may say „ 
 at present, more correet. 
 
P. Are you displeased at my* n 
 
 having conversed with Lord 
 
 Arthur ? 
 B. No, I am not displeased. B.' 
 
 P. He is the only Man I esteem , IL 
 
 for I think him honourable and 
 
 sincere. 
 B Yes, he's a good Friend £• 
 
 P. He is truly worthy of your II. 
 
 Friendship he speaks nobly and 
 
 with sincerity. He has all the 
 
 characteristics of nobleness and 
 
 ( correct feeling ) 
 B. ( She 's lavish in his praise ) B- 
 
 aside 
 P. He has great regard for my IL 
 
 afflicted Father 
 B. ( There's no harm , in her B- 
 
 speaking well of him on that 
 
 account. ) aside 
 P. My dear Husband is n't it n. 
 
 possible to relieve his mind ? 
 
 B. Yes we'll set his mind at B- 
 
 ease ? 
 P. But when ? IL 
 
 B. When ! When ! as soon as B. 
 
 possible. 
 P k He's easily discompos'd , how IL 
 
 sorry I am for this little failing 
 
 of his. 
 ^. Prepare yourself for our de- B- 
 
 parture 
 P. I am ready, whenever you n. 
 
 please 
 B. Tell Jevre to come here B. 
 
 ( hither. ) 
 P. You shall be obeyed. II. 
 
 B. Don't go, unless you like it. B. 
 
 P. When with you, I cannot but n. 
 
 be pleased. 
 B, Shall we invite any company. B. 
 
 2b 1 xaxo'fa'v^at on toatXYiffa u.2 
 xcrv MtXop^ov 'Aprcup ; 
 
 Ox,t? ^s'v p.ot (u.c. jagu) xattocpaivsrac' 
 Eivat 6 jao'vos ap/ow, orrou Ttp.tb,. 
 xa: jaou cpaivsfxt di-iocrEJ3a<70<; xxJ 
 
 Nat, e'tvat xaXb; cp<Xo$. 
 Etvat a^to? dXr,0tva tti;' cptXta^ 
 oou. AaXet jcaXw; » xat ja£ etXi~ 
 ttptveiay. E-/,et 6'Xa rot flrpoTSpinu.a* 
 ra ty}; su-ye/etas , xal ^>tXc<ppo-' 
 cuvvi;* 
 
 ( Tov e"YX.oip.tcxCet wapa -rtoXu- ) 
 
 ' Ey^st - jae^sXviv d-yaTrYiv «po$ ■ tov 
 
 raXat-irtopov -rcare'pa jaou. 
 ( Av t3v eTwctvvi ^ta touto , edos 
 
 (S'ev eivat -rcovripia. ) 
 
 'A-yaTTViu.sMS jj.su avep, etvat <$"uva- 
 tSv va jayiv T{i.7ropou|/.ev va 7-ov 
 Ttapvi'yopviffcdfi.ev j 
 Nat , 6i'Xoaev tqv irapn^opTisst. 
 
 *AXXa tto'te; 
 
 IIo'te Tro're' csov ra^^a r^airwe- 
 
 «JWJX£V. 
 
 ( Zuy^u^era't euxaXcac' IIoctov jaoij 
 x,ax.ocpatv5Tai tcuto t6 juxpov eXar- 
 Tfa)lXa tou • 
 ETOtjxaaou (ha va dva^tdpr'cwp.f.v^ 
 
 *Eip,at erctju.vj orav Oe'Xv;;.- 
 
 Eire tyjv 'ieSpviv va eX6?5 e£w« 
 
 O ptajAo; cou*, 
 
 A"v <^£V J/ cat. e'ux.apiCVi'AsvYi , [jx* 
 
 eXO^. 
 "O-rav eTjxat p.a£fl sou, $ev i5{mfg- 
 
 pw va y;p,ai ita'pE? e&-/aptg7){/.5vy». 
 
 ©eXsi; va TCpoc/iaXsVoy;^ guv* 
 
P. As f*r as I am ccucerned, I 
 
 care not for any 
 B. Suppose we ask Lord Arthur. 
 
 P. Lord A would be less dis- 
 agreeable to me than any one 
 else. 
 
 B. Do you like the Society of 
 Lord A. 
 
 P. I have no wish for it; but if he, 
 were with us , it wou'd n't be 
 disagreeable to me ( it would 
 in no way discompose me, 
 
 B. ( She appears to me innocsnt 
 Let me not suspect her ( aside 
 For the present we will have 
 no one. If you find it irk- 
 some ( get tired ) we will re- 
 turn to Town 
 
 P. I am uneasy about my Father 
 
 B, Talk to him. Assure him that 
 I keep your wishes in view. Get 
 ready for setting out.. 
 
 P. I am ready, whenever you 
 wish to set off. 
 
 j53 
 
 XI. "Ocov to xar' e(xe, £ev {/.s'Xst p.ot 
 
 B- A? ^pccxaX$'cwixev tov MtXs'o^oiJ 
 
 'a P t:u ? ; 
 IL O' MtXo'fch; 'ApTGup rOeXe (xs dV 
 
 oape^via^ 6Xt^'a>Te?cv dnrb xaQs 
 
 aXXc; • 
 B. 'Aps'axsi est (a)-h c'JVTjo'f'a Toj3 
 
 MtXo'c^cu ; 
 IL Aev TYiv £-rri3ya5> , aXX' av $tov , 
 
 <5"sv rlSs/.e act ^apu<pavvi. 
 
 B- ( Ms cpaivsrat aOwa. M« tyiv' 
 PaXXouev etg uirc^tav. ) Ata tvjv 
 wpav £sv OeXsi eXSfi xavEvets- "Av 
 PafeG^, es'Xoitev iw.sptyzi ilq tviv 
 IlaXtv. 
 
 II. IIcvco <ha Tiv Trar^fa u.cu« 
 
 B- 'OpXviasTO'j, peoattoasTOv o-t e'xw 
 
 irpo ocpQaXp.oiv tg'v ^g'6cv coo xas 
 
 rev t^txov Toy. 'ETOtixacou £ta tov 
 
 fAr,csuaov^.a.;. 
 IT. ©e'Xo> elp.ai. eTOtavi otav. O^cr? 
 
 va dv-xx^pTiccofjuv. 
 
 PHRASES FROM THE AVARE. 
 
 EXENTAVELONES, (i) 
 
 ZQITZA. (2) AND CLEANTHES. 
 
 In conversation at the back of 
 the stage. 
 
 E. ( thinking himself alone conti- 
 nues.) I riont know that I have 
 done right in burying in my gar- 
 den the twenty five thousand 
 piastres they brought me yester- 
 day. My Gardener is careless 
 enough, and never goes into the 
 garden, unless 1 drag him there 
 withme Somuch the better. Ne- 
 
 E^vTao£X(.ovTQ? ? Zwr'r^ xal JQsav%)5 
 
 ( cuvojjuXcuvte; etc to eaurepov 
 
 TOO GsaTfG'J )° 
 
 E, (voiu^wv ort £ivaipt,ovo? s^axcXouOsT) 
 Aev e^cupto cu.w? av s*y<y sxap.a, JtaVa 
 
 *■ tt' E^WCTiC St.; TO TTEOtooXl p„0t> Tat? 
 
 ety.oct7r='vT£ y^Xtao^s; "Ypoaaa 3ca0a>? 
 p.ou Tobcpav I^Qe'?- O rap^oXapYis 
 p.cu etvat dpxsTa cLu,eXy;; xal <5"ev 
 
 TCOTfEt '? TO TTSpSoAt CXV <Kv TOVS 
 G'JOCD {/.OT^t JAO'J. To'g-o) jcaXniTEpa. 
 M' oXov tc/Uto £UocriTr£VTe y^Xtscch; 
 
 (1) Sixty Needles, Pinhunter 
 
 (2) Diminutive of Zwn\ 
 
 6kinfli: 
 
i54 
 
 ver the less, twenty live thousand 
 piastres is a considerable sum 
 for any one to keep about him. 
 (He sees Cleanthes and Zoitza ; 
 hush ) Hola ! I shall betray 
 myself! My warmth has de- 
 prived me of my wits . I 
 thought I was alone, and was 
 making my calculations aloud. 
 ( To Cleanthes and Zoitza. ) 
 Hola! what's the matter? 
 €. Nothing , Father. 
 E. Have you been long here ? 
 C. We are just come. 
 E„ Did you hear ? 
 €. What Father ? 
 E. Here , now. ...» 
 C. What? 
 
 E. What I was saying. 
 K. No! 
 E. Assuredly ( You did ! you 
 
 did! ) 
 Z. Excuse me. 
 
 E„ I see you heard something. 
 I was saying to myself how 
 difficult a thing it is now a-days 
 for any one' to meet with 
 money, and was saying happy's 
 the Man that has twenty five 
 thousand piastres about him ! 
 K. We did n't venture to ap- 
 proach you , lest we should 
 interrupt your calculations. 
 E. I have done well to tell you 
 all , that you may not mistake 
 the matter , and imagine that 
 I was speaking of myself, that 
 I forsooth had twenty five 
 thousand piastres about me. 
 K. We never meddle with your 
 
 affairs. 
 E. I wish I had them ! twenty 
 five thousand piastres ! ! ! ! 
 
 K. I dont believe thai 
 
 E. That would be a glorious thing 
 for me. 
 
 «YjJo'ciffa, v'« va $a£fc xavs?<j fi.avC( 
 tcuj eivai (xta ttoctotyi; apxeTa* • • » 
 ( pXsrcst rev KXeavfrnv xal Ttfv 
 Zwtivfrxv' ot^a ) AtSot ♦ 'At^c p.ov 
 01 ya wf o£o0a> ! O* 6u[ib$ (xou 'wtipe 
 tov vaiv ! @ap£<&<?a tto>$ elji.au fie-* 
 vc; ftou x' eXo^apia^a &{>«• ( IXfiy 
 xiv KXeav&nv x*l tw ZamrCaN ) 
 E" ! ti elvou J 
 
 K.. TiiroTe Trot-rep fui'j - 
 
 E» Ei<j8s ttoXXtiv wpav e£$J 
 
 K- Tcopa or' iiASa^ev* 
 
 j£. H)co6ffar?. • • • • » 
 
 K. Ti Harsp p.ou : 
 
 E. 'EcSVo, Trepa » • • " 
 
 K. Tl; 
 
 E- "Oca eX^a. 
 
 k. "oxt! 
 
 E- 'E^a~avvo? ' £i-aivav7o<; ! 
 
 Z. Me euu-rraSaTS '• 
 
 E- 'E-^co ^Ae'-nrca , 6'ti Tkeuaare x^rj 
 Tt. fifuXeuca pi tov ept,auTo'v {icy s 
 -reo'ffov eJuaxoXov sivat va eufvi x&e 
 vcT; aa-nrpa rriv <rr,u,spov. &ai e'X«« 
 -ya' KaXoTuxc? , oeri; £'x a ttxoatT 
 
 W6VT6 X'^ao £S 7p9<JflF* H$~|* T0U ? 
 
 K« K* ^aei? t^sv EToXu.O'j<raas; va «a$ 
 -rcXr.-siaaafxev , {atiww? J'laxo'tj'wfuv 
 T&i>; Xo^aptacp^ou^ era?. 
 
 E* E f 'xap.a xaXa , xai <?«? ,ra eiira, 
 p'Xa, ixr.-rroj; &xa?£T6 '£avcfcpocpa to 
 Trpsq-fxa, xac cpavTaaOyj-rs? qti eXe- 
 yz <ha t6v sp.a'JTo'v p.o'J, on t«x* 
 e'X<j> jxaT'Ct (aou tixocu^TS "^iXus^s? 
 -vso'craa. 
 
 K.. 'Hjact; ^»v ep^ocCvofxsv tt£ tc<; 
 uTro0?a:£'.; oa$. 
 
 E. "Asatcots va toc Etxa ! Ebcoatftsyre 
 viXt^*5 700'GGa! ! •' ' 
 
 1C- 'E-/w ^b -n;t<r='^ ^'- • * • • 
 
 E- Tsuto -flTCv iToXXa xfeX'n ^cuXetflj 
 -yta '[is'v* • 
 
K- Eat the?* it* things. - . - K. 
 
 1^ For I am in great want of E. 
 3I6ne". 
 
 K. I think.. .. K, 
 
 E. I should be quite at esse if I had j;, 
 them. 
 
 K. Yon are. ... K- 
 
 £. And I should not complain E- 
 as I do cf the hardness of 
 the times. 
 
 For Heaven's sake ! my dear K- 
 Father , there 's no room for 
 --our complaining of the times ! 
 All know that you are rich 
 enough ! 
 
 E. How ? I rich enough ? All E- 
 1? say so are liars ? A 
 greater falsehood can't be. All 
 who spread such reports about 
 me are mischievous Yarlets. 
 : il disposed. ) 
 Dan't he angry. Z. 
 
 E. Ah ! it drives me mad. My E- 
 vn children betray me , and 
 become my enemies. 
 
 K And is every one your enemy K 
 that c::ys you are rich ? 
 
 E. Yes ! These reports of yours , E- 
 your extravagance will 
 be the cause of my ruin , 
 ( being betrayed ) or of their 
 coming at night , and cutting 
 my throat, ( haad off) thinking 
 me made up of Florins. 
 
 Aura S'x ewok •Kpjqp.xza. . « . « 
 K iyjj itoXXr,? ecvcfyutv a~o acrrfsJ 
 
 *Eya <r:7x^cy.at. .... 
 ' HO =Xa s I a a : rt $XXa fa ax ski y, U c ; s 
 
 T ! 
 
 av -x t:/y. • 
 
 KcC: cil; E?or&e ..... 
 K*l ^iv r,9ilx va x}.xio)!i.x'. , 34*- 
 Qla; xaavo , yx tov xa-.piv , cr; 
 civ a: ijoXXa ^j^y^x; • 
 
 Av a-ya-ra; tou Gsov ! Ks)i ITaTr- 
 reason , ^cv «vci. Toy to'ttcv tou va 
 xXa-isSs a~; £:a rev xa'.oov ! "OXot 
 to '£eup6UYj ort evSTc ttX'vUtc-v a;- 
 *etc*! 
 
 IKk ; 'E^-cb ev/j ttXgutcv apxsTo'vj 
 "Oaci to >.s'-;;jv tlv?-. i^sv^at ! 3k- 
 faXpTspov $£U[&a ^sv euttc:-:: va 
 •yew. KaawTpairoe elyou oqct Sixa- 
 tccioow Tsroia Xvyia fia t' eaeva. 
 
 M? oi 8'jptc'vsTe ■ 
 "A ■ tcutq as ^aiuov&st. Ta (<^'.a 
 u.cj rexva va ui Trccc3 v :c^cuv ? xai 
 vi ■yivcwreu ix®? i gtou< 
 
 • Kal iyfj?6? ca; eiva;, c^--.; Xe^eip 
 
 0T1 EXBTS ^XC'JTCV; 
 
 ZNa-sxs ' Autoe ecu Ta J.o'y.a x.x\ 
 Ta ;;:ji orou 6e va ^aOouv av?!3 
 
 va [is -rroo^coccjv vj va e*X- 
 
 6:jv tw vjxto. va usu xoicuv to 
 xs9aXt , votct^evre; ae ffaxxj "Vii'.a- 
 t&v (jpXaoi. 
 
 SYESTAVZLOrfES A>'D ZOITZA. 
 
 E. There , so much for our lady 
 like beans ( Dandies ) they have 
 no more strength than a gar- 
 den stick. There my child. 
 s what I have decided on 
 for myself. For your Brother, 
 I have fix'd on a "Widow , 
 
 E. Tux '$k Ta Capuptxa v afxcvTcTsf/.s. 
 Eivat fioa xxt\ ^uvara lax its nx~ 
 Aouxia. Et& ^a xo'pr, jjtou. TouVo x~i- 
 ^acica, £tx tov eaauTo'v ptcu. Aia Tcy 
 a^EA^c'v cou £^'.a/.2;a p.vav xa-ctav 
 ^T,5av , Tree! tx; c'rrcta; u.e 'a'Xr.aav 
 
i5o 
 
 they were talking to me about 
 this morning , and I'll many 
 you to M r , i*. 
 
 2. To M.rB. 
 
 E. Yes! a shrew J, prudent, mid- 
 dle aged Man ! he's hardly 
 fifty. Every body 's loud about 
 his Wealth 
 
 Z. I'd rather not marry, if you 
 please Papa. 
 
 £. And I my child, my sweet, 
 my darling had rather, if you 
 please , marry you 
 
 Z. I beg you'll excuse me Papa 
 
 £. I beg you'll excuse me, my 
 child. 
 
 2. I am Mr. B's most humble 
 Servant. If however it be 
 the same to you ( With your 
 leave however) curtsies, I'll not 
 have him. 
 
 E. I am yours most humbly ; but 
 ( bows ) with your leave you 
 shall have him, this very e- 
 
 Z. This E- 
 
 srenmg 
 
 E. This Evenii 
 
 Z. ( curtsying ) that can't be Papa 
 
 E, ( bowing ) that shall be, my 
 
 child. 
 2. No! 
 K. Yes ! 
 2. No, I say 
 E. Yes I say. 
 Z. On this point you will not 
 
 force me. 
 E, On this point I will force you 
 
 2. I'd rather die ( kill myself ) 
 than have him for a husband 
 
 Jl. You shall not dip, and you 
 •shall have him. Did you ever 
 see such insolence ? Bit! any 
 one ever see a child talk in 
 this way to her Father ? 
 
 J ixxv$pl§to fie r'av xupix^viv Bap£a> 
 Xa[AT0UjU.7rav. 
 
 Z. Me rov xupiT£nvB^£aXa{A7rouf/.irav; 
 E. Na(<j*s I A vSpwrrov -snXw.tofi.Evov> y-ou 
 
 cfipdvi^.ov , xal 'ptixrao'v • Mo'Xt; e^ei 
 
 tou; TCevrivTa. Ta wXcvtyi tou ^a 
 
 oAot ice 9Y)p.i^cuv. 
 Z. E'^w, Tvdrep p.co, $h urav^peuoaau 
 
 av eivat dptcjAo; ca;. 
 E. Kat ''yw , x-o'prj jxcu , xo>v/.fc>vd pou f 
 
 yacWfjisV/i poo , 0e va as Vav^ps^co , 
 
 av eivat optcrjj.es oa?, 
 Z. 2a; £yit£> cu'YX," l ? y i <Itv ■> iraTspp.ou* 
 jE. 2a; £/jto> <Ju^x«p7)Giv , jco'py) pou 1 
 
 Z. Elfxai Ta7r£ivo-rarvi £guXyi tcu Bap£a° 
 Xap.7vo6{X7va."O k u.cd? — (xau.vei cyji~ 
 p,a TrpocrJcuvTioecoi;) ae tyjv ac^stav ca? 
 t^ev Se'Xw tcv ewagsiv. 
 
 E. Etaat TairsivoTfltTO^ £ouXg<; aa?. *»-*• 
 "Op.ti)? ( zafivst xat wires oyr>[ 1 - rL ) 
 
 pi tyiv a^etso oa; > 0e va tov eirapvi; 
 
 Z. *AivoiJ/e : 
 
 E. 'Awo'ijiei 
 
 Z. ( Kauvoycxa g'/tiM. ). Tooro £sv -p 
 
 \erai ivdTSp p,ou. 
 E. ( xaavcov »ai auTo 1 ; cyjip.a ). Toutc 
 
 8s va ^ivy) Jw'pY) pou ' 
 
 z."o r J 
 
 E. Naujxs ! 
 
 Z. o-yscrjes , aa; Xc'f to.' 
 
 E. NafycG&s > oa; Xs'^'co. 
 
 Z. Et; to'jto to rcpa-yaa o sv fliXsre ft* 
 
 Kva^Jtaastv. 
 E. Et; touto to irpa-/iJt.a fls va ca; 
 
 dva'yx.aacD. 
 Z. ZxoTo'vopat xaXr.repa , xapa vx 
 
 '-rjapw TOicuTou avapa. 
 E. Asv ax-OTo'veaai , xai tov &-rracpsi;. ; 
 
 Fta 'c^s? d^tavrpoivia ! £tc?£ xcW 
 
 X7.V£l? JCOpJT^t va 'puXYJ TOlCUTOTpOWtd? 
 
 tov watspa xcu ; 
 
2, And did ever any body se« 
 a Father marry his Daughter 
 in such a way ? 
 
 £, It's an excellent match. N6- 
 body can find fault with it. 
 I'll engage, all the world will 
 commend my Choice. 
 
 Z. And I'll engage that no one 
 in his senses will commend it. 
 
 E. ( seeing Demetrius at a dis- 
 tance ) There's Demetrius ! are 
 you willing we should make 
 him our judge. 
 
 Z. With all my heart. 
 
 E. Will you abide by his judg- 
 ment. 
 
 Z. Gladly ! I'll abide by whatever 
 he may say. 
 
 S. Tis settled. 
 
 SS7 
 
 2. K* e!c?e itork Kdve't? war spa, , va 
 
 'frav^t'Sip TOiOUTOTpOTTCd; tw xo' d 
 
 pnv tou-; 
 
 E. To pspo? sTvat TtoXXa jcxXc'v. Terrors 
 ^"ev Ij^ftt vd VJj Jtavet?. 2toi-/yj|ao, 
 €d\>eo , #Xo? 6 xo'cp,o; 81 va "rtaivsav) 
 Tflv exXc-p |j.cu. 
 
 2. K' s-jfcl) s-cr/r.aa (3dv<i> , ore fcdvst? 
 cppo'viao; <^sv fie'Xst t*/)v &7ratvs<rsiv. 
 
 E. ( SAc'tfmv tov AtiuYjTpaxviv d-rco JAO." 
 xpcrt ). Nd 6 AY)^.y!Tpdi4Yi? ! Oe'Xet; vod 
 •rove >td k u.o)p.QV y.piTviv jx,x; ; 
 
 Z. Zrep^w. 
 
 E. As^eca*. tyjv Kp'atv tcu ; 
 
 Z. Mara x*p«S ' eu^api^ayjiai £t? o,rt 
 
 etTvf . 
 E. TeXetworel 
 
 Demetrius Exentavelones akd Zoitza, 
 
 E. Come here Demetrius ! we 
 have chosen you to decide 
 which of us two is right, I or 
 my Daughter. 
 
 D. Your honor no doubt. 
 
 E. Do you know what we are 
 debating about. 
 
 D. No; but your honour can't 
 be wrong, for you are justice 
 itself. 
 
 E. I wish to marry her this e- 
 vening to a steady, rich husband 
 And this madcap gipsy has been 
 telling me to my face that she 
 despises him , and wont have 
 him. What think you ? What 
 say you ? 
 
 D. What do I say ? 
 
 E. Yes ! 
 
 D. Humph. ! Humph ! 
 
 E. What ? 
 
 E. 'EXa '$& Anforrpaxn ' ff' e<hdXe'£au.stf 
 vd icptvip? vie, ck-no rou<; &\id [iz; iyj-i 
 ^(xxtov , e-ya) , r, r, xo'pv) p.cu. 
 
 A. II suyevia ca; , AuQs'vra. ' xwp^ 
 
 dj^oXiav ! 
 E. -Eljsupei; -rcspi tiv&s elvac 0X6*^0? jxa^ 
 
 A, 'OvV tcXtiv V] su-yevia ex? ^ev eairo- 
 peiTS va e^'/its athjcov , rS'isTi eia9s 
 
 E. 'Aitttys 82XM va rr.v UTrav^ps'^6) p.' 
 evav' av8p.co7rov /sat (ppo'vtpov x.cd 
 
 r.Xouctov iv rauTM. Kiaurfl "h (rp-'-fXa, 
 ^ Top'p'va, p,l TW77S jcarx Trpo'cro)- 
 
 7T0V , OTl TOV Jt«Ta?ppOV£t, Xai $SV 
 
 tov liraipei. Ti ce <patverat j T4 
 
 Xejsic ; 
 A. Ti Xs^to J 
 E. Nal ! 
 
 A.E w !e? 
 E. Ti ; 
 
»S8 
 
 D. I say that, in the main, 
 
 I am of your opinion for your 
 honor cant be but right ; but 
 the young Lady , however is ? 
 not altogether wrong; for.... 
 
 £. How ? Mr. B is a man of 
 great worth. He's a Stran- 
 ger it's true; but he's of good 
 family, respected, mild and a- 
 miable, and in good circum- 
 stances. He has no children 
 by his first marriage. He had, 
 as he says, two, but they were 
 murdered together with his 
 wife while on one of his Jour- 
 nies. Whom could she meet 
 with better; 
 
 D, True I but the young luadj 
 may say, that you are a little 
 hasty in the Business ; and that 
 a little time is requisite, that 
 she may see whether their 
 dispositions suit, 
 
 E> Humph ! this is a chance that 
 any one ought to catch at with 
 open arms. I am here of- 
 fered an advantage that I shall 
 never again meet with. The 
 Mans to take her without 
 Dower. 
 
 D. Without Dower? (fortune), (i) 
 
 E. Without fortune. 
 
 B. Oh ! Then I have nothing 
 more to say. There indeed; 
 that's an argument that at once 
 convinces me 
 
 Ec And as for me! it is a con- 
 siderable saving for me ! 
 
 D. Assuredly ! the matter don't 
 admit of ( is past ) contradic- 
 tion. The young Lady indeed 
 
 rr.v •yvwti.Tiv <ra;' i-^v^r.-h EU'ye.vta gx; 
 ^ev ejxwopeiTS va p.T|v zynre «?ixaic<^ 
 OU.W? — scat aurr, r, xa-tj/o'jXa <?:>» 
 t/ti oXcv to a^txov. ETretcJ'Yi. 
 E. IIco;; O gupitTfl? Bap^aXaiATvcytt- x, 
 eivai av8po)7rog d^io'Xc-jo; ' Ss'voc elvat 
 dXriOiva, eivat 6'u.ai; Eti-jEvr^j 7;iOQp,svo;) 
 "jfXuxo;, r'aspo; , xal ircXXa y.oj3e&<*/r 
 ju.s've;. A it 6 tov 7vp&70v tou ^«u.oV 
 £ev e^si 7£*va. AOu ei^s > xa6o; 
 X^ii , y.oX row Ttvqwav v ua^i p.i 
 TTiV *p va tX3C T0 ' J 1 £ i; ^ a T&u T ~- 
 ^El^t. II&IOV SXXoV £{Jt.T;0feT &J7T1 VflC 
 
 e3pT) xaXiiTeoov j 
 
 A. AXvjSiva • IlXr,y ^ x'oxxava 'jMrepst 
 vaoa? £i7r?j, ort *(Jav v.a .pia^f 
 ©Xfysv 7a i7psc-j'u.a7a" xac or* yjieia- 
 &TCLi o)Jrpq xaipo? va tVKi xai autr 3 
 av ri y.Xtoi? tv); sty.TTopsI va 'ratpetacwj 
 
 p.£7GV.. .. ■ 
 
 E. E"! AU77) elvat (*{a eyxatpia, t*jv 
 <57rc ; iav wpe'iret JCavEts va 7>)v dcJ'pa^n 
 pi 7a <SVo 7cu x s 'f '•#• 'E-ycd £upi<;x*> 
 £(S"u tuav £U7U)(,iav, 7r,v circ'av aXX«*8 
 
 TCU 7TC7£ c^EV 6e VCC 7^V eUpft). O «V 
 
 flotowe; rr,v ETraiosi vwpl; ^pclx.:*; 
 
 A, Xwpl; Tvpcua ; 
 E. Xcapt; -rcpoTxa ! 
 
 A. £}" ! E<Su 77AS0V £s? 4/0 717TC 
 
 eitco). BXeure7S <$a ; Na sva; 
 
 : v* 
 
 E. Kiajlu-s ' toIjto "yva t' dalva Eivai 
 
 xajx^can oiJtovoata! 
 A. Be P a.i3Ta7a ! To Ttpavaa (^i'v sr.iJ'i - 
 
 X&70'. av7tXo , y.'av. , A>.Yi6iva,r) xc'py) ca; 
 
 ep.7Tcp£i va ca; &v6'J k u.ia*/3 , 07!. 6 -•;»- 
 
 (r) The former is the legal term, the latter more usual in con- 
 versation.. 
 
?3ar remind you that marriage 
 is a very delicate subject, and 
 requires consideration: that one 
 may thereby become happy 
 cr miserable throughout life : 
 that a union, that is to last 
 for life should be form'd -u ith 
 great care and circumspection. 
 
 E: Without fortune! 
 
 I). You 're right ! that settles all. 
 I don't dispute the point. But 
 some may say that in such 
 cases one ought undoubtedly 
 to consult the inclination of 
 the Lady. And that great dif- 
 ference of age, disposition and 
 sentiments frequently exposes 
 marriage to distressing vicissi- 
 tudes, 
 
 E. Without fortune! 
 
 D. Humph ! You need not repeat. 
 1 know all that. Who can pos- 
 sibly resist. But some fathers 
 ■would think more of gratifying 
 their daughters than of their 
 pockets. They could not endure 
 the sacrifice of their children 
 to their own gain, but would 
 rather endeavor by every other 
 means to establish the union 
 on the congenial sentiments of 
 the parties ( espoused ) so as to 
 preserve uninterrupted its ho- 
 nor peace and joy , and. „ , 
 
 E. Without fortune, 
 
 D. True ! this stops every one's 
 mouth. Without fortune. How 
 can any one resist such an 
 argument. 
 
 E. ( looking towards his garden, 
 hush ) Hark! I think I hear 
 the dog bark. Perhaps they're 
 after my Money ( to Demetrius ) 
 Dont stir, Til be with you 
 instantly. - 
 
 uc<; eivxi TTfafua a&XXa 7u£/)Xcv ? 
 
 XXI X? £lJ ^ £Ta « TTpOCOXY.v' OT» , U.3 
 
 Tsjro •j.-xozil ik fivri xxv=T; euru- 
 
 on, y.ix crjvTpcpix, -fir;; 0='Xii £tap-- 
 xiaiiv p''x?* Osvx'rcu, irps'wet va, 
 cuu^uvrirai p.l usyaXriV ffxr^w xal 
 •^acaTTlcr.T'.v. 
 
 £• Xoop I- Tvpotxa ! 
 
 A-' Exsre ^txai-.v ! TcSto r« Xcr'?rrst 8Xa.' 
 Ai\ era; avT-.7ixQu.at. 'E^TrcpoCv Sjwas 
 tiv«5 va ca; ecrauv , cri ei? waso- 
 p.o(x; Tresirxcs'.; , avaacpi^^toc wos- 
 «sr y.ivtT? va Traparrjp'r; rr.v x-Xectv 
 T?fc KoTriXa*. Kai , on *j p-s-yaXn 
 £tx^op x rris 7jXix'x<; , xal tv;$ ^.^ 
 0£C3u^ , xxi Tcbv cpovmy-aTtev xaiAvet 
 rev -yap-cv va uws'xsitom iroXXax-.; etj 
 GX«£ep« cypfk^xo'TX. 
 
 E. Xwct; ttocTxx ! 
 
 A. A' i £e l v xpJ'-a^rai va pi to '{-avxet- 
 t^t£. To '?s'j;u ^oX>.a xxXa. ITo'cc 
 ^capoXo; Ep.irop=i va evxvTto>6vJ 5 
 IlXrv , eivai xxurocxoi -jrarepsij t 
 etnve; -poxp'vouv xxXr-cOX va eox cZ>i 
 p(C«»v Tr.v x-Jpjv twv, ivxpa TW 
 caxxcOXav :wv. Ol Ttco^TOi (5^v utto~ 
 ^s'pcuv v* 6'jcia^ouv tz ts'xvx to>v 
 e«? to c£tov xt'ooo?' aXXi gnrfiShi 77s- 
 ptoad-repcv aro ^rav aXXo rrpx-yjix , 
 vx GeasXic'vwjTi to auvotxsVtov et; tv!v 
 cK»«^pwvtav too av^popvou, yj 5«ot"« 
 dta'fjXsTT^i d^taxowov tviv tiit/iv ? 
 xstt tyjv £ip7ivy,v , xxi Tr ; v xafav tcj, 
 X4I 7) eivoia. . . . 
 
 E- Xwpl; TTfoTxft .' 
 
 A. MaXs^a ! touto xAsUi xo <?£u.m x%» 
 ftiVo;.- Xwpl; wpolx* ! II5>; v'«WT4- 
 C<x9ti xivel; si; evx toioutov Xc'-yov ! 
 
 E» ( x-J7Ta<^)y -?rpo5 to 7cepiPoV-r«»j 
 cc-ycc )• A'l^cT ! MoO 9x^x1 v'axouo 
 tcv uxuXXov vx -yau^T). IIx; xxl 
 Treipal'cyv t ajTTSX ixoy ; ITpo; tov 
 AttavrrpaV/iv ) M"/i c.".X?^.' Na tte 
 x' e'fQxoa, 
 
x6o 
 
 Exexitavelones , Demetrius , and 
 Master John. 
 
 J£. Come now Demetrius and lend 
 me your assistance here. Hola 
 Master John, I have left you 
 till the very last. 
 
 J. What's your pleasure. 
 
 E, I am going to give an Enter- 
 tainment this evening. 
 
 J. Marvellously strange ! how's 
 this. ( how now J. 
 
 E Come tell me , will you give 
 us good fare ( a good dinner 
 or siipper. ) 
 
 J. And why not, if you give me 
 plenty of Money. 
 
 E. What the deuce ! Nothing 
 but Money. These Men talk of 
 nothing else but Money ! Mo- 
 ney ! Money ! Nothing runs in 
 their heads but Money. 
 
 B. Nor I , in my life did I ever 
 hear so impertinent an answer. 
 Humph ! A mighty art forsooth, 
 to provide good fare with plenty 
 of Money. This the veriest clown 
 .would do. Nay our old Cat 
 would do as much,, A good 
 Cook should know how to 
 give good fare for little Money! 
 
 J. Good cheer for little Money ! 
 
 D. Yes. 
 
 J. Faith, I wish your honor would 
 let me into this secret. Other- 
 wise , take my place, tie on my 
 Apron , and do Cook : you 
 meddle (and make ) with every 
 thing : you're like Garlic in 
 every Dish. 
 
 E. Peace ! What shall we want 
 John. 
 
 (l) Kup TtavvYK-. 
 E. EXa To>pa » AY,ar}Tpa)aj , va \ki 
 GorMay; £<$«• E" xvp I\avW] ! ecs'vtf 
 g a.yr,xot. &Xov x,' u<tepa. 
 
 F Tt *vt) cuptcmo'; <ja; ; 
 
 E. 'E-fa), *op Ftavvn, 6s va xa|i.oi inotyt 
 
 r° Mci'y^Xcy. 8a\i/.a I ttco? xrav aura ' 
 
 j&. Ficc 7T£s ja£ 6s yx p.2; xap/ps jcaXa 
 
 F- Mua apt, "ytctTt" <?a p.ol £oJ<re wouX- 
 Xa "yptfeia. 
 
 E. Ti ^iaScXo •' 6'Xo "ypo'aora. Tlut* oi 
 avOpwrcot £ev s^ouv a>.Xo t:ttot$ 
 va 'ucuv , -{Aova^a •ypo'aaa, •j'oo'aaa , 
 'ypo'aaa ! Toutov tgv Xo'ycv . g^ou« 
 -rravra'? to vou rcftv «ypo'<7cra ' 
 
 A. M/zv^' e-yco ^sv Tjjcoutrasis rov friWv u.ou 
 toVcv ao^iavTCCwov aTPo'xpiciv- A - 
 Ms-yaXv} Te'xvyi p,aflc, va xaa\j xavets 
 xaXa cpa-yviTa p-,s rcoXXa ^po'crta. 
 Touto to xau.vet xat 6 nrXe'cv oupio?- 
 ^ociaTr,;. To xoqxvet. x 7) "/ara [/.a;- 
 O xaXo; ou-a^-tp^ Trps-jret va xapvvp 
 xaXa (pa-ynTa u.s oXuya 'ypo'sia. 
 
 r» KaXa t^aia p. el Xi-ya "ypoata ; 
 A. Nat ! 
 
 F. Ma tv aXr'Oeta cra'^-nroupsi; 7) acpeiv- 
 ^ia <y (xaGet p.st x etp.sv auro rob 
 p.y^txo. Ei £el (at; , wap' tv a£;'a 
 p.' xat Cwjou ttjv «ou£ta p.' xal ■ys'- 
 vsi pt.astpa;. 2i 6'Xa Ta irpaaaT 
 avaxaTcoveta' ei^S piica , aav tou 
 Kpou|i,a6^ 5 '? Ta tpa I a, 
 
 E. 2uotcyj! ti 8s va p. a; y^eiaoQoOv xl>p 
 Fiaw?} ; 
 
 i) Usual in speaking te an old Servant. 
 
jf* ; "Let vour Steward look to that; 
 he knows how to give good 
 cheer for little Money. 
 
 E. Pshaw! I wish you to an- 
 swer. 
 
 J. How many shall you (sit down) 
 be at table? 
 
 E. We shall be eight or ten : say- 
 eight: where eight can mrtke a 
 meal , ten may (will find some- 
 thing to ) eat. (i) 
 
 D. Certainly. 
 
 J. Well! say ten pounds of meat 
 for Soup and Bouille , ten 
 Fowls, a Lamb for stewing. 
 
 E. What the plague : this would 
 be enough to feast (entertain ) 
 the whole Town. 
 
 J. Roast. . .. 
 
 %. ( Puts his hands on John's 
 Mouth ). A Murrain on you I 
 You'd eat ( me out of house 
 and home J up all I have. 
 
 J. Saltfish ( Sturgeon J Salad. . . . 
 
 E. ( Stopping his Mouth ) More 
 still ? 
 
 tbt 
 
 V. Ap,' V5C £l<5a> V] TTlTpOUTTC.'? Qv.; (a) ! 
 
 Auto; '£s'p' va xi[x xaXa ©al'i p.si 
 Xi^a •ypoaia. 
 
 E. 'nfpou 1 'E^w 6c'Aw va p.' cc7;c/.pi(to;; 
 ecu- 
 
 F. HoV 6a vac? \ tou tpawef; 
 
 E, ©i va 3 pa<r6e bV/rw , r, &h%. Ba'Xe 
 c»tw , TPta^'cuva x.ai ^sV.a. 
 
 A. Bs'Paia ! 
 
 r. KaXo ! BaXet si; ouxat^&t; fcpe'a; (Sou- 
 £tvb <ha cou-rca >oo Spans', A^& 
 •pviSsi;. "Ev' apvt S'ta p,a*ystpY!t>7d..., 
 
 E. T*. <fra(3oXo I Au~a cpGavouvs va 
 atXsucwa oXyi 77jv TroXireia ! 
 
 T. 'Orcto 
 
 E. ( fis&si to /ipt rou at; to co'pa tcu 
 x-jp Fiawm ). A' xarnpajitvel 'Ecu 6s 
 
 va ok; oXo to 4 ©id; p»ou. 
 
 T. Hypi^ta * 2«XaT .... 
 
 E- ( psexa tcu opa'Cci to sou.!z}i %xj\j.&', 
 
 (a) ©ETTaXtxov i'6o; va Trpccpspwaiv u; sttI to irXsT^ov tk dpcsvt/.a ova'para 
 jAS.apSpcv 8vjXuJco'v. H' <juvr<Qsia sp,eivsv a770 tcu; waXaiou; Acoptst; pa;. 'Ex.stvei 
 aX6«yov,« *n TapTapo; , ^ $60770;, 7j Ia8p,o; », )tal 6'Xa tk ouota^txoc twv 
 cjcauTo);' t'-^e wept AiaXs'xTwv IaV.&a©'„ Zu^/.epov. OEconomus. 
 
 (i) It is difficult here to give, in English , a correct idea of the 
 different senses of the Aorisl ©sfycuvs , arid the Present Tpw^ouvs. 
 
O NOMAS TIC ON 
 
 OR 
 
 LIST OF WORDS OF MORE IMMEDIATE USE 
 
 UNDER DIFFERENT HEADS, 
 t 
 
 N. B. This Mark * indicates Words to he of Hellenic origin not y«t g&* 
 nerally in use, this mark § Words of foreign oiigin very generally ia use* 
 
 Of Heaven and the Elements. 
 
 lisp: tcu cupocv«u xa\ tuv soi^dm. 
 
 (.TOP , o ftelifi , gen. cu. 
 Jesus-Christ, 'incrou? Xpico§", ou. 
 The Holy Spirit, T d &ytsv iw*3fA«. 
 The Virgin , ^ wavoqia 5 t'a? , Vj 0so- 
 
 The Angels, ei- #YTsXoi, mv-j 
 
 The Saints , 01 07101 , uov. 
 
 Heaven , 6 eupavo? , ou. 
 
 The Heavens or Firmament , to 
 ^ep^'w^a , «to?. 
 
 Paradise , 6 7rapa£st<r«$ , »u. 
 
 Hell , vi xo'Xa<r.? , s<o?, 
 
 Purgatory, to xaflapTTiptov GrCp), iou. 
 
 The Evil Spirit , © ^ia(3sXo? , ou. 
 
 Fire, ^ cpwrta, ta;. to wup, t&u Twpb?. 
 
 Air, 6 aspa? , a. 
 
 Sea , Y) 6aXa<j<ra ,. vis. 
 
 Earth, -t\ «p5, r?. a ( to x^M*** <xto? 3 ) 
 Land opposed to Sea, ^ cepsa, 
 ea<;. v) £vipa , a;- 
 Sun , o y.Xio?, t'ou. 
 
 Moon, t« cpe-^?epi , toOY vi eeXrvv), *i$. 
 Star , o a<rvip , epos, to a^pov. 
 
 Ray , Beam , % * farls , Tvc?. Sun 
 
 Beams , ar *jXta*sai kxtTv^, 
 Cloud , to «6we<pov , oi>. it clouds, is, 
 or is becoming cloudy, ffuwe^ia&et. 
 Wind , o av2{xo^ , ou. d dspa$. it i» 
 
 windy, ©usx. 
 Rain , $ (3poy^ , $;, Heavy Rain # 
 
 pa-^aio, £pox*- Drought , dva- 
 
 Pp°X l *« * avcfiPpia , a?. 
 Thunder, Clap of Thunder, ^ £pov* 
 
 rri , r;- It thunders, ppovra. 
 Lightning, ^ » T paicyj, ifc. it lightens, 
 
 a<rpaiTTet« 
 Hail, to x***&» l °y. it hails 9 xaXatfa* 
 
 O/" ptTTTSt x a ^*C'* 
 
 Thunderbolt,* 6 xspauvbs , ©u, a ? p fl - 
 
 •jteXekc 
 Snow, tox^o'v?, too. it snows, ^tovj^«K 
 Frost, 6 roryo; , ou. it freeze* , iqi.- 
 
 p'vst. 
 Ice , ^ jtpu?-aXXo? , cu» 
 Dew, ^ ^po'ce? , ou. ^^pcffta, t*s* 
 Fog, Mist, x xaTaxvia, ta$. 
 Earthquake, £ seiff^o? * ou. 
 Deluge, Flood , 6 xaTaxJw^s ». «&' 
 Heat, Vj £eVr,, *>;. 
 Cold 7 TO jtpuov j «0* 
 
t.6'5 
 
 Of Times and Seasons. 
 
 Bays of the TVeeh. 
 
 Slept tc2 xaipoij xat twv uswv tguetoU?. JlI Huipa;? r?i; E$£oaa^G$« 
 
 Day > 7) 7Wpa, a;. 
 Night , v] vuxt« , a;« * tv:; vwere$. 
 Pnooii , 70 [££<rousp(j iou. 
 Midnight , T a uicavyar*. 
 Dawn , r, au-p , m\ 
 Daybreak, T a ^pap^aTa. ra £v)ttsp«- 
 fxara. it dawns, or is dawning-, 
 
 Sunset , -jn J'ugs?. -ra PaotXsua* TOU 
 
 4Xi«u. the Sun is setting , pcwi- 
 
 Xsuet 6 rXtc?. 
 The Morning- , to* woupvo , ow- 
 Evening, T o 3pad\i , emu- adv. a<rro- 
 
 Ppadfis* This evening , alroye. 
 Hour, % wox. half hour, gu<ra Spa. 
 
 quarter of an hour, T o * Ts'raprov, 
 
 cj. to § jwuap-ro , »u. 
 To day, cr'aepov. 
 Yesterday, E 'xSe«- fyis- 
 To morrow, auptov- the day after 
 
 to morrow , T7jv £fti» %ip»* , 
 
 ■rijv i^aupiov- 
 The day before yesterday , wpoxOs?. 
 The day after to morrow, uegayciov-- 
 Aiter dinner, T & etovynipa. 
 Week , r, ip^oji.a<5 , a , bf. 
 Month, c p. viva:, * tou u.vjv»V- 
 Year, 5 xpevo; j cu - ~ : -> c"tc:, cj;. 
 
 t, xpcyia , ta<;. I wish you a happy 
 
 new year , <j« ; sfigopn aaXw 
 
 a?y;.JCpcvisc. 
 Moment , r ^i^ar) , %. 
 Spring , r ( afootfe , r,;, 
 Summer , T k axXcxatpt , io». 
 Autumn , to «p8ivs'?rcapev , ot>. 
 Winter, 6 y^taava;, a. 'Tis winter, 
 
 y_c'.a«viaa£. 
 
 Festival , ^ £ pT7i , ifc. Holyday , 
 
 r. <ryo'Xri , n;. 
 Working day , r- -^.Hur^yr. } »j$. 
 
 Monday, rj foutepa, a?. 
 Tuesday, -» T piTV>, *;. 
 Wednesday , ,, T*Tpa£« , «;. 
 Thursday, yj ««pni , w;- 
 
 Friday, V) Trscpxcrxrjv: , -/:;. 
 Saturday, T o'§ <ra££aTo,cu. 
 Sunday , yj xapiax^ , rfc. 
 
 Z%e Months. 
 
 January , § b iaveuapto? , iou. 
 February , § b oeSpouapto; , tw» 
 March , § 6 fiap-to?, iou. 
 April , § 6 dwcpiXios , wu. 
 May » § o p.ai'o; , ton. 
 June, § 6 louvtoc , iou. 66epig , /)?» % 
 July , § 6 106X10; , toy. 6 aXcavicp/;?, n« 
 August , § £ a5?o<j<rc; , cu. 
 September , § 6 vsirripppcoc > &»" 
 
 o rpu-y^'vi; , vi- 
 October , § o 6*T»]3pi©$ , icu. 
 November , § 6 voep.€ptos , igu. 
 December , § 6 £fexep,£pcog , fcuw 
 
 Fasts and Festivals* 
 At 2y,o'X7.t; , a! 'EopraTs* 
 
 New Year's Day , to* vs'w ere;- 7j 
 ( r.aa'pa ) tow av(cv BaatXeiou. r.ai- 
 
 Circumcision , ■£ "respire^ j ife. 
 
 Epiphany, Twelfth day, 7 a 0eo'f«- 
 
 vsta. ra «pwra« 
 Carnival , v\ dr:ox5£ta, et«;, piur. 
 
 oti d-rvo/.peiat;. 
 Lent, r, casaxs^fl , vj;. v^ Teffffa^a^ 
 
 Fast, r, vvj^eto, eia?. to fast , to an- 
 stain from flesh, vyiceum. Tpw-y« 
 vr.q-'.'ia'.ua, - aapax.o<riava.tO break 
 
1 64 
 
 fast voluntarily, xaraXJoj. - in- 
 voluntarily, dcraivojAy/.. aor. {,0 riV . 
 To eat flesh, Tpw-fta x;ao-/aXtva , — 
 
 Passion Week , ^ pe-foXi] i^oaa^a. 
 Palm Sunday, T a ,3ai'a , afwv. 
 Good-Friday , r, u^-aXY) Trapao-y-suYi. 
 Easter Day , V) Aauwptt , %. 
 Easter, T o fla«x«. 
 Ascension, ^ava>w|>i;,* ews- 
 Whit j Sunday, « wevrwKos??, 
 All Saints, ■« soprin twv a"y'wv Travrwv. 
 Christmas day , T a xpr^cu-^evva, wv- 
 Harvest, 6 Sepierito? , so. 
 Vintage , 6 Tpy-yc; , ou. 
 
 Ecclesiastic Orders. 
 IlcOt ey//6Xr,aca^tx£)v A'^iwaaxcov* 
 
 Patriarch , 6 warpia 
 
 ptapjno?, cu 
 
 et*. 
 
 Metropolitan ? c ^rpcwoXtTus , cu. 
 Archbishop , 6 apxiemaxases , eo. 
 
 6 ^ccr-irr,; , ou. 
 Bishop , 5 e ^'eraoTro? , cu. 
 Legate , 6 Ii«pxo£ , do. 
 Presbyter, Priest, 6 7;peo-guTepo; , cu- 
 
 & -^a-a; ; 5- c Upeo; , s'w;. 
 Archdeacon , 6 ap//.£tay.cvo; , ou. 
 
 Subdeacon, uire^tajocves , ou. 
 Deacon, 6 £ta*ovo? . ou. 
 Archimandrite , 6 apx l pww£piT«s, y 
 
 or r,. 
 Curate , a sV/iuipto; , tou. 
 Prior, 6 v.-vcuucvc? , ou- 
 Monk , 6 >wcXo-fssQ; , ou. o * [xoysc^ov, 
 
 CVT0?. 
 
 IVun,^ x.aXo-j'p£'.a,i'.5;-r,*(jt.ovaCcuca,r^. 
 Preacher , | Upw^pul , usee?. 
 Hermit , 6 ao-y^r/jc , oo. 
 Convent , Monastery, to {xova<r>ipiov, 
 iiu- t. uiovt; , ?i;. t$ p.sTc'x,i , i&u* 
 
 Customary Articles a/ food, 
 Ta irXeov covstOiapivs cpa-^TaV 
 
 Bread, T o ^uul , too. — new bread, 
 fynetpo*. I gain my hread — *- 
 my livelihood, £j5«ya£«> ~* t^F" ! xc '- 1 * 
 Water , T q vspov , ou. clear , pure 
 water , aaOapo* veoo'v. — thick , 
 disturbed ftoXo'v- — cool , yux,poV 
 hot , £ e <ro'v. lukewarm , tepid 9 
 XXtapo'v- — boiling, 3pa<rc'v« 
 Wine , to 1 >waal, tou. 
 Meat , to xpsa£ , eaTO?. 
 Fish, to $apt, tou —fresh, § ta- 
 fe'Ttxo. vtoTuo'v. — stale , cayXov. 
 Boiled Meat, to €p.a<ro'v. to vco>- 
 
 3p«?o, cu. 
 Roast Meat , to iviTov , cu- 
 Cake , Pie , to § ftizciu^iKi , iou- ' 
 
 to -Xay.cuvT'.ov , tou. r, /xixct, a;- 
 Soup , § ri acu-ra , a;. 
 Broth , to £(Ofv. , wo> 
 Salad „ § r, axXx-ca. , a?. 
 Sauce, § r, caXT^a , a;-* to eu^au.- 
 
 p.a, arc?. 
 Ragout , Hash , 7 b £prup.x , octo;. 
 
 to y,xpu*£uu.a ; aro?. 
 Dessert , § roc cppcuTTa, wv- ra orca- 
 
 ptxa , civ. 
 Cheese , to Tupt , tou- 
 
 Table Articles. 
 
 Ta wepe tt,v Tparr^ocvv 
 
 Table , to Tpa~e£t , tou. 
 
 Chair , § r t joapeaXa, a?. »«(M>cXa, «£.' 
 
 Table cloth , to Tpas»&>{AaYTiXo, cpu 
 
 or oy. 
 Fork , to xvipouvtj t«. 
 Knife , tj fiaxatpe , tou. 
 Table-napkin , § $ tcst&tt* » a;. 
 Spoon, to xouT&Xtj tou- to j(ouXtapt>tflu- 
 Gravy spoon; sauce-spoon, bootccX** 
 
Plate, § ri iriaTTC, eu. to rciva'xtcv, tcu« 
 Dish , § to irtocTTO , ou. Vj cbrXa^a, a?- 
 Candle , § to xept, toy. Taper , to 
 
 K*yt6xe'pt , tou. 
 Lamp , § $ XouT^spva- * o Xuxvc?. 
 Night, Lamp, § to xavTtXt > tou. 
 Wick , to cpuTtXt , »u- 
 Candlestick , 7 b Xuy^vapt, toy. 
 Snuffers ,- tc i-aXt^oxspt- t» xepotpa- 
 
 Xl^C , IOU- 
 
 Chafing Dish , § Vj ^ouJ3ou , ou;. 
 
 7j OYJ^OU. 
 
 Basin , § % Xexavy) , y;. 
 Water Jug , to xoup.dpt , iou. 
 Cup, Glass, TJjcou^a, a?, to 7roTr'pr,tou. 
 Bottle, § ^ p.rort'XXta. to {/.-nroxocXt, toy- 
 
 Large — , p.7roxaXa. 
 Tea or Coffee-cup, § T b ©XtT^a'vt, toy- 
 Saucer, § T b £dp<pt , tou. 
 Porringer , 6 § TsvT^pe; , s. 
 Cover, § rj iroo-a^a , a;. 
 Large Basket, T o xo^ivt iou. Large 
 
 hand basket , yj xaXa'Sa, a?. Hand 
 
 basket, T b xaXa&t , toy. 
 Bread tray , % ™vax«ATY! , ri;. 
 3 ^ Pints, § r. dxxa , as , plur. at 
 
 sxxa^e; , oc^cov. 
 
 Animals etc, us y d for food. 
 Z»x e^woVta, xal t^ixcpopa sI$yi twv 
 
 XpSOTtoV. 
 
 Ox , to pco^t , tou. Ox-beef , T b 
 Co^ivo'v , ou- understood jcpea$;. 
 
 Cow, xd^cXa^a, a?. Cow-beef, to 
 a^sXa^ivov xps'a;. 
 
 Calt , -rb t/.ca^apt, toy. \ eal , to 
 (xocr^apictcv. 
 
 Sheep , T o irpo'Pa-ov. Mutton , to 
 
 TTfc'SctOV, etcu. 
 
 Ewe, 7) TrpoSaTtva , a?. 
 
 Lamb , 7 6 dpvt, toy. the Meat , to 
 
 apv:a',ov , tou. 
 Hog 3 Pig , 7 g -ycupouvt , iou- o yor 
 
 i65 
 
 ps? , cj. Pork , to yct'ptvov s ou-' 
 Fowl , rt cpvtGa , aj. § to jco'ra , a?* 
 
 Hatching Hen , yj xXcocrffO. , a;. 
 Cock , 6 ttjtsivs; , ou. 
 Hash, Mince, xpe'a; dpfSeXtirov , -*« 
 
 xeims'vov. 
 Sweetbread, T a fXuxa^ta, t5v. 
 Tart , § ^ ^t Ta . Must-cake , %. 
 
 u.ou<raXsupta , iaV- 
 
 Ham 
 
 , to ^otpojxept , iou. 
 
 Sausage, § T b Xouxavtxo, cu. 
 Smok'd meat , 6 7rx<roup{/.5c; , a. 
 Force-meat, § 6 xscpTs? , s. § 6 vtoX- 
 
 y.a; , a. 6 cap(i.a;, a. 
 Caviar, T b ya£tapt. toy. 
 Salt fish-roe , 76 au-^OTa'pa^o , ou. 
 Pilaf , § 70 TctXa^t , tou. 
 Sweetmeats, § ,5 X aX6a; , a- 
 Melon , 7(5 wsTOvt , tou. Water 
 melon , 70 ystjAcvtxo , ou- § t& 
 
 xap?rou£t , toy. 
 Cucumber, T o d^cupt, tou. 
 Gourd, to xoXoxuvOtov , tou. to xoXo- 
 
 xuOt , tou. 
 Chicken . to wsT?tvo'wouXov , ou. § t& 
 
 xotottouXov , ou. Chickling , to 
 
 xXcoacoxouXt , tou. 
 Pigeon , to wsptce'pt , tou- young 
 
 Pigeon , to ireo^reGaxt , tou. 
 Woodcock, yi 6pvtO&«xaXi£a, a?. § yj 
 
 [AiTcxaT'Ca , a; , tq £yXo'xoTa , a$. 
 Partridge , 71 irep^txa , a?. 
 Thrush , V) x( x Xa , a;. 
 Figpecker , 6 auxo^a^oc , ou. 
 Lark, 6 xopu^aXb?, ou. "h ^aptflpa, 0,5. 
 
 ( y\ auTaptGpa. ) 
 Quail , to opTu^t , tou. 
 Pheasant , 6 ^aatavo; , ou. 
 Turkey , § ?! xoupxa , a?. § t$ 
 
 VTtvTto, tou.- ^tavo; , "j-aXXog. ou. 
 Go.ose, Ti /r.vcc, a?. Gosiin, to W 
 
 vaxt , tou. 
 Duck , ii iraTTirta. t<J -sraTTTrt. ic«» 
 
 Duckling , T o -na.Txi:dKi , tou. 
 Hare , 6 Xa^'b; , ou. 
 
1 66 
 
 Rabbit, § to xcuvs'XXt , tou. young 
 
 Rabbit , to xcuvsXXaxt , tou. 
 Beer , to £apxa<h , too. 
 Wild Boar , to a-yptcpupouvo » toy. 
 Stag , * v) e'Xatpo; , ou. to eXacpi> tou. 
 Game, to a-yptfu , teu. to xuvy.^i , toy. 
 Fat , to 7raxc? , oug. 
 
 Seasoning for food, 
 
 Ta etpTUGTtxa. 
 
 Salt , to «Xccc , ecTO$. 
 Pepper , r d 7rtTs'pt , toy- 
 Pimento, jj «MMpt&-, a;. 
 Oil , to Xa£t , tcu. 
 Vinegar, T d £t'ch , tou- 
 \erjuice, ^.apupl^si.^ a?. 
 Mustard , to eivcfari , t«u< S "h JW 
 
 ^a'p^a , a?. 
 Clove , § to ^apcucpaXo , oy. 
 Cinnamon , * to xtwau.cau.ov 9 ou* 
 
 § r> xavs'XXa , a?. 
 Caper, ^ xxTnrapyj 5 w?. 
 Laurel , vj <5a<pv>i , v»?. 
 Mushroom, to u,av.Tapt , *eu. 
 Onion , to xpojjtu.u^t , tsu. 
 Garlic , to 1 cxc'p^o , ou. to % ctao- 
 
 go^ov , C'J. 
 
 Orange , to -nopTcyoXXt , toy. Se- 
 ville Orange , to 1 «ep«v?& tou. 
 
 Lemon, to Xtu,dvt , too. 
 
 Parsley , i p.av^ctvt;, oa. ?o p.ax£- 
 ^ovtot, tou. ii u.upwd N tsc , ta;. 
 
 Celery , to cts'X'.vov , ©u. 
 
 Purslan , vj -yXy^t^* , «c- 
 
 Endive , mxpaXuh? , i<$W pa^t'xt. 
 
 Lettuce, to u,apc6Xtj tou. 
 
 Cress ? to x«p^ap.ov ^ ©o- tk x»p<5'a i - 
 p.a. Small Salad , eaXarct «;wo v 
 xap£ap,a. 
 
 Butter , to SouTupov * eu. 
 
 Lard , to jrotptvov waxo?. 
 
 Mui ? T o -yaXa , tw •yaXaxTO.;. 
 
 %g , to «u76v ? ou- bard egg , 
 
 Poached egg, au^a t^*^«- 
 Omelet ^ to ©-90077070 > ©u. 
 
 Fish* 
 
 Shellfish , fa 6r?.*xo'£e»u,a » wv. 
 Cray- fish, * xapaSufa, ©;, 
 
 Prawn , VJ -yapi^a , «?. 
 Lobster, 9 d^axo? , ou. 
 Muscle , to p.6o\ » tow. 
 Oyster , T d q>i&'» tou. 
 
 Scallop, TO XTSVt > tou. 
 
 Razor-shell, i cwXYjva, ««. 
 
 Sole , ^-yXwffoa j v)$. 
 
 Eel , to xs'Xi > tou. 
 
 Roach , y, T^Xvi. § to p.irapu.wouvn 
 
 Pilchard, § yj cap^a'XXa , a;. 
 
 Anchovy, Smelt , % caapt^a , aj, 
 
 Vegetables, 
 
 XopTaptxa. 
 
 Peas , § tk Trt^'XX'.a. Chickpeas, 
 to pepiet, tou. Parch'd peas , i 
 Tpw^aXioc j i«£. 
 
 Artichoke , ■« dTxivapa , a?. 
 
 Spinage , § ta ciravaxxta, twv. 
 
 Sorrel , V) ijuviOpa , a;. 
 
 Bearss , ra xouxta , twv. 
 
 Kidney - Beans , tcc ^>ai?ouXta> to)v» 
 
 Turnip , , to 70776X1, tou. 
 
 Radish 
 
 •0 ps-rravt 3 sou- 
 
 Carrot, * to ^auxo; ? ou;. Ta peuxta. 
 Leek , 70 irpaoov 5 cu. 
 Asparagus , to cTvapa^^t, tou. 
 Cabbage, to Xa^avov » ou. to xpap.- 
 
 -ttI, tou- to xpaprfieXst^avcv. 
 Cauliilower, to xouvouui<Ji » tou. 
 Pickled Cucumber , -/} ^oupapu/a* 
 Sourcrout , r, X&xavap k aia , ta;. 
 
 RlCC , TO p'.^t J t&U, 
 
£ke Dessert 
 
 Tk 0170) pt>i«« 
 
 Apple , -• jxrXov ? oyo Apple Tree ? 
 
 X u,»Aia , toe?- 
 Pear , to Air& 3 uu. Pear Tree , 
 
 Peach , to po£axwov , ou. Peach 
 Tree , ri po^ouuvigc, t«;. 
 
 Apricot , § T9 xxuw , tou. § "h t^c.jta' 
 Xou£a j a;- Apricot Tree , £ *xr 
 ff'.a, ta;. r T£a?~aXou£ta > ta;« 
 
 Cherry, to scspast, ie5* Cherry Tree, 
 7) xspcwta > ix?« 
 
 Fig , to aujcov , su. Fig Tree , r\ 
 crista, ia;« 
 
 Plum , to ^aaKffjcyivov » «u. Plum» 
 Tree , x £a{*.a<T/.7jVta , ta?- 
 
 Strawberry , § *j «ppaouX« , «;. 
 
 Grape , to c<x<puX'. ? lc ^* Vine , t® 
 apiciks. j tcu» 
 
 Pomegranate , t& fxa^t , tou. Pome- 
 granate Tree, -fi pco^ta 9 t«?» 
 
 Sweets , Sweetmeats, to "yXojm , eu= 
 
 Walnut , to xapu^t , tou. Walnut 
 Tree , r, xapucWa , ia;. 
 
 Kut, to XsoToxxpov, tot>. . § Nut Tree, 
 
 TO CpOVTGUJCt, tou. 
 
 Chesnut , to xa?avov , ou» Chesnut 
 Tree, r, xa^avta, ta;. 
 
 Almond , to ApbyfaXw, ou. Almond 
 Tree , yj d[rj*y£aXix , ir$. 
 
 Mulberry , to sux.aut.tvcv, ou. Mul- 
 berry Tree, r, cuxau-tvia , tac« 
 
 Quince, to xu^vt , tou. Quince 
 Tree , ■£ y.u£a>via , ia;. 
 
 Olive and Olive Tree , $ &aia. a?. 
 
 Ztegrees of Kindred, 
 
 Baflaol rJfc su^zvii'a;. 
 
 Father , s ^a7 = pa<; , e- * tgu -jraTpo;. 
 Mother , -n ftTit-soa , rri; jMfiTpf's- ^ 
 
 167 
 
 Grandfather , *a*rad$. © tc«7t* 
 tjouXiq; , 7j. 
 
 Grandmother, r, repojATiTMp , epos. 
 
 Great , Grandfather , 6 ftpo'ira*. 
 tto; , ou. 
 
 Son, 6 ut^$ , o5- 
 
 Daughter , rj roj*}, r,;. yi Suptvs'pa t 
 tUq {KryaTpo?. 
 
 Brother , *" a£ri$a£» ou. — Mater- 
 nal , a^sXqpe'c a^» {/.rjTs'pa , — * 
 Paternal , d™ iwrspa. Brother 
 and Sister , or two Brothers f 
 tk doiX^to;. 
 
 Sister , Vj a$eX<£$ , ffc« 
 
 Eidest , fAs-vaXYiTspo? , epvj , 
 ■jrpsaj&TegfGS , ep« , e^sv. 
 to'toks; , 6 > vj. 
 
 Youngest , pxpoTepo? , epvj , epov. 
 vscorspo; , spa , spov. 
 
 Uncle , Gsig? , ou. 6 {z.:rapji.TP*; , 01. 
 
 Aunt , r t Qilcc , a;, rl a^xta, ta; 
 
 epov. 
 
 Nephew , 
 
 Niece 
 
 ave^io? » 
 ti «ve<j»ia •, ta?. 
 Grandson, — Grand Daughter , 
 
 ? "^ e^'vovoc, ou» 
 Cousin , 6 ei-e^sX'f 0$ , ou- 
 Brother in Law, •yuvaHcawJ'eX'p*?, eo- 
 
 6 ■yap-Spo? , ou- § 6 jccuvvoiocto; , ou» 
 Sister in Law, ^'yuva'.xaiJ'cX^, n;- 
 
 ^ x.ouvvotaTa , a;. 
 Stsp-Father, 6 refispb? , ou- 6 u.y)" 
 
 Tpuio? , ou. Step-Mother, r, iveecpa, 
 
 a;,v\ u/flTpuia, uta;. 
 Son in Law , 6 , ■£ wpo #, Yovoc , ou. 
 
 Step-children, tx vgcf&M , tav- 
 Daughter's Husband , 6 ■yau.^po?, ou. 
 Son's Wife , ^ vuftwyi , n;. 
 Parents , 01 -vovcT?, ecav. 01 Y 0v£t ^'-3 £iwy» 
 Husband , Wife , 6 , r, au^up;, ou. 
 Bridegroom , 6 wupf to# tcu. 6 «yapt- 
 
 £ob$ , ou. Bride, ^ vu|A<py) , yj;. 
 Illegitimate , V o'9o?, vj, ov. §p.ira<rap- 
 
 ^o ? . 
 Godfather, § 6 xcujiTrapo; , cu- God- 
 mother , yi xouanra'oa , a;. AIs© 
 
 Persons giving away a Bride. 
 
1 08 
 
 Sponsor, b ava^e;? eu. % o vovo?. ou.' 
 Female, Sponsor, -ft ivo^ex©?, *> V0VK '- 
 Godson, God daughter, 6 , •/) ava- 
 
 <^jxt6? , ou y 6 |3a7rTtGtpMo'(; ou> vi 
 
 Woman in Childbed, r\ Xe^tiwa, a?. 
 
 iNurse* ^ (3uSa<rpfcj a$.Yiirapa;j.avva,a$. 
 
 Relation ,6,7) (ruyyevvi; , ou;. Rela- 
 tions ^ oi awfyiizTi; ? &v. 
 
 Friend , 6 cptXo; * ou. - — $ cptXvi , n;- 
 r <ptXsv<x£a, a?. 
 
 Enemy , expo's , a ,. o'v. 
 
 Widower, Widow, 5 yrn?o$ , -h y^'pai 
 
 Heir Heiress ^ 6 , -h xXnpovo'[/.o?. 
 
 Guardian , t Iwtfpowos * ow. Ward, 
 * e £7riTpo7reuo'jj(.£vo? , y\ lwtrp-6w6U0jfc6* 
 vvj . o j tq j avnXtxo?. 
 
 Betrothing , 6 appa£tovia,o-p,os , su. 
 
 Marriage , yj uivav^peia , siaq. 
 
 Wedding , 6 -fapif? > ou. 
 
 Alliance by Marriage , -fi o-utiitsOs- 
 gesa , stag , The Persons so al- 
 lied , to cuu/rceGspetdv. t« cup.7f&" 
 fispiaaa. 
 
 Different States of Man 
 
 and IVbman. 
 
 Atacpopet jtafa^ao-st? tou av^'po; Jcal 
 
 >% fUVaiKOS;- 
 
 Man Mankind generic , 6 avfloW- 
 
 7rr^. Man specific , husband , 
 
 6 av^pa? , tou av^pe'?. 
 Woman , Wife, ^ -yuvawea, a?. 
 Old Man , * 6 ^s'pov , ovto?. Old 
 
 Woman , i fpata * ata$. Old , 
 
 syspos , -ypsia, eta?. 
 Young, new,veoc , ea , e'ov. Young 
 
 Man , youtli, 6 vsc<j, Young 
 
 Woman, ^ via. 
 Lover, Sweetheart , & a^awViTticos , 
 
 cu- 6 epa<po? jou- o epwfjisvo; , r oVya- 
 
 ■jTYlVucii. *!0 epa^-pta: vi spwpivY]. 
 Infant , to 3pe<^j , oos. ChHd, to 
 
 wauJ'l ; t*u« 
 
 &oy, tS otyo'pt > f«J- ^^ > ■« K^l 
 
 little Girl , to xopaatov ? tou- 
 Bachelor , 6 avuirav^poij*, ou. 
 Bachelor , Spinster , 6 , yj wasS^vos. 
 Master , Mistress of the House ^ 
 
 6 vGixo&upy};, Yj. ^ votaoxupa » as. 
 Man-Servant , Maid-Servant , • 
 
 <^ouXo$> iq e^ouXa. 
 Maid-Servant , § $ ^owrMxri. Vi £cu- 
 
 XeuTpa> ac« 
 Peasant , 6 xapiarvi; , n. Peasant 
 
 Crirl > "fl x^P 1 * 710 ^ •> a s* 
 Stranger , Foreigner , $ ? ' v *> , », ov. 
 Pauper, cpT«x5? , ri » o'v. 
 Mendicant , Beggar , 6 friTiovfts , e». 
 
 ^WIAO^TV)? , CO- 
 
 Thief, 6 xXs'^tyis j yj or ou« 
 Of Dress. 
 Ta TSspl t« evouu.flifaJ 
 
 Cdat, to 90'pep.a 9 aTo;. § to poux-> ou^ 
 
 Hat , § TO -ACLTzillo. * TO CX'.OC^tOVj tou- 
 
 Wig, § vi itspouj«ca, i'j. 
 Cravat , § Xat^o^eVfl? 5 vj oi* ou. 
 Cloak , to e^ftxpo'pi j tou- fi £7kavto©&-' 
 
 pe'0.a j ccto$"* 
 Waistc6at, § 7 b ^tXlxSi. § to cw+~ 
 
 xap^t j tou. 
 Smallclothes, Breeehes,§To 6pa>4tjtoui. 
 Drawers , to eo'w3paxo , tou. 
 Stocking, ^jiaXT^a. § ToxaXT'Couvtj to3»! 
 Shoe , § to TvairouT^i , tou. 
 Shirt , § to uTT&xauacovj cu. 
 Sleeve , § t b aavtxt , ou. 
 Cap , § 73 cxoucpta , ta?. 
 Scul'lcap, to cpecrt , tou. 
 Packet, § i tCe'tcyi, toc- 
 Ribbon, String , Lace, >j jtop^sX- 
 
 Xa ) a;. 
 Button , to xoixirt , tou. 
 Buttonhole , ^ OviXeia > eia;. also 
 
 slipknot. 
 
iLtlot , c Ho'iatcc? , cu. 
 Glove , to jretpoxTi » iou. 
 Handkerchief , § to p.o.vriXi , .ig3- 
 Chaplei, string of Beads, to xep,- 
 
 TToAo-yt 3 iou. 
 Watch , to iopoXcfyov , iou. 
 Buckie, § ri oiiATTia, ta$. 
 Garter , xaXT^cch'r/K ? w or &«, 
 Ring, t3 £axTuXt£i9 iou> 
 Comb , t6 xts'vi j iou. 
 Razor, to Sjupacpt > joC 
 Sword , to eTvaGl s wv». Sword 
 
 W ound , 7i oTvaSta , ioc? 
 Cirdle , -h luv/i , r, ? . Waist-band, 
 
 Pistol , § 7) *iff4a ? «?. Pistol- bail 
 
 W ound 5 rj -ju^oXiet 3 ta;« 
 Bridie, § to ^ipx , iou. * * x a ^ lv °» ? 
 
 cu. r& -/aXtvapt , iou- 
 Halter, § to" xa:nsrpi , iou. 
 Saddle , * to £cpi-nriu*v ? iou, S ^ <*&- 
 
 Xcc> «?. 
 Stirrup , ^ TraTrjTpta > ia§- S f« 
 
 &"fXtj iou. 
 Whip , r\ p-c^ifa ? a;. 
 Switch , to pafi^i , iou . 
 Boot , to uro'^yiaa , ar&?« 
 
 Spur , TO <pTSpVl<7TiGl , tOTJ- 
 
 Bead-dress , § to exoucpcoact j aTO?. 
 
 to y.T£%tc 4 u.a j aro?. 
 Petticoat , to /jucroooucavo , too. 
 Apron, r) src^a, ta;. 
 Gown, Tocpcuq-avi; iou- vi § pop/rca^ a;. 
 Pearl , to p.as^aptTapt , iou. 
 lieeklace, r\ apfx«.3ia, ia;. tf toocx^'-"* 
 Ear-ring , to GxoXctpiai ■> %yi' 
 Curled , § xar'Capb; 9 ti ? c'v- cyoopo? 3 
 7) , dv. One -with curled hair , 
 c7oupcaaXYi;-Hair-bar.d or buckle, 
 to xor^aps. to ^ou-^po'. 
 Fan, to av B p,'.rvipi 3 iou. 
 Busk , § o p^ou^o? ? cu. 
 Bracelet, T 6fJpaxioXij tou< 
 Pin , vi xap^ir'Ca , «g. ti &sX#r 
 
 169 
 Pincushion , § to xou|3apt , iou^ 
 Scissars , to t^aXi^i , tou. 
 Thimble , 7) «S*xn>X"fi6pa ? K£» 
 Needle , to 1 peXcvt , iou. 
 Thread , r\ xXwc^ » vfc. 
 Paint, to <pTia<st£i , t»u- t» xoxxtva^tj 
 
 iou. I rouge, (p-riavcfAju. Rouged, 
 
 cp,£vc<;-. 
 Beauty-spot , •$ sXaa eta?. 
 Rose "Water , pc^oVap.o , cu. 
 Hair-Powder , r, cxo'vyj , vj?.. 
 
 BOX , TO XGUTl , IOU. 
 
 Jewels, T« cS'to'p.avTtxa 9 6>v. tk «£* 
 
 Tpa^ta 3 twv. 
 Diamond , to £iap.rm 9 iou: 
 Emerald , to cpaooq^t , tou. 
 Paiby, to pGUpvrciVl 9 tou. 
 Toothpick , * $ o^ovTe^XutpU , ihg. 
 Cloth , to wavvt j tou. 
 Distaff , ii po'xxa , a?. 
 Spindle , to" a^paV/rt , iou. 
 Silk , to p,£7a^i ? icu. 
 Worsted , to p,aXXl 9 tou. 
 
 Starch, glue , § ^ xo'XXa 9 a?J 
 
 Soap , to ca«ouvt 9 tec, 
 
 Sheath, Needleease, ^erixTi,^. * 
 ^eXovo6rjxYi 9 yi?. 
 
 Ta p.€py) to$ cwp.aT0s„ 
 
 Body , to xopp? , tou. Shape , Stae 
 Height , to avaqr«{j.a 5 aTC<j. S to* 
 p.Trct, , tou. Waist , r^ u.£jti ? vi?. 
 
 Head , -re x£9aXt ? tou- 
 
 Face , TO* WpOClOTTOV, CU. VI {XOup'fl 9 
 
 »>c. Vulgarly, toc p.ouTpa, «v. 
 Forehead, to xoutcXXo ; ou. * to y.£- 
 
 TtOTTOV 9 CO. 
 
 Eye , to part 5 tou. Glance, ^ p,a- 
 
 ?ia ? ta?. 
 Eyebrow , to <ppu^t , tsu. 
 Eyelid, to gXs'^apcv , cu. 
 Eyelashes, t« p,aTo'xX6c^a 5 twv, 
 
 X3 
 
Pupil of the eye , i X o>n , # j 
 
 &ar , to auTt , toO, 
 
 Hair , >i rpfya , as. Head of Jfaitf, 
 
 the Hair , rcc p.aXX*.a, tfov 
 Temple , * 6 xprra^o?, o'u. e j^JXcv'-* 
 
 Tf*s » f 
 Cheek , /§ to' ftayouXo , ou. 
 Nose , a (A-jrw , yjs. 
 Nostril , to' pouQouvi , i*u. 
 Beard , ra •yl'vma , etwv. to shave, 
 
 £up(£op.at , shaved , ejuvs;. 
 Mouth, to* co'fta, arcs. 
 Tooth , to' ^o'vtc , uS> 
 Tongue , r, -yXuffcra , vjj. 
 Lip > to' £61X95 , »u;. 
 Mustachio , to' fx,Qu?& , wS, 
 
 Chin 
 
 , re wyjyouvi , toy. 
 
 Keck , o Xatpi? , ou. 
 
 Ihroat , 6 ^pojp"^ , u^o^J 
 
 Back , ^ paxvi , vie. 
 
 ShcMder, vY?rXa™, *» ? ; 
 
 Arm, dj3p«x''cov, evo£. to' £%"j toy,' 
 
 Elbow , 6 #ffiwv«s,- a - 
 
 Fist , » ^boq , «u. Blow with the 
 
 fist, V) YpoQcay a?„ 
 Hand , to' x j 'p e > copuLr 
 Finger, to ^a'xtuXo , ou. 
 IN ail , to vu X t , tou. 
 Stomach , to 1 so\).i%i , teu. 
 Chest , Bosom , T d qrMi , ouf. 
 Breasts, T « €ufra , av- 
 Belly, tf-jfoUwc , tap. 
 **.ib , vi wXeupa , a?. Side . to' tfX&u- 
 
 TfAVel , £ o'^aXo? , ©3- 
 Thigh , to' fwpl , tou. 
 Knee , re* 70'voc , tou •yflvaroc* 
 
 Leg , Tfi' CKe'XoS , OU?. TO TC0<£l, jeu- 
 
 Calf of the Leg , 77 ayrfc, a;, to' 
 
 •ya^pojcvvj/Atov , tou. 
 Foot, ro" tro^apt. Sale , yj 7rar«uva. 
 
 I kick , xXtrioto , & kick, x) w0 t- 
 
 &a , ta;. 
 Heel, jf ©rlpva , a;.- Shoe-heel » 
 
 § to* Toxxftdvt > io3| 
 
 Colour, complexion, Tl ' tfifUtfMf 
 rorm , T0 ' ffx^f**»'*r6c* 
 Gait, Carriage/ w , *pojpfi a |ui,*to<i 
 Plumpness , T o' wo^o? , ou 5 . * 71 eu- 
 
 orMfA'atta , ta?. 
 Slenderness, Slimnesa, 71 Xi-Yvrfm;, 
 
 Brain, 6 p.uaXi?, Brains 3 T « ji.uaXx» 
 
 Blood , to' «?p« , aro;. 
 
 Artery , *1 ^tvipta , ta ? . 
 
 Vein , ti (pXs|3a, sfc. 
 
 Muscle, b puuv , o'vs;. 'tV wevT-'txaxi, 
 
 tou. 
 Skin , to* mr?t , too, ro' ch'p^a, arc;. 
 Heart , 4 w^ix , fac. 
 Liver, to' cvsxwti , ecu to' ctxo'ti ,.coi# 
 
 LungS, d 7TVEUU.WV , ove-. 
 
 Intestines, 4k Ivrejct,; «v. t« ev-- 
 
 To'c?9ia , ttov. 
 Bladder , ^ cpou<i>ta , a;. 
 Spleen , VU^va , a;. 
 Gall . Bile , ^ x *x»\ , ifc 
 Saliva , to* oaXtcv , tou. Spittle ? 
 
 to iTTXtGiia. y o.xq;. 
 Perspiration , e&>o)Ts;,Teut<$>T^ 
 Cough , 6 g% a? ,' «. 
 Catarrh , 6 xarappou:, ou. ref crovar^^ 
 
 toy. affeeted with a catarrh , 
 
 xaTappoTaop.£vo$. ouyaxw{Aevo?. 
 Breath , ^ avarvori , %. T .» axv«TC# 
 
 Ta fl£'!«r6nT>ipia: 
 
 Sight, * vi opaat^ ? euc«' 
 Smell , * 7i ocrcppvie-s , a^^J 
 Taste , * 7i *yzuaiq , ew;. 
 Touch , * 7i d<pvi , $;, 
 Hearing , ^ axon , ifr. 
 Sense , to' acuQ^rrptov. 4 voy;« 
 Sensation, Sentiment, 71 ataeTxrc?/ 
 Tt 1 aifffiyjpca , arc?'. 
 
Of Study. 
 
 The Study, xo' c-rvo^^x^r'piov , toy.' 
 Book , y£ [3>.§X:cvj it/j. to' /.aprt, ts3. 
 Paper, T o' -/.atari. 
 Quire , r0 ' tetcx^iov , t'ou. 
 Pamphlet , $ tpuXXst^a , a?. 
 Leaf , to' cyXXoy ? oy. 
 Page, to 1 KstquigaTby 3 ou. * r, mX& 
 the. 
 
 *P?n, ts' xov^yXi , toy. to' tttSoov , 
 
 SU. § Ti 7TEVV0C j a?. 
 
 Ink , to' u.s>.avi 5 toy. 
 
 Writing cr.se or Ink stand , § T o 
 
 xaXajAapt i id. n m.6X*vo6w; , rj;. 
 Penknife , to' xcv^yXcjAor/atpoy > teu.. 
 Twine, § 6 awa-ye? , #u % . 
 Sana , c aau.05 , oy. 
 Seal, Wafer, 'r, c^pot^cc. §r ; ptfftMfr 
 Letter, ^pa<^ > fa. 
 JNofe , to' yaawfAxney , toy, tS 
 
 YpaaaaTKxi, wu. 
 Writing, ~o ^ad'.acv, aTCi. 
 Pencil , Black-lead 2 Pencil , T <3 
 
 uoX6ct , 10D. TO fioAt>3cJco'v^uXp\i , ou. 
 Lesson taken , to" [Aataqpac, jcto?. 
 
 Lesson given , r, uapa^offt? , eo>;.- 
 
 I give Lessons, wasa^t^w. 
 Translation, ^ jt gT B$p«flris .? s«c. 
 Exercise , T d es'ux , aror. I write 
 
 Exercises, 6e^T<r/p$95 , ii*. 
 Portfolio , T 3 j^apTO^uXaVaoy. 
 
 Musical Instrument?, 
 
 Mou 
 
 >p*yava. 
 
 Violin , § to PtcXl , icy. 
 riute , ayXd; , o.y. ^Xo*y*?flCj sc; 
 Bag-pipe , § -/j ^^ a , a; . 
 Guitar , r, xtMpa , 1x5. 
 Harpsichord, T q xu^iratXoM , rj; 
 l^te, ^ x6oa, a,-. 
 
 Harp, § i £ ?w « , «?? 
 Trumpet , r 4 ffoXiw^^ ? a*. 
 Drum, to 1 Tua^avov , oij. 
 
 Parts of a House. 
 T« toy c<jTryirioy» 
 
 Ilouse , to* ffrr'rt , toy. * r, otsctaj 
 Door, §x.-ffo|j«, a;, * lii 6630; , a*; 
 Room , § 6 ovfa; , a- 
 Hall , § t, ffaX* , a;. 
 Court-yard, •£ auX* , %. 
 Window , to" waaaQujov s toy. to* 
 
 wapKO'jpc , toy. 
 Kitchen , § 7J xsurCtva , ac. to' v " jax- 
 
 ysioslov , e£py. 
 Court 9 6 ayXoyupo; ,. eu. r, «yXr,, ■■?;;• 
 Well , to' ??v>ya£i, toy. 
 Stable , 6 q-ay'Xc; , ou. 
 Wine-Cellar , $ oivgQwmi , vis- t* 
 
 yrroyotcv , sicy° 
 Stairs , §'yi erxjjX* , a?. 
 Stej>, Stair, 6 €a9uo; , ou- to' cxa- 
 
 XcrraTi , toy. 
 Garden, to' -nrEpiflo'Xt j toy , 6 ///i-rco^ 
 
 oy. § c (juraxT^es, s. 
 Fountain , ri ($pu<n} , ?)?• 
 
 Floor, to' TraTfoact , aToc» 
 Terrace, to' £uu.a, cto;. •/. acp«" 
 
 xta , ta?« 
 Granary , * to- o-iT&.So'Xtov , tou. to 
 
 § olij-zv. 5 tcy. 
 Roof, r ( ax£-'/)) "«([',' . 
 Tile, to* xeoa|jt.iA, ici3> 
 Gutter , § rb xavaXt , toy. 
 Wall , to § TGofj^ot 7 tou. d toTvc,- j o 
 Chimney, § d ^ou-ppoj 3 ou> 
 Brick, § t6 t&53Xov , cy. rd afc8i>'iou. 
 
 Floor , TO TTXTOiy.a , (XT0?* 
 
 Cieling-, c opocpj;, cj. § Td Ta^ocvt, to". 
 Oven , § 6 qoOovo; > oy. 
 Beam , § 'h -jpsvTa , a;. 
 Plank , T9 cav't^t , toy. 
 Water-closet , $ y.seia, £-'x; , rk 
 ava*yxaTov 3 aiou. 
 
. x 7 a , 4 
 
 Hire , Rent , to v voixi , ijjfi'r 
 
 evoixtov j io'j. 
 Plaster , Stucco , 6 p<^c; , wl 
 Lime , c ek^e^ns , vi. 
 Marble , to v fia'cpapov j ou. 
 Stone , $ 7T£Tpa , a;. 
 Dovecote , * 6 weptcepsav ,^&h«v 
 
 Furniture. 
 
 Ta <rxe6n. 
 
 Looking Glass , £ xa9o£>rvif , u. 
 Sofa, 6 cccpa; , £• 
 Bed, to' y-2e,5part, wo. 
 Sheet , T fl' o'.v^o'vt j tou. 
 Mattress, T o' ^wpLat , 1**0?. 
 Pillow , to- § {fea|tXX«pt , too- to 
 
 Trpccrxs'cpaXov , 60. 
 Bolster , •£ (jcajepuvapa j a;- p.a£iXXapa. 
 Curtains , Bed -Hangings , * to 
 
 7rapa-7T;Ta<ip.a , arc;. 
 Musquito Curtains,^ J6ooyoo?«spw,a*. 
 
 6 xwvwrroXci'yo? , O'J. 
 Bedclothes , T0 * ^arrXufxa, aro?. 
 Chamberpot , to 1 0.77210 , ete& to 
 
 xaroupXoxc'Ja.aso -j tcu- 
 Night-chair , to" wfflua j reo« 
 Tablet , * 6 *{«£{■ , axo;. 
 Border , Frame , T o v ureoifiwpi. § 
 
 to xtvaoi. 
 Chair , § ^ xapg'xXa. vj xaGixXa, 
 Carpet , § to' 7Vc6xi , tou. © Ta- 
 
 ^v;? , yito;. 
 Chest , § to" yoprZict. , to^J- * ri xt- 
 
 (Soto; , W>- 
 Bnreau, Clothes Press, § to' jfaftdfeu 
 Chandelier-lustre, g *&XosXato;jOtteo. 
 
 to" < !teXu*dvTtX N o > tou- 
 Tapestry . T * xfrtvpfE , are;. 
 Painting, yi^pacp'K, i&s- ariiSf. The 
 art, v] ^to-v'cacp'a-, or -q ^wypaciwc^, ifa. 
 Gilding, to' ypuc-iop.a 9 aTO?. 
 Statue, to % «•,'<*) pa, aTc?. The art 
 of sculpture , * d^dttpaito'ivoifri 5 
 i'«c° '-'• «*Y«v.ftaTtTca7iTt)eTa ? r*» 
 
 Bust , * v; frpsTjsuv; , 7i*. 
 
 Pedestal,* T0 ' frecOpov , ou. * $$*. 
 
 <T.? , £0>£. 
 
 Portrait , •£ eCxe'va, fc. 
 Cage , to 1 *}xo$i , tou. 
 
 Of the Fireplace. 
 /Ta rcifi TTiv xautvov. 
 
 Fire, vi awTifc s ta$. 
 
 Fuel , Coal j, to' § xa'?!5ouvo , cu« * 
 
 avdpftS j aitc?. 
 Ashes, Tjf^axTi}, vu» 
 Fireside, •$ earta , ■cpouyapo?. 
 Burning stick - Fire brand , 6 £ao- 
 
 Xb$, ou> to' £aoXt , tou. 
 Log , to' £y).cv 7 eo. 
 BelloWS , to' (pUffGOVt , tou. 
 
 Firs-Fan, to' avefitcispw te ^ j 
 Brasier, § to' jAayyaX. ? k>o- 
 Shovel , to' <pruapt , toy. 
 Tongs , § 7) aasta , ta;- r, wopa- 
 
 Tp*> a;. 
 Matches, T o' £a£l, too. to 8sia?o- 
 
 xs'pt , tou. 
 Steel , 6 TEOpo^oXo; , ou- 
 Flint, § to ^-oopvapt , itu. 
 Flame, 759X0'^, a^ 
 Smoke, 6 xa^vo; , ou. it smokes, 
 
 **«vtCet. 
 Soot , vj xawvia j ta;. 
 
 Of Kitchen Utensils. 
 Ta <yxeuY) tou ax^tpeiou. 
 
 Spit , 7^ a«u(?Xa , a;. 
 Pot-hanger , « xps^aVpa , a;. 
 Kettle, Boiler, T o x xaxa'^t 3 tou- 
 Copper , § to 1 xatavt , too. to ^zX- 
 
 xwjxa , aTo;. 
 Fryingpan , T o Tvj^avt , tou. 
 Gridiron , r, ioydpa. , a;. 
 Saucepan , § TST^eps's, e. Pipkin, 
 
 b Tapa? > a- 
 
lender s to 4 rpuwvjTev ? oil 
 Skimmer , to* £ac?pi<Hpt , ioS- 
 Pitcher, r, cawva , a;. 
 "Water- Jug pr Jar,§ to [Mrpixt- icu. 
 Fail , § 6 xcu.Sa; , a* 6 at^Xc^ ? cy. 
 Pot, § to v r^aux&t > toy. 
 Chafing Dish, ftwoSw, so?. 
 Grater , to* *yeuc?t > tcu. 
 Pestle , to' ^ou^o^spi ? iou. 
 Broom , -£ cppoxaXwc , ice:, to ffxpou-a j 
 
 ttTCc §ri axouTraj «;• 
 
 C osier, § r, iNtt&tptfpet , a-. 
 
 Of Cellar Articles. 
 
 Ta r*nc otvcSw,;. 
 
 Hammer , to' cowl , v»y. 
 Cask , ro €gut# , icy. 
 Barrel , T 6 BapsXi , tcu. 
 Funnel , to x*>»« • «$• 
 Bung , to ^-ourwjjt,* , «to;- 
 Wine , T b xpacl , iou. 
 Dregs, Sediment, Vj rpwy« , «-. 
 beer , * 6 £66o;, ou- § to fAiripo*, a;. 
 Must, § 6 jmrS^ooo 5 ** To*yXeu<w;, ouj. 
 
 Belonging to the Door. 
 Ta tvI; 8uoa;. 
 
 Key, to xXet^t, toy. Picklock or 
 
 False Key. , T o dvrtxXe&h , k». 
 Lock,^ xX=t<$ae'.a, ix;.r, jeXs&Jovia, ia;« 
 Bolt , 6 wspinusj ». * o fio^Xoj j 3 r j. 
 Hinge , 6 ps£; , e. 
 Threshold , T o JMfrwcpXotov , cu. 
 Beli, § V) x.aurravs'XXa , a;. 
 Small Bell, xoug^guv. , iou. 
 
 0/ &£&/e Articles. 
 Ta £Osi(j>co'ji.eva etg tgv £«3Xoy« 
 
 Hay, TO y:CTCV, O'J. TO £eOT«Sl» »3. 
 
 Straw, res a/;jca , uv. 
 
 i 7 3 
 
 Stubble , r, xaXauia, ta;. 
 
 Trough , r, (jparw} , «$. to itos.'/yl, touj 
 
 Manger, Rack, § T a xi-yxsXXa* 
 
 Bran , tcc TriTUpet j cov. 
 
 Curry Comb, $ £u?pa, «&, 
 
 Barley, to xpidopi, wy. 
 
 Oats , r, Spo'uY) , yi;. * c afyiXo^j (Di»0^- 
 
 Sieve, to koVxevqvj cu. 
 
 Horse , to dko-pv , cu. 
 
 Mule, § to txouXapi , iou- 
 
 Ass , 6 vat^aco; , ou. to fa^cupi, wu« 
 
 to -ycaa'ct , iou , this last signifies 
 
 also a load. 
 Groom , * d fcrroxo'pog j cu. 
 
 0/ « Garden. 
 
 Ta Eupidxo'ffsva et? to icspi^o'XtOv* 
 
 Bed , iq Tvpaer.a , tao 
 
 Scarecrow, to a/.'.aVpovjcu. r sxwcJCTpa- 
 
 Trellis, -ft irup-puXia , tag. r, xpe(W 
 
 rapta , ta?- 
 Arbour, * to cxr.vuaa, aTo;. 
 Ptose , to TptavraepuXXov , cu. f t rptav- 
 
 ■^aouXXia , ias« 
 Jasmine or Jessamin, § to ^ias=- 
 
 ^ (*.! , OU. 
 
 Pink j § to ^apo'cpaXo , oy. 
 
 Lily , to Kptvov ) ow. 
 
 "\ iclet, to tcv, tcu iou. S to fiavoufftj.. 
 
 iou. 
 Hyacinth, 6 uasuvSc;, ou. 
 Poppy , 6 «.v^:c6)v, cove;. 6 XaXe£. 
 Apple tr?e etc. See page 167, 
 Box, to ■sculcept , iou. 
 Pine Tree , S ^euxc;, eu. 
 Fir , d eXxTo; ? cu. 
 Oak , y, ^gus , uo ? . ( to ^e'vc?pov. ) 
 Poplar , 4 Xeujog ^ ^ ; . 
 Elm, y; fljrsXata, etaj. 
 Lime, ^ylXupa, a;. $ «ptXwpeta> eta;. 
 Beech, * Tjcpy^o; , cj. 
 Myrtle , r, ^-joto;. 
 Thyme, 6 5-ao; , ou. 
 Nursery, to euTtiptov } feu- 
 
174 
 
 Ivy , 6 xt£$$e , ou 6 xiceap'/i; , vj. 
 Arm , Limb , T 'o xXwMapt , iou. 
 Branch, to xXk^I, icy. 
 Wood, Forest, T d ^«' ffo; , cuc . 
 Shade, vj octa , toe;, d i'<mo; , iou. 
 Basin , Pond , Reservoir , § $ ^ a - 
 
 S3au£a , ac. •fi ^s|«^evn , vj;. 
 Canal , Conduit ,' * T q aiXoixi , iou. 
 Ditch, § to xav^eext. 
 Spade, to Xiavip;, teCi, 
 
 Dignities, 
 
 A £Ccop,&Ta. 
 
 .Emperor , © S«crtXsu$ , fog. 6 ai>To- 
 
 /CpaTwp , opo;. Empress , r, fiaov 
 
 Ataaa, y;;, or a;- tj auTOxpaTo'picf- 
 
 ca , a;. 
 King , 6 prrya;, a. 6 paatXeu;. Queen, 
 
 71 Paci'Xioroa. 
 Prince, § d wpiyYuJi, wo;. 6 auk'v^jjjvji 
 
 Princess , 71 7rpi-yxi7v£<j<Ta« tj ku- 
 
 p(a , ias- 
 Duke , S^av , ovoc § £ou£ , 
 
 ocuxo';. Duchess, ^ TVyefAovl;, .t&c- 
 Count, Earl , Countess , g d , r ; xd- 
 
 [xyi;, tito;* 7) xo'ar,ff<ja, a;. 
 Marquis , § 6 {Mcpxwco;. Marchio- 
 ness , y] ttapxeciva ? a;. 
 Baron, 5 6 SapSvos 3 eu. 
 Baroness , § ■£ ga.?a.vi<je*; 
 Knight , iifkehq . s'co;. 
 Ambassador , § j fl^ , y. * J 
 
 irpec&j; 9 eco;. 
 Governor , 6 sirapxo? > eu. 
 Consul, § 6 xo'$oXo;, ou. * irps'Cs- 
 
 vo;, cu- 
 Vice L.Onsul , 6 avTiirps^ve^i 
 Lord Chancellor, Keeper of the 
 
 Seals, [/i^a; Xo^oQsrn;. 
 Chancellor , § 6 xa-YXsXXaptoj , wu. 
 
 § c xavT£sXispn; , yi. 
 Superintendant Steward, Bailiff, 
 
 « eiriTpeiroi > su. 
 
 Treasurer , * Syisaupo^uXa^ * axe;/ 
 President, 6 wpo'e£poc> bu. 
 Counsellor , * 6flouXeM« , oO: I 
 
 ouft^euXo; > ou. 
 Judge , ^uaq-'Pi; , ©u. 6 xbit^; , ou- 
 Barrister, 6 ouvY^'opc; , ou. 6 £1x0- 
 
 Xo'-yc; , ou. 
 Attorney, d evToXeu;, &*g. 
 Secretary , 4 w«pjtix-ff6e , lag, 6 
 
 Xo-pOsTV);. 
 Magistrates , ©1 ap^ovTc; , o'vtcov. 
 Common - Council-Men , ot £vr 
 
 jLtO^Sp&VTS; , o'vtwv. 
 
 Primates - Chieftains , si wpcc«7a)T£;; 
 
 MTCOV. 
 
 Notary , § vwrxpic; ^ iou. 
 General , 6 ^pcar/yd; > ou. 
 Generalissimo , Commander in 
 
 Chief , cipytq-pjcTYi'Yo; , cu- 
 Cavalry General , Commander of 
 
 tl].e Horse , d frnrocpx *' 
 Lieutenant General, 6 ^tecr^h^ ov* 
 
 6 Ta^t'apy 4 0.; > cu. 
 Major General, d uttccpottyrYa;.* ou. 
 Colonel , d yj.Xtxp^o; , cu. 
 L. Colonel , 6 urrsxtXiap^o; y ou. 
 Major, 6 avuxcXiapxc;. 
 Captain , 6 sxaTo'vTotpxo;} ou- 
 I. st Lieutenant, * 6 avdsxaTcvrar^o;. 
 IL<* Lieutenant , Subaltern , 4 0^- 
 
 xaTo'vrapxc;. 
 Quarter Master , 5 5-016 jio^otvj; , cu. 
 Sergeant , © ^e^a^apx ? ' cu * ^^ r ' 
 
 geant Major , 6 wp©To^exa^as&' 
 
 ^o;,. ou. 
 Corporal, d ueara^apx*? > cu * 
 
 Army , to <rpaTeuu.a ^ ctTc;. 
 Division, * $(to'pa>«c» 
 Brigade , * ^ 7ijAi{ioft*> i«Cr 
 Regiment , to TofyjA* ^ aTo;- 
 Bataliion , d Xj^o; ^ ou. Square , 
 
 to wXivfiicv , t'cu. 
 Troop , -^ t'Xri , yi; ? 
 Company ? 7igt>i[%>z> a;. 
 
£orporai'« party , 3 m^ii , &<* 
 
 Hank, <$ frf3«, ou. 
 
 File , o cfyo? , ou« 
 
 Infantry- Footsoldier , I fffi $¥ , ©5. 
 
 Horseman , * fo^us , so;. 
 
 Infantry , r b irtfucw. o{ *«&,'. 
 
 Troops of the Line , T d foXtTtxa'v. of 
 
 cfrXitai. Light Infantry , & l tyXw* 
 
 cl eD£&>voi. 
 Cavalry, T o irrrn/co'v- ou^7rsTj. 
 Cuirassier, ae»pajco<?opos, w. 
 Dragoon, o<$\>a X c ? , «u. 
 Lancer, 6 /.ovTo^opos, ou. 
 Trumpeter, coXwt^s , cu. 
 Artillery, § dprttttyi* Cannon, 
 
 § to row. 
 Gunner, § 5 ¥0***$?* f|. 
 Sentry , $ ^aw , jfc, PatroS.e 
 
 _ Picket , § T o xo'Ui , iou. 
 Pioneer, e^wedip , vjpo;. 
 Spy, Scout, 6 xaTccffKoir*?', ou. 
 Standard a Colours , Ensign , Vj 
 
 B %f*ge , ^ dffocrxeu^ , to I am 
 packing up , cu ff xsua'^cw , aor 
 
 Admiral, r ^par^o? , c vauapyo? , cu. 
 Captain of a Ship of the line, 6 r ? «.r r 
 
 ( P a P"/.'^? > oy • 
 Captain of a frigate or Smaller 
 
 Vessel, 67roTfriidp«p^o$ j ou. 
 First Lieutenant, 6 avTtTp«jp«p X os,cu. 
 Midshipman , I Hsst.^xu^qq , cu. 
 Pilot , Tvpapsus , SO};. 
 Boatswain , 6 xeXeusro , cu. 
 Fleet , 6 <ro'Xo;. § -h apua^ct- 
 Squadron , 6 fu>cpo$ 5-0X0$. 
 Flotilla , 6 5-oXi'ffxo? , ou. 
 Ship , Vessel , to tcXoiov. to xapafc. 
 
 Ship of the line , xaoaraxTixo'v. 
 
 Three-decker, rptirXou'v. rp-^pco- 
 
 Tsv. two-decker , £«s3louv. <ft- 
 
 r?wrcv. 
 
 Frigate, § ■■ ^psfar*, «;. 
 Corvette , § T 6 xopSeT-rev > eu» 
 I*~ig , § ?fc Ppiki'ov , icu, 
 
 I75 
 
 Appertaining to Porttficaiion. 
 
 T« 7T£Ol TflV O^upwffty. 
 
 Citadel, * V) dcxpo'-oXt* , s<a;. § x% 
 <ppoupiov > lOU'j 
 
 xacpo , cu. 
 Fort, Castle, * t j 0,30,5 
 
 § t8 xoi<rpo , & 
 Arsenal, $ fa\*Mm , to 
 
 Walls , t'X niy^ , wv. 
 
 Rampart, re | ?Uf ^. 
 Palisade, to x.apK^w^.K , ara^' 
 Bastion Tower , 6 irfpj* , ou. 
 Battlements , 3 &r«X?t« , eg>;. 
 Curtain , T o jjief awrup-Ytov , £cu. 
 Siege, ^ TToXtooxta , t«?. 
 Capitulation, $ »%p|«« ? , ew5 . 
 Sortie, yj e>c%ofAYj, to 
 Assault , ^ Tet W *#a, i« ; . £ wpo ^ 
 ffSoXfl ^ to 
 
 Professions, Trades, 
 
 'En&.fyiXy.XTot. xal Te£vs«. 
 
 Printer , £ Turoypofyoc * cj. 
 Physician , $ £etx-po« , ou. 
 Surgeon, • xeipoupyoc, ou. 
 Druggist , Apothecary , i ^^ %K0 - 
 
 7:w\nc, , ou. 
 Barber , § 6 pfeftppi&put , yj. *' 5 
 
 xo'jpsu; j e'w^. 
 Baker , 6 (^w}i,a^ , «. 
 Butcher, § 6 p-axeXXa'pto; , cou. * 5 
 
 JcpetairMXius ^ ou. 
 Vintner ; Tavern -Keeper, § 5 Ta=3 
 
 PepvapTis , yj. 6 5cpa50ivwXTO 
 Shop-keeper , 6 epya^pta'pTO. »• 
 lailor , © pa^TV); , vi- 
 Boot- maker, u-o^ixacra,- , a. 
 Shoe-maker , 6 w«ivouT?yi? , vi. 
 Cobler , § 6 (XTraXw^aTas 5 a- 
 Sculptor, 6 «yaXjAaT0tt8i$s , ou» 
 Painter , 6 ^wypottpoj , ou. 
 Carpenter , © weXexavoc, cu. 
 Builder , Mason , Brick-layer -, & 
 
 *Tt5-nf-> vj or ou. 
 
Locksmith , 6 xXsto'apa<; , a. 
 Miller , 6 p.uXava; , a. 
 Laundress , % 7rXuq>a ? &<;. 
 Goldsmith , 6 yp-jcrcyooi; > o'cu. 
 Comedian, Player, Actor, 6 {J7ro-« 
 
 XptTTQ? j OU- 
 
 Musician, 6 p.ouar«.>cb$ , oy- 
 
 Armourer, 6 oTrXoirotos j» ou. 
 Porter, 6 (^a^d^os, ou« 6 a^Gowops? , ou« 
 Cook, 6 {xit-yctpac > a 6 jxa-yEtpo;, ou* 
 Gardener , * 6 wiroupoo ou. 6 ^e^t* 
 
 poXdpvji; , *;. 
 Vine-dresser , 6 dptirsXoup"p; , cu* 
 Ploughman , 6 fcu-f d; , a- 
 
 Bodily Imperfections. 
 
 2w|xc4Tt>ia eXatrtop.aTato 
 
 One-eyed , |AovoG8aXp.oc * 5 , •«• 
 
 £T£pdcp8aX|A0«j, 6 , y> 
 Blind , <rpa$6s » vj y ov- TUcpXo?» 7i * ov. 
 Cross eyed , aXXYiGopo? , v> , ov. 
 Hump-backed , Kau.7roufY); , a. pd- 
 
 jtfrins > taca- 
 JLame, xout'Cqi; > x > o'v > y/oXb;, r, , o'v» 
 Deaf , noun's ? r > ov. 
 Dumb , fkuSos , ri , ov. 
 Stammerer, TpauX*$,Yi, ov* 
 Bald , <paXax,pb$ , e , i. 
 Dwarf , o vavo? , ou. 
 Giant, 6 -yifavrocs » a« 
 
 Accidents Diseases, etc. 
 'ATUy^'^aTa x.al a^poi^tou- 
 
 Happiness, Luck> ■& eu^atfxovta, tots- 
 
 r, ejTuyJa : ca;. , 
 Misfortune , f, ^ucruyja ? ta;. 
 Chance , vj tu*/v). to' dutojiarov ? ou. 
 Invalid, appw<ro<;,- 6, & dvsn{X7ropo? ? y> f 
 
 cv. he is unwell , &h ru,7ropjT. 
 Sickness , Disease , Ailment, -ft dp- 
 
 pw^ta j taj. •yj vo'soc ? cj. to 4 ir«- 
 
 Oo-: , ou. 
 
 OU. 6 tt'jpSTO; , ou. 
 
 Ague , rd auyxpua , 6<av. to £"70$ , 
 ou;. the fit is on him , to\ yjxOe 
 to' pt^o?. 
 
 Shivering 1 , ac dvaf pt^'Xat?. A shiver*- 
 ing has seized him , T ov v,X0o,m 
 dvscTp'.^iXoti-: • dvcitpt^ixcoc s Av«- 
 
 Tpl^lcXCJAa- 
 
 Gout , 7) ^o^a-ypot , a?» 
 
 Colic , xtoXtJco'irovo?. 
 
 Measles , vj Kuostyi^K , «?• ?; £$f«xts» 
 
 Small-pox , r iutap& , id-, he is 
 pock-*marked, pock- fretted, fya 
 tuXo-ytaT?. eiva* euXo^taafisvo;. 
 
 Itch , if] <J;«pa , 014. 
 
 Scrofula , at ^atpa&g; ? wv. 
 
 Abscess , to ! d-jvcV^fta j aro?. to 1 * 
 cr7rup(» 
 
 Swelling , to' Trp*/i<7p;a ? «toc- ( 
 
 Scratch , to' ^ou^pavtcraa ? ato;- 
 
 Slap, Smack , Box , § 6 ^tz^Iq^ 
 * < f » 
 
 to paTrcTao. j arc;. 
 
 Swoon, r, Xi*yo9u{Aia, ia;. r, XqoadpajC^ 
 Death , 6 Oavaro? , eu- 
 
 reptiles and Insects, 
 
 epr*Tcc xat evTorxa. 
 
 Ffog , Pafpa^o? j ou. |3aOpa;':6c > ^*« 
 Snail , oraXia^bs ^ ou- 
 Spider , r, dpa^vrj ? ^5. 
 Serpent,- T 6 cpt^t ^ tou- 
 Butterflly , r t ^eraXcu^a ? ac- 
 Fly , vi p,uqa , a;. 
 Musquito , to kouvoutj ? wu» 
 Caterpillar , V3 XdXa , as- 
 Worm , to <yy.cuXr>-t 5 i*a» 
 Louse , ri t^eTpa j a;. 
 Flea, 'iuXXo; , ou* 
 Bug , 6 jioptb; , tou. 
 Ant , tj p.uoa^^y.'. ? iou* 
 
Rural Objects 
 
 &oad , c £po'tAcs ? ou* 
 
 Wain, § o y.afiTTo? , oo. r, iti§i.i§<X}&--- 
 
 Valley , r , xotXa<5a , a?. 
 
 Mountain, to (3ci»dv,oyV* to opG§. cu;. 
 
 Wood , to ^ac7c; , o;. 
 
 Hedge , 7, «ppafcT7) , y;- 
 
 Tree , T o ekv^pov , o»* 
 
 lS r est , yj ipcoXaia , etas* 
 
 Corn , rb aiTapt . icu- 
 
 Turf j Verdure , r, 77pa<nva<5\x , a?. 
 
 Meadovr , to X$c$i , tou. * 6 XetpStv 
 
 £>vo;. 
 Lake , Pond, 71 Xtuvy , n;. 
 Rocii , £pa/_c; , cu. 
 Rivulet , to puaiei , tou- 
 ixiver , '6 ?rc-afxoc » ou- 
 Bridge , to -yeccupt , icu. 
 Marsh , £ CaXro; , ou- marshy , 
 
 BaX7M(5ViS ? 6 , 7]. 
 Mill , 6 jauXc; ? ou. Wind-mill , 
 avsaojAuXc;. Water -mill. vs- 
 ' pc'auXo?„ 
 Tillage, to y^piov to x«ot6 ? tcu* 
 
 Appertaining to a Town. 
 
 Town, City, r, y.topa, a;. * woXt^ ceo?. 
 Church , vi sxaXycta , ta;. 
 Hospital , '" to vc<jo>ccp.siov , eicu. 
 
 § to ciznik'. , tou. 
 Market , § to ?ra£apt , tou* § ts 
 
 T^apal , tcii. 
 Port, 6 Xiu.iva; > svo;. 
 Custom House , § to xouuupx.t, ttu- 
 
 TO TcXtOVlGV , IGU« 
 
 Prison , § 7) yd^n , y;. y epuXaxy, y*;- 
 Coach, Carriage, T b ka-i, icu- 
 Shop- Workshop, to ep-yasvipiov, tou, 
 Magazine , § to ^.a^alt, iau. * r. 
 avc6TiX7) > y;. 
 
 Colours, 
 W 7 hite , ao-Trpc; , y , ov. 
 Black , p.aupo; , y , ov. blackish , 
 
 ja&Mxftilii y 5 oV jj.JtuQic£p4c, x, o'v. 
 Red , jto'jexivoe , vj , cv- Reddish , 
 
 JiOOCtVttTTO; , y , o'v. 
 
 Green, irpsfotvcs 9 y, , cv- 
 
 Yellow, xtTpivc;, r, , ov. yellowish , 
 
 xtTpivwrro; 3 y ? c'v. 
 Blue , p.a(3u;> eta, u. sky-blue upa» 
 
 voeuH; , 6 $ y. 
 Grey, ^axToet^sj c,r,. ash-coloured, 
 
 Violet , * i'ocic^v,; , 6 , t. 
 
 Minerals. 
 Gold , 6 xpu^o? ■> co. to pa'XatAiiaj 
 
 a-c?. adj , [j.aXaa.aaT£vtc;, ta, tov. 
 Silver , 6 apppc;, cu. Todayui, t2 j. 
 
 adj , aay^svto; , ta ? to>>. Silver 
 
 Coin ,j Money , T a aairpa, 
 
 Plate, Ta acryp.t/toc- 
 Iron , * au^ypo; , cu. tc c:<hpov, ou. 
 Lead, to pwXufJt , tcu. 
 Copper , 6 X aXxb; , su. § t& pira- 
 
 xtpt, tou. 
 Brass, § to xaXdt, i'cu. 
 Tin , 6 -nrdcpuXa; ? a- 
 Sulphur , to Setae?- , tou- 
 Glass , to OaXt > tou. 
 Verbs* 
 To Study , awou^octw. aor. <r a , ©? 
 
 fa part. pass, apivo;. chapduo , 
 
 aor. aa.. part. pass. cpivc;. 
 
 — Learn, p.a6atvw. by heart , — 
 p.aQaivw airs?w , d^o^yOttw. — 
 rehearse , Xe'70 aw'e^w. mentally, 
 dirb jie'ea. 
 
 — Read , £iaj3a£o> , dvay.vwcxw, 
 like, -j'lvwfficto. 
 
 — Sign , uwypacpM. 
 
 — Seal, § €o'j)Xo'v(o. cra»pa-v'''^<o« 
 -— Fold , ^iTvXdvw. spread, qa.tXo'vwf 
 
 aor. toaa. part, pass, tojxsvo?. 
 
 — Correct , <hop6oW aor. <o©a 
 partic. pass. ^opOcopivos. 
 
 lEfiace, c^uvu. irr. 
 
 Translate, p.£Ta©p«^«. aor. <ya. part. 
 
 pass. «y. w ;,. 
 
 i3 
 
To Continue, ij[etx*Xoud$> et; 9 6r«£. 
 
 Finish , reXeiovw. aor. w<ja. part, 
 pass. wf/,svo?. 
 
 Do , make , xaavw^ in*. 
 
 Know , ^e»p«>. irr. 
 
 To be able , * <$uvatX«i. irr. 
 
 Pronounce , wpocpego). 
 
 Accentuate , rovt^w. aor.><^. part, 
 pass. fffAevo.g. 
 
 Say, speak, Xs'yw. converse , fy.t- 
 X« , si?. 
 
 Prattle , chatter, § Xa*pi£eu&>. Xa- 
 X5> , et?« 
 
 Ba w i , vociferate , cry , <pcDva£o>« 
 aor. |at. 
 
 Open , avofyw. aor. rIvoi<fa. Adj 
 instead of part: past , avowry, 
 H, o'v , opened. 
 
 Shut , *$ «Xyu , a-, aor. ncrx- part 
 pass. c^aXvic^£;o?" common in- 
 stead of pa Ft. past, adj er<p<xXr 
 
 <?QS , VI , OV. 
 
 To be silent ,. gm-xa , «;. aor. ^orx* 
 Call, jcpat^o) , aor. £«. 
 Answer, a7rottptvop.au aor. Oviv- 
 
 Of eating and drinking. 
 
 To drink , -reivw. 
 
 Eat, Tpw-yeo. 
 
 Masticate, chew, ymsa , e?$ ? aor. 
 
 vjt>a- part. pass, yipivo?. 
 Swalicw , xaTraTTtvo. 
 Cut , xoTTTb). aor. ^«. part. pass. 
 
 sco p. p.£vo?. 
 To clean , wash, rjrtse, ttXuvw aor. 
 
 sVXuva- pass. swXuGVjv. part. pass. 
 
 -TrXup.e'vo^. 
 
 — Fast , v73seu&). aor. c«. 
 
 - — Dine', -^yep-at. aor. g-ysuS.viv. to 
 
 breakfast , 7rpo*y£Uop.x;. 
 • — Sup , S'stiuvw ,eT?. or 5;. aor. vicra. 
 
 — Get drunk to intoxicate one- 
 
 self 
 
 5 \> 
 
 p.£9fi> 
 
 >or. ua«. 
 
 — Satisfy., and t© be satisfied , airXuTo$,«v 
 
 X«?Tatvo. aos. e/ZpTaca. f>art, 
 
 pass. yopracrij.Evoc. See p. 88. 
 To Be hungry , U£lv s> ,- «-. aor. 
 
 acra. part., pass. wetvac;p.svo$- y 
 
 hungered. 
 — - Thirsty, £i<J/a>, a?, aor. affa . part. 
 
 pass. ^aap.s'vo? , thirsty. 
 
 About going to bed and rising. 
 To go to bed , irXa-yia&w. aor. $&* 
 
 — Rise, get up, crjxa'vo^ai.pass- 
 
 of gyijco'vw. 
 - — Sleep, jcotp.S>p.&i. 
 *»■ Make" sleep , airojcstpC^o , jwr 1 
 
 p.i^w. aor. <ya. part. pass, %ct~ 
 
 p.i<jp,s'vo;. 
 
 — Go to sleep , aw©)totp,S>p.at. aor, 
 tq9viv- 
 
 — Awake , or keep watch, a-YpuTC- 
 vw , si;, aor. r,<ra. £tp.at i'lurrvo; , 
 elysrvb? , yi , o'v. 
 
 - — Repose, rest oneself, geseoupff- 
 £op.at. aor. gOyiv-. part. pass, £e<* 
 
 XGl»p(XGp.£VO;. 
 
 . — - Dream, 6veipsuop.au aor. 6r,v. 
 
 — Snore , po-^aXc£o>. aor. ox. 
 
 — Awaken , — rouse oneself 
 ^uiwu , a;, aor. y^a. whence, 
 £uti;vy)t6?, t j o'v , sprightly lively. 
 
 - — Dress, Iv^uvw , aor. oa . to dress 
 oneself, £v£uvcp.at. aor. 6r,v. part. 
 pass. ev^upivo;- dressed. 
 
 — Undress , ss^uvw. aor. aa . mu 
 dress oneself, £ 'x£uvop.au aor. 6nv* 
 part. pass, e/.oupivo? , undrest. 
 
 — Comb r xt£v(Cw. aor. <ja- comb 
 oneself , xT6vi?ofi.ai aor. sOnv. 
 part. pass, jcTEvicpivo?. combed* 
 oVrsVigo; , o , V) , uncombed. 
 
 — Wash , ttXuvw , viSw , aor. 4'oCf 
 wash oneself, <rcXyvop.au vt£op.ai^ 
 aor. co0r ( v. part. pass, vtp.u.s'vo> 
 
 ;vt<pTo«, 6 , • ■«. unwashed- 
 
Jo Paint, qma'vo(/.cH aor. G 8r,v. part. 
 
 pass. , ap,svo? , from , cpriavco- to 
 
 make , 
 
 Common actions. 
 To Laugh , ^eXw , a?, aor. aca. 
 
 — Weep , jc).ct(co. irr. 
 
 • — Sigh , ^eva&rt.'avas-Sva&a. aor. i-a. 
 
 — Breathe , ava-^vs'co. irr. avacaivw. 
 aor. ava. 
 
 - — Sneeze (jprepviCoaai. aor. eursp- 
 
 — Gape , yawn , ^affjioupsiou^at. 
 aor. ri0Yiv. 
 
 — Blow, puff, TOUffto, a?, aor. r,ca, 
 
 — Whistle , snp'Zai- cyuoi'Cu. 
 
 •*- Listen , hearken, axoozUpzi. 
 
 aor. rr^odoHf. 
 ! — Hear , «>ccu0. aor. ca. part. 
 
 pass,, a^'vo;. 
 
 — Feel , a i<y8a'vop.«t. aor. aicdavSviy.- 
 ■ — Spit, cpt6(j). aor. era- 
 
 — Blow or wipe the nose , a ~o- 
 [j.'jliZ.o. . aor. tea- snuff the candle, 
 § Izftikifa. aor. ca. part. pass. 
 valve'?, 
 
 -*- Perspire , t^povta. aor. W ca. part. 
 
 pass. i^:o)^3v»;. in perspiration. 
 i — Wipe^ccfou-p/^cD , aor. ? «. part. 
 
 pass, ffjisvo?- 
 
 — Tremble , Tp=|tw. 
 
 — Cough , (jrr/o. aor. £ tt . 
 
 ■ — Pinch, § T&fMwS , a?, aor. yjaa. 
 
 — Scrape, scratch, scrub, £ug>. irr. 
 - — Tickle, ^ap^aXCCo. 
 
 Actions of kindness hatred etc. 
 
 To love , a-ya^co , a;, aor. vj«a part. 
 
 pass, r.y.svo;. 
 Caress , ywJeuca. aor. ca. part. 
 
 pass, p.s'v:;. 
 Flatter , xeXaxeuo. aor. ca- part. 
 
 pass. a=vc;. 
 Make much of , court friendship } 
 
 Wcpncoiou {/.at? aor. r,0riv- 
 Embrace, * fteTr«&it«i. <*-fxaX^o{A«tj 
 
 r 79 
 
 aor. cflviv. part. pass.,o^)caX:ff^e'voj. 
 Kiss , cptXcb , el; , or «;. aor. vi«y«. 
 Salute , ^atpsTia , a;, wpccxuvw , Etjy 
 
 aor. y,ca. 
 Teach , (Svj'a'axct). IpfjunveiStD. 
 Nurse, nurture, bring up, rps'ftt* 
 
 aor. 6 a . part. pass. OpspifcEvc?. 
 Suckle, po"Cavto. aor. Ha. part. pass. 
 
 Punish , wat<hu&>. aor. ca. part. 
 
 pass. pivo?. 
 Commend , praise , l^atvw , eT?i 
 
 s-rratvoup.at. aor. sOnv- 
 Blame, accuse, y.'Azrqopa , etj, 
 Give, ^to , irr. /.apt^u, aor. ck; 
 Procure , «po|Arj8s6co, aor. ca. part. 
 
 pass. p.s'v&-. 
 Deny, apvouffat. aor. xGyiv. 
 Hinder , gp,«o£i£a. aor. ca- part, 
 
 pass, cusve-. 
 Defend, urspac-ju^oaat. §<hacp£vTc£&)o 
 
 aor. sa. part. pass. p,evo;. 
 Beat, strike , <h'pve>. irr. *tuit& a?. 
 
 aor. yjca, part. pass. , r,u.:vo;. 
 Hate , p.iao, si?- aor. visa, part, 
 
 pass. Yijiivos* 
 Drive away , ^wo^vw. aor. £a. part, 
 
 pass, -yjins'vc?. 
 Pardon , cuy/wpo) , a!?, aor. visa, 
 
 part. pass. «pivoc . 
 Dispute, <ptXoveixw , si-, quarrel, 
 
 scold , paXovto. aor. w©a- part. 
 
 pass, (ops'vo;. 
 Protect, ^pco^a-cjw. aor. ca uirepa- 
 
 qwi^ofiuai. aor. «8t:v- part. pass. 
 
 cus'vo;. 
 Abandon , I-yxaTaXei?*©.. leave 3 
 
 acpivw ? irr. 
 Fear, be afraid of, acpcuu.ai, stoat, 
 
 and wai. aor. efflo[H6?jv; part, 
 
 pass, cpo'o'.cjxs'vc;. 
 Frighten, cpo£i&>. aor. ca. threaten^ 
 
 cpc[jcp ; ^o , aor. ca. 
 Tremble ( with fear ) T pcus£a 9 
 
 a<er. £*; part. pass, -r^opocc^vc^ 
 
To observe, see, look at, [5),Ei7w.irr. 
 
 joTra^o). aor. \%. 6swf w , £15. aor. 
 
 vicra. part. pass. , yip,s'voc> 
 Move , Ktvw , sT;, and &;. aor. v>ca, 
 
 part. pass. , yjpivoc;, 
 Examine, e£s-a£w. aor. oa. part. 
 
 pass. , o|xs'vo ? . 
 Smell «<:£ and neut , p,upi£co. aor* 
 
 era. rt sup.opcpov rptavrdcpuXXov, p.u- 
 
 ptas to. what a fine rose, <S7/Z£// it, 
 
 p,uj>i£si jco-Xa , it smells well. 
 
 Of Diversion and Amusement. 
 
 Divert, amuse oneself, ^taotEc^to, 
 
 £scpav~o'v to. § s-yXevt^w , aor. era. 
 Sing, rpa-pxSw, ei? and £;, aor. vicra. 
 Dance , xopEoo , aor. era. 
 Jump , leap , m^S , a;, aor, vjcra. 
 Play , Tral&a. aor. 5*. 
 Ride, § jcaPaXXiasuco. 
 Gain , xEpcWfco. aor. era. jcspcfaivw. 
 
 aor. ava. part. pass. n\i.Uo$. 
 Lose , xavco. aor. acra. part. pass. 
 
 ^apivo?. 
 Bet,j3d^to q oiyrn&ci.. £ot£Y]p.aT(£io=aor.cra 
 Risk , javdWuo) aor. era. 
 Joke, ^topaxeuco- aor. era- [/.sTwpl^o^ai, 
 Stand C upright) gsxop,ai op8o'?. 
 Bend, scXivto. aor. va. part.pass. pivo$. 
 Stoop , aaucpTto. aor. <},«. whence ., 
 
 ewjcpTO? , *a » ov , stooping. 
 Turn , ppifra. aor. oa. part pass. 
 
 ertxe'vo;. 
 Stop , (jajxarw cc'xop.at. irr. 
 Walk . TFep'.^aTco , eTg- aor. vicrot. 
 Walk forward , 7vpo7raTfi>., et«. *&e, 
 
 TfarS). 
 Go, TTYi^atvw. irr. 
 Come, 1'px.op.at. irr. 
 Remain, pivco. >cd6op.as irr. 
 Run , rpf/w. irr. 
 Follow, ajcoXou85> , va , and «?. aor. 
 
 r/cra , part. pass, vjae'vo;. 
 Escape , ^Xutovw. aor. wsa. 
 
 To set off, or out , ^tcrsuw. a©r. «* 
 
 epsu'yw , irr. ava^wpo>. 
 Advance , irpo^wpw , si/, aor. r,ca;» 
 
 part. pass. y^sW. 
 Remove from , d77op,a>cpuvio. axop.a- 
 
 jcpu\op.ai. aor. uvGviv, part, pass, 
 
 divop.axpucrp.svo?. 
 Approach , act and neut, bring 
 
 near, 7rXYicrta£M. eps'pto jcovrd, IV 
 
 ^ojiat jeovTot* 
 Fall , iTscprw. irr. 
 
 Slide, slip , <yXu<rpfi> , 5«. aor. 73^ 
 Arrive, ep9a'v&>. irr. 
 Enter , ep^aivw. irr. 
 Go out , ep-vutveo , irr. 
 Ascend , dvai(3aiv&> , irr. 
 Descend , KaTaipacvu. irr. 
 Hurry act, (Stock*, aor. ff a. hasten 
 
 «<?« , |3icf£op,at. aor. <j6yiv. part. 
 
 pass. ap.£v55- 
 Begin , apy tv« , a?, aor. yjcra. part; 
 
 pass, vifjuevo?* dpj^ta. aor. ua. part* 
 
 pass.. er^e'vo{. 
 Help , aid, p.aTa7uavo>. aor. era* 
 
 part. pass. apivoc;. 
 Succour , pon8a> , els* aor. ■« era- 
 part, pass. y)p.s'v,oc. 
 Grasp, seize, hold firmly, xpara* 
 
 ets, aor. vicra^ 
 Cure , tarpeu^. Ospairaueo. aor. era. 
 Bleed f epXEl3orop.fi>, eT?. eS-yce^eo alp.a* 
 
 Of buying etc. 
 Ask the price , epwrfi) rriv Tip-rlv* 
 
 wo'cra e'x,ei- Tco'oa § &tse;i£st. 
 Measure ; p,£Tpfi> , eT; , and a;. 
 Buy , dfopd^ta. aor. era. part. apivo^ 
 
 at a high price , dearly, dwtgi(3a. 
 
 cheaply , gu8v!va. for nothing, 
 
 for a song, ^aptcrp,«. 
 Sell , TPtoXS , sis- aor. nera part. pass. 
 
 Yijuvog. 
 Pay , icXvipovu. aor. ©era- part. 
 
 pass. ©pivas. 
 Offer, 7ipoercp£eo>. <p/po)° 
 
i8i 
 
 101 
 To propose, Trpo^ocXXw. aor. inpo€aX<£ To Cover , exiizxfal aor. era. part 
 hend , £avsi£w. aor - w. borrow , 
 
 <$\xvei£oj/.at- aor. c9r ( v. 
 Cheat , cajole , fsX£> , a;, aor. act. 
 
 xax. pass. oOviv. part. pass. <rtXa- 
 
 pass. CU.1V0;. 
 Uncover', ^scocercaCw , dvaxaXuTvtu , 
 
 Manual Acts. 
 Work , IfYa^ofjiai. aor. crGv)v. <^ou- 
 
 Xeu». aor. c?a- part. pass. pive;. 
 
 *cTCta£w , aor. ©a- 
 Touch, lay hold of, inavw. aor. ex. 
 
 ifyiCtt- aor - act - ?«■ aor - pass. 
 
 X^viv- part. pass. s-^i^uivo;. 
 Handle , p,aXacrcr<«>. $¥jXaf&* 
 Bind, tie , <h'vw. irr. 
 Untie, unbind , loose, x6<o, aor. 
 
 ex. part. pass. ii.evo$> 
 Leave, dtatveo. irr. 
 Remove, take away, ip-fateo. irr. 
 Take , we'pvw. irr. 
 Draw , drag, Tpa£o>, a?, aor. act. 
 
 rj;a. pass, ifyfaiv. part. pass. rpa- 
 
 3*^u.=vo;. withdraw , TpaPs'.cojAxt. 
 Fly, 778-w, a;, aor. a£a. 
 Rob , steal , xXenro). aor. ^ a . part, 
 
 pass. p.u.j'vo?. 
 Search , rummage , M%w, aor. £a. 
 Gather , <juva£ia. aor. £%. part. pass. 
 
 Collect , paScvw. aor. «$a. part. 
 
 pass. , ti>u.2vo?. 
 Present , Trpocjcpspw. wappvicta^u. 
 
 aor. ax, part. pass, euAvo;. 
 Receive, <h'xcu.ai. oar. iktfw Adj 
 
 Sextos, W 5 ov. 
 Squeeze , ccp-^w. aor. |«, part. 
 
 pass, -yiAs'vo?. 
 Hold , ga^w, a?, aor. a£a. jcoxtu, si? , 
 Fiend, tear, C7 vci, as- aor. x<jx. part. 
 
 pass, cjracf/.c'vo;. 
 Spoil , destroy , xa Xv« , a?, aor. 
 
 e^aXaffa. part. pass. ^aXa<r 4 u.evo;. 
 Crush, ffuvrptSo, like rp$». 
 'Hide, xp-jTTTw. aor. 6a. part. pass. 
 
 imsvoj. 
 
 aor. ijiz, part. pass. ^5704. 
 Soil , § Xepo'vw. aor. <a<ja. 
 Clean , Tra^pe-jw. aor. era. 
 Rub , t^'!3o>. aor. act. tyx. pass. 
 
 srpiSviv and erptcpQ'/iv. part. pass. 
 
 Tpia;j.£vo;. 
 Scratch, £ou-fr?avi£&>. aor. coc. part. 
 
 pass cjxs'vo;. 
 Paint, ^pa^o), oar. iex- part, 
 
 pass, cas'vo?. 
 Engrave , yxXwypxya sv/aparto; 
 Draw , outline, -Ypjfow. ipcA'pa'pS^sTc? 
 Sketch , CTyj^ia^o. aor. era- 
 Embroider, xevTU) el«. or <£?. aor.r.ax» 
 Gild , vpudovw. aor. waa. 
 Plate , a<T^u.o'v». aor. ©tya* 
 Print , t'jtto'vw. aor. <acra. 
 Build , x~[£g>- aor. ax. part. pass. 
 
 Plough , op^ovw. aor. wcra. 
 
 Kill , GxoTo'vo). tpoveuto. oneself, ctjmto- 
 vop.at- 
 
 Wound , TrXYiyo'vco. Xa£o'v». 
 
 Saw , irptovtC&>. aor. ex. 
 
 Sail , tpXsw. ap^£vtCw* 
 
 Rov/ , xcoTT'/iXarw, si;. rpa(3a> TOxourcU' 
 
 Carry, cpe'pw and <pe'pva>. aor. act. sips- 
 pa. aor. pass, scpipdviv- part. pass. 
 
 py.s'vo;. whence , veoospuivc; , 
 
 <psp r > 
 
 newly arrived, 
 
 aor* era- part, 
 part. 
 
 ass. 
 
 Transport , xoy{3aXi£ta 
 
 pass, ci/.cvc?- 
 Pound , xoiravifo- aor. era 
 
 pass, cru-svo;. 
 Bake, ^vu. aor. vjcr*. part, p 
 
 ^•niAsvc?. whence , to <j J /5rov. 
 Boi!, Bpa^co. aor. era part.pass. cras'vo;. 
 
 whence , T o Spa^-ov , boiledmedt. 
 Fry , Tr^av^w. aor, ex- part.pass. 
 
 0a?VO^v 
 
I 82 
 
 Operations of the Mind. 
 To remember, ev8upou|jiai, sloai and, 
 
 aarai- aor. viOnv- 
 Remind , IvQua^to- aor. ca- 
 Forget, Xmo^ovco) eis* £ex,vw 3 a;, like, 
 
 X,avca- to lose. 
 Foresee, provide , irpc(3Xe'7re>. 
 Meditate , {aeXetco, «?. aor. yica. 
 Premeditate , apcpeXETtt , £5. 
 Be willing, 9s'Xco. irr. 
 Desire , &t6uu$ , et;- aor. y) ffa . 
 Think , £oyjx£o{/.at. aor. cOw« 
 Relieve, ?n<rE'jco. aor, ffa . 
 Doubt , a^cptpaXXw. aor* dtxcpLgaXa* 
 
 ^JiSpeCt , U7T07TTEUCO. UTC07rT£'JO TOV 
 
 av9p«7rov ? I suspect the Man , 
 fofoirrEUGJAffci oil Sccyeivvi auro xa>cc', 
 I suspect that this will turn out 
 ill , or end badly. 
 
 Observe remark, TrapaTYipw, et?. aor. 
 Yi«a. part. pass. , yip.=vo?. 
 
 Beware of, take care of, attend to, 
 cpuXa^cp.at. aor.^Gy;v. Trpoas'^a). 
 
 Know, -yvwpt^w. aor. aa. part. pass. 
 
 Imagine , ©avTa&fAai. aor. ff Qy]v , 
 
 part. pass. , ^^05. 
 "Wish , eu^o^.au aor. euyjvifiviv. irr, 
 Hope , sXtuCo. aor. ffa . 
 Assure , p £ 3aio'vw. aor, wc-a- part 
 
 pass, cojasvo?. 
 Judge , xpi'vw. aor. V a- 
 Conclude, infer, cufATCepaiW aor 
 
 ava. part. pass. , a^lvo?. 
 Conjecture , efoeeCto. aor. ca- part. 
 
 pass, gjas'vo?. 
 Besolve , determine , airctpaai&a. 
 
 aor ca. part, pass , c^e'vo?. 
 #?eign, aau.cvou.ai. Trpoffrtiouaai; sccai- 
 
 To be irritable , irapawlpvepai. 
 
 — be quiet, to calm, or compose 
 oneself, ^u^afra. aor. ex. 
 
 — be deceived, mistaken , Xav9o* 
 vou.at. irr. 
 
 Embroil, su.irepiS'euto. aor. aa. £M,irsp- 
 
 <S'e6cu.ai. aor. Oyiv. part, pass., u,s'vo$. 
 Envy, to be jealous , SyiXeuw , and 
 
 ^cryXsuw. aor.oa. cp9ov£>) ET-.aor.Yica, 
 
 part pass. vijiivos. 
 Hate, jxtcw, el?, aor. yxra. part. pass. 
 
 v)f&sv&€< whence , {mot/it^s , V) 3 c'v , 
 
 hateful odious, 
 I am sorry , ^s aaxo^paiv&Tat. 
 J like it , to vogiu.£uoj/.at.' u. apsa-si; 
 
 I don't like it, <Hv jt'aps'aei. 
 To be angry , fio£&|», aor, w <xa. 
 
 part. pass. eufjuouivo?. 
 Pout, sulk , jxavi'Co). aor, w«. part, 
 
 pass. {j.avicr{j(.svGs» 
 Quarrel dispute , ^aXo'vw. aor. o<j«; 
 Offend , hurt , give pain, wucpaiVw. 
 
 aor. act. ava- aor. pass. aOnv.part, 
 
 pass. , atts've?. 
 It goes against me, I find it hard, 
 
 <5 , ucJtcX£uo^ai , aor. 8nv. 
 I lament, X'jircup.at, ETorat , or Sofa. 
 
 aor r.Qyjv. part, pass.", Xutcyiusvo? ? 
 
 afflicted , £ £v Xunrarai ra a'crrpa , 
 
 he grieves not about , does not 
 
 regret the Money , Traparcovcij- 
 
 pat', eujat , aor. e9v)v. 
 Weary, tire, jtoupa^^ aor ffa . part. 
 
 pass, cmevog a7co<^aivo) > act. neut. 
 
 aor. irr. a5tt . part. pass. , d-nrcq-a- 
 
 p.s'vo? , act. and neut. , I have 
 
 tired my horse, arco'ca^* to aXcyo'v 
 
 p.00. My Horse is tired, to dXcr/oy 
 
 FINIS, 
 
i83 
 
 The fdilowincf are errors that may mislead , and therefore 
 Gu«ht to he noted by a learner. Some few others have been 
 tin avoidable ; but they are such , or so circumstanced , that 
 they can hardly, it is hoped , lead to a mistake, 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Page. Line, 
 
 6 5 For U%k *ead Zx^k 
 
 to 17 — (i-CU ~ {ACU 
 
 tt 9 — Tf&S ' Tf sX l 
 
 ib. 13 — to leasee ~~ to '<SWs 
 
 ib. ib. — to e^oxe — ' to e^wtfs 
 
 ib. 14 — ' tcj to 'ira — ' tcj -0 wa 
 
 !2 22 — * toy to '77a ■— ~c\> to ira 
 
 i5 1 —> i — tj 
 
 3i 3o — tU — *U 
 
 42 22 — eppt^a — - eponpx SeeP. 77 , 1. 15- 
 
 54 23 — «Yp«<pcujjtacs — "ypawpoupx^e 
 
 69 12 — ' 5>[/.e8a — w(asOx 
 
 go 7 — sCcysvcia ca? — eu^evia <ra.; 
 
 109 1 5 — t! va xau.w — ' Tt va xat&c* 
 
 no 32 — ■ Figure 6 ought to be placed before « fVhen orav,» 
 
 line 22. 
 rr2 5 — ff/fcer say razt? « the latter » 
 
 i3i 24 — incipient Vowel read incipient long Vowel. 
 
 Chapter has, in references, been sometimes misnumbered, as at P. 4 2 
 and 58 j three should , in such cases, be added to the number, 
 
g 441 
 
 % . 
 
%-^V V^V V^>° 
 
 ;S5R- : ** v % '-SHE*' s*\ s «5Wf ** v % 3H 
 
 ^1 
 
 • i*^ "«^^P» A^f - 
 
 * «? ^. "VMS)?* AV "<>. • 
 
 
 
 
 ." .►* ■* 
 
 
 jP-^ 
 
 F* aV^ - 
 
 :• «*. a* 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 '. V^*' 
 
 • ^ ^ 
 
 .* 
 
 
 »♦>' .•••.. <s>. 
 
 
 4 0-a 
 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
 ^~ 4. V Ofl Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 
 o ^£- ^ V f %k Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 • £*W *°W PreservationTechnologies 
 
 'Wm\v? ♦^ : ll3lf" ^'V ^W PreservationTechnologies 
 
 V^N V ^ ^HflHKy^ 4 -V ^ "V^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESEBVATIOr 
 
 *• • * * **\ ^ A *<VC»* *G^ V? "« 111 Thomson Park Drive 
 
 ' A> »e *t*6 -.^ Lit *^ Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 

 %s ' 
 
 
 *t** a" 
 
 A 
 
 
 4? 
 
 A w 9 ,l m 
 
 ° <0 A 
 
 
 
 • ^V-fflBF.^ 
 
 % ***** A <* *??7r % a g* ^ *••»• A 
 
 ... ^ 
 
 "fav* : 
 
 ■»• 4.°-^ *: 
 
 To° .«o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 %<* 
 
 
 ..^.2i^.V ^>*»!k-i:..^ ^.ifife-V 
 
 
 
 \. ^W?- 5 ^ 1 ^ : -SK»' /\ s wR- \^ 
 
 
 F* .4 
 
 
 
 
 • # ^ 
 
 
 «,. A* * 
 
 * 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 v * '•3Bf'^* , \ ; «5R-'.^ v \ '• 
 
 %<?- 
 
 j***. 
 & % 
 
 
 •o. •.; 
 
 V<\.i^, % 
 
 ■ B 
 
 .* *\ 
 
 
 
 "^ ^